AC 11.5.2017
Item No. 4 .180
UNIVERSITYOFMUMBAI
Revised syllabus (Rev - 2016) from Academic Year 2016 -17
Under
FACULTY OF TECHNOLOGY
Information Technology
Second Year with Effect from AY 2017 -18
Third Year with Effect from AY 2018 -19
Final Year with Effect from AY 2019 -20
As per Choice Based Credit and Grading System
with effect from the AY 2016 –17
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 2
Co-ordinator, Faculty of Technology’s Preamble:
To meet the challenge of ensuring excellence in engineering education, the issue of quality needs to be
addressed, debated and taken forw ard in a systematic manner. Accreditation is the principal means of quality
assurance in higher education. The major emphasis of accreditation process is to measure the outcome s of the
program that is being accredited. In line with this Faculty of Technolo gy of University of Mumbai has taken a
lead in incorporating philosophy of outcome based education in the process of curriculum development .
Faculty of Technology, University of Mumbai, in one of its meeting unanimously resolved that, each B oard of
Studie s shall prepare some Program Educational Objectives (PEO’s) and give freedom to affiliated Institute s to
add few (PEO’s). It is also resolved that course objectives and course outcomes are to be clearly d efined for
each course, so that all faculty members in affiliated institutes understand the depth and approach of course to
be taught, which will enhance learner’s learning process. It was also resolved that, maximum senior faculty
from colleges and experts from industry to be involved while revising the c urriculum. I am happy to state that,
each Board of studies has adhered to the resolutions passed by Faculty of Technology, and developed
curriculum accordingly. In addition to outcome based education, semester based credit and grading sy stem is
also introd uced to ensure quality of engineering education.
Choice based Credit and Grading system enables a much -required shift in focus from teacher -centric to learner -
centric education since the workload estimated is based on the investment of time in learning an d not in
teaching. It also focuses on continuous evaluation which will enhance the quality of education. Univ ersity of
Mumbai has taken a lead in implementing the system through its affiliated Institutes and Faculty of Technology
has devised a transparent credit assignment policy and adopted ten points scale to grade learner’s performance.
Credit assignment for courses is based on 15 weeks teaching learning process, however content of cou rses is to
be taught in 12 -13 weeks and remaining 2 -3 weeks to be util ized for revision, guest lectures, coverage of
content beyond syllabus etc.
Choice based Credit and grading system is implemented from the academic year 2016 -17 through optional
courses at department and institute level. This will be effective for SE, TE and BE from academic year 2017 -
18, 2018 -19 and 2019 -20 respectively.
Dr. S. K. Ukarande
Co-ordinator,
Faculty of Technology,
Member - Academic Council
University of Mumbai, Mumbai
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 3
Preamble
It is an honor and a privilege to present the revised syllabus of Bachelor of Engineering in Information
Technology (effective from year 2016 -17) with inclusion of cutting edge technology.
Information Technology is comparatively a young branch among other engineering disciplines in the University
of Mumbai. It is evident from the placement statistics of various colleges affiliated to the University of Mumb ai
that IT branch has taken the lead in the placement. The branch also provides multi -faceted scope like better
placement and promotion of entrepreneurship culture among students, and increased Industry Institute
Interactions.
Industries views are that, only 16 % graduates are directly employable. One of the reasons is a syllabus which is
not in line with the latest technologies. Our team of faculties has tried to include all the latest technologies in t he
syllabus. Also the first time we are giving the choice of elective from fifth semester such that stu dents will be
master in one of the IT domain.
The sy llabus is peer reviewed by experts from reputed industries and as per their suggestions it covers fu ture
trends in IT technology and research opportunities available due to these trends.
I would like to thank senior faculties of IT department of all colleg es affiliated to Mumbai University for
significant contribution in framing the syllabus. Also behalf of all faculties I thank all the indus try experts for
their valuable feedback and suggestions.
I sincerely hope that the revised syllabus will help all gra duate engineers to face the future challenges in the
field of information and technology
Program Outcome for graduate Program in Information Technology
1. Apply Core Information Technology knowledge to develop stable and secure IT system .
2. Design, IT infrastructures for an enterprise using concepts of best practices in information
Technology management and security to enterprise processes.
3. Manage IT projects using written and oral communication skills in collaborative environments by
Participating on teams that address solutions for IT management challenges.
4. Identify and discuss professional, individual, organizati onal, societal, and regulatory implications of
Information systems and technology.
5. Assess Security of the IT Systems and able to respond to any breach in IT system
6. Ability to work in multidisciplinary projects and make it IT enable d.
7. Ability to propose the system to reduce carbon footprint.
8. Ability to adapt the lifelong learning process to be in sync with trends in Information Technology
Dr. Deven Shah
Chairman (Ad -hoc Board Information Technology)
University o f Mumbai)
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 4
University of Mumbai
Program Structure B.E. Information Technology, (Rev. 2016)
S. E. Information Technology ( Semester -III)
Course
Code Course
Name Teaching Scheme
(Contact Hours) Credits Assigned
Theory Pract Tut Theory TW/
Pract Tut Total
ITC301 Applied Mathematics III 4+1@ - - 5 - - 5
ITC302 Logic Design 4 - - 4 - - 4
ITC303 Data Structures & Analysis 4 - - 4 - - 4
ITC304 Database Management System 4 - - 4 - - 4
ITC305 Principle of Communications 3+1$ - - 4 - - 4
ITL301 Digital Design Lab - 2 - - 1 - 1
ITL302 Data Structures Lab - 2 - - 1 - 1
IT303 SQL Lab - 2 - 1 - 1
ITL304 Java Programming Lab - 2+2* - - 2 - 2
Total 21 10 - 21 5 - 26
Course
Code Course
Name Examination Scheme
Theory
TW Oral Oral
&
Pract
Total Internal Assessment End
Sem.
Exam Exam
Duration
( in Hrs) Test 1 Test 2 Avg.
ITC301 Applied Mathematics III 20 20 20 80 3 - - - 100
ITC302 Logic Design 20 20 20 80 3 - - - 100
ITC303 Data Structures &
Analysis 20 20 20 80 3 - - - 100
ITC304 Database Management
System 20 20 20 80 3 - - - 100
ITC305 Principle of
Communications 20 20 20 80 3 -- - - 100
ITL301 Digital Design Lab - - - - - 25 --
25 50
ITL302 Data Structures Lab - - - - - 25 -- 25 50
IT303 SQL Lab - - - - - 25 - 25 50
ITL304 Java Programming Lab - - - - - 50 -- 50 100
Total 100 100 100 400 - 125 -- 125 750
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 5
@ 4 hours shown as theory to be taken class wise and 1 hour to be taken tutorial as class wise
$ 3 hours shown as theory to be taken class wise and 1 hour to be taken tutorial as batch wise
* 2 hours shown as practical’s to be taken class wise lecture and another 2 hours to be taken as
batch wise practices in the lab .
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 6
Course
Code Course Name Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Oral &
Practical Tutorial Total
ITC301 Applied Mathematics
III 04 -- 01 04 -- -- 05
Course
Code Course
Name Examination Scheme
Theory Marks
Term
Work Oral &
Practical Oral Total Internal assessment
End
Sem.
Exam Test1 Test 2 Avg. of
Two
Tests
ITC301 Applied
Mathematics
III 20 20 20 80 -- -- -- 100
Course Objectives: Students will try to learn:
1. The concepts of Set theory and Relation.
2. The concepts of Functions and define the recursive functions.
3. The concept of Laplace transforms .
4. The concept of Inverse Laplace transforms .
5. The concept of permutations and combinations.
6. The concept of variable and also identify the mapping.
Course Outcomes: Students wil l able to:
1. Apply the Set theory and Relation concepts.
2. Apply the Functions and define the recursive functions.
3. Apply Laplace transform to different applications.
4. Apply Inverse Laplace transform to different applications.
5. Identify the permutations and comb inations.
6. Define variable and also identify the mapping.
Prerequisite: Applied Mathematics I, Applied Mathematics II
Detailed syllabus:
Sr.
No. Module Detailed Content Hours CO
Mapping
0 Prerequisite Basic of AM -I and AM -II. 02
I Set Theory Set Theory: Definition of Sets,
Venn Diagrams, complements,
cartesian products, power sets,
counting principle, cardinality and
countability (Countable and
Uncountable sets), proofs of some
general identities on sets,
pigeonhole principle. 08 CO1
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 7
II Relation &
Function Relation: Definition, types of
relation, composition of relations,
domain and range of a relation,
pictorial representation of relation,
properties of relation, partial
ordering relation.
Function: Definition and types of
function, comp osition of functions,
recursively defined functions. 08 CO1
CO2
III Laplace Transform Introduction, Definition of Laplace
transforms Laplace transform of
constant, trigonometrical,
exponential functions. Important
properties of Laplace transform:
First shifting theorem, Laplace
transform of L f (at),nL t f (t),
f (t)Lt ,n
nd f (t)Ldt
,t
0L f (u)du
(all without proof ).
Unit step function, Heavi side
function, Dirac -delta function,
Periodic function and their Laplace
transforms, Second shifting
theorem. 08
CO3
IV Inverse Laplace
Transform Inverse Laplace transform with
Partial fraction and Convolution
theorem (without proof).
Application to solve initial and
boundary value problem involving
ordinary differential equations with
one dependent variable and
constan t coefficients.
08 CO4
V Complex Variable
& mapping Functions of a complex variable,
Analytic functions, Cauchy -
Riemann equations in Cartesian co -
ordinates, Polar co -ordinates.
Harmonic functions, Analytic
method and Milne Thomson
methods to find f(z), Orthogonal
trajectories.
Conformal Mapping, Linear,
Bilinear transformations, Cross
ratio, fixed points and standard
transformation such as rotation and
magnification, inversion,
translation. 10 CO6
VI Permutations,
Combinations and
Probability Rule of sum and product,
Permutations, Combinations,
Algorithms for generation of 08 CO5
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 8
Permutations and Combinations.
Discrete Probability, Conditional
Probability, Bayes’ Theorem,
Information and Mutual
Information.
Text Books:
1. Higher Engineering Mathematics by Grewal B. S. 38th edition, Khanna Publication 2005.
2. Advanced Engineering Mathematics by Kreyszig E. 9th edition, John Wiley.
3. A Text Book of Applied Mathematics Vol. I & II by P.N.Wartilar & J.N.Wartikar, Pune,
Vidyarthi Griha Prakashan, Pune.
4. Modern Digital Electronics by R. P. Jain 8th edition, Tata Mcgraw Hill
5. C. L. Liu and D. P. Mohapatra, “Elements of Discrete Mathematics”, SiE Edition,
TataMcGraw -Hill.
References:
1. Advanc ed Engineering Mathematics by C. Ray Wylie & Louis Barrett, TMH International
Edition.
2. Mathematical Methods of Science and Engineering by Kanti B. Datta, Cengage Learning.
3. Lapplace Transforms by Murray R. Spiegel, Schaun’s out line series -McGraw Hill
Publi cation.
Assessment:
Internal Assessment for 20 marks:
Consisting of Two Compulsory Class Tests
Approximately 40% to 50% of syllabus content must be covered in First test and remaining 40% to
50% of syllabus contents must be covered in second test.
End Semester Examination: Some guidelines for setting the question papers are as:
Weightage of each module in end semester examination is
expected to be/will be proportional to number of respective lecture
hours mentioned in the syllabus.
Question paper w ill comprise of total six questions , each
carrying 20 marks.
Q.1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of
the syllabus .
Remaining question will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2
has part (a) from module 3 then part (b) will be from any other
module. (Randomly selected from all the modules.)
Total four questions need to be solved.
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 9
Course
Code Course Name Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Oral &
Practical Tutorial Total
ITC302 Logic Design 04 -- -- 04 -- -- 04
Course
Code Course
Name Examination Scheme
Theory Marks
Term
Work Oral &
Practical Oral Total Internal assessment
End
Sem.
Exam Test1 Test2 Avg. of
Two
Tests
ITC302 Logic
Design 20 20 20 80 -- -- -- 100
Course Objectives: Students will try to learn :
1. The concept of various components .
2. The concepts that underpin the disciplines of Analog and digital electronic logic circuits.
3. Various Number system and Boolean algebra.
4. Design and implementation of combinational circuits
5. Design and implementation of Sequential circuits
6. Hardware description language
Course Outcomes: Students will able to :
1. Understand the concepts of various components to design stable analog circuits .
2. Represent numbers and perform arithmetic operations .
3. Minimize the Boolean expression using Boolean algebra and design it using logic gates
4. Analyze and design combinational circuit.
5. Design and develop sequential circuits
6. Translate real world problems into digital logic formulations using VHDL.
Prerequisit e: Basic Electrical Engineering
Detailed syllabus:
Sr.
No. Module Detailed Content Hours CO
Mapping
0 Prerequisite Semiconductor theory, Diodes,
Integrated Circuits 02
I Biasing of BJT Biasing of BJT: DC operating
point, BJT characteristics &
parameters, all biasing circuits,
analysis of above circuits and their
design, variation of operation point
and its stability. Differential 08 CO1
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 10
Amplifier, constant current source,
current mirror.
II Number System
and codes Introduction to Number systems,
Binary Number systems, Signed
Binary Numbers, Binary, Octal,
Decimal and Hexadecimal number
Systems and their conversion,
Binary arithmetic using
compliments, Gray Code, BCD
Code, Excess -3 code, ASCII
Code.inter -conversion o f codes, 08 CO2
III Boolean Algebra
and Logic gates Introduction, NAND and NOR
operations, Exclusive –OR and
Exclusive –NOR operations,
Boolean Algebra Theorems and
Properties , Standard SOP and POS
form, Reduction of Boolean
functions using Algebric method, K
-map method (2,3,4
Variable).Variable entered Maps,
Quine Mc Cluskey, Mixed Logic
Combinational Circuits and
multiple output function
Basic Digital Circuits: NOT,AND,
OR,NAND,NOR,EX -OR,EX -NOR
Gates. 10
CO2
CO3
IV Design and
Analysis of
Combinational
Circuits Introduction, Half and Full Adder,
Half and Full Subtractor, Four Bit
Binary Adder, One digit BCD
Adder, code conversion, Encoder
and Decoder ,Multiplexers and De -
multiplexers, Decoders, Binary
comparator (2,3 variable)4 -bit
Magnitu de Comparator IC 7485
and ALU IC74181. 08 CO2
CO3
CO4
V Sequential Logic
Design Flip Flops : SR, JK, D, T, master
slave flip flop, Truth Table,
excitation table and conversion
Register: Shift register, SISO,
SIPO, PISO, PIPO, Bi -directional
and universal shift register.
Counters: Design of synchronous
and asynchronous ,Modulo
Counter, Up Down counter IC
74193, Ring and Johnson Counter 9 CO4
CO5
VI VHDL Introduction to VHDL, Library,
Entity, Architecture Modeling
styles, Concurrent and Sequential
statements, data objects and data
types, attributes, design examples 07 CO5
CO6
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 11
for combinational circuits
Text Books:
1. Robert L. Boylestad, Louis Nashelsky, “Electronic devices and circuit Theory”, PHI
2. R. P. Jain, “Modern Digital Electronics”, Tata McGraw Hill.
3. M. Morris Mano, “Digital Logic and computer Design”, PHI
4. J. Bhasker.“ VHDL Primer”, Pearson Education.
5. Balbaniam,Carison,”Digital Logic Design Principles”, Wiley Publication
References:
1. Martin s. Roden, Gord on L. Carpenter, William R. Wieserman “Electronic Design -From
Concept to Reality”, Shroff Publishers and Distributors.
2. A. Anand Kumar , “Fundamentals of Digital Circ uits ”, Prentice Hall India
3. Subrata Ghosal, ”Digital Electronics”, Cengage Learning.
4. Anil K. Maini, “Digital Electronics Principles and Integrated Circuits”, Wiley India
5. Donald p Leach, Albert Paul Malvino, “Digital principles and Applications”, Tata M cGraw Hill
Assessment:
Internal Assessment for 20 marks :
Consisting of Two Compulsory Class Tests
Approximately 40% to 50% of syllabus content must be covered in First test and remaining 40% to
50% of syllabus contents must be covered in second test.
End Semester Examination: Some guidelines for sett ing the question papers are as:
Weightage of each module in end semester examination is
expected to be/will be proportional to number of respective lecture
hours mentioned in the syllabus.
Question paper w ill comprise of total six questions , each
carrying 20 marks.
Q.1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of
the syllabus .
Remaining question will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2
has part (a) from module 3 then part (b) will be from any other
module. (Randomly selected from all the modules. )
Total four questions need to be solved.
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 12
Course
Code Course Name Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Oral &
Practical Tutorial Total
ITC303 Data Structures &
Analysis 04 -- -- 04 -- -- 04
Course
Code Course Name Examination Scheme
Theory Marks
Term
Work Oral &
Practical Oral Total
Internal assessment End
Sem.
Exam
Test1 Test 2 Avg. of
two
Tests
ITC303 Data Structures
& Analysis 20 20 20 80 -- -- -- 100
Course Objectives: Students will try to:
1. Understand and remember algorithms and its analysis procedure .
2. Introduce the concept of data structures through ADT including List, Stack, Queues .
3. To design and implement various data structure algorithms .
4. To introduce various techniques for representation of the data in the real world.
5. To develop application using data structure algorithm s.
6. Compute the complexity of various algorithms .
Course Outcomes: Students will be able to:
1. Select appropriate data structures as applied to specified problem definition.
2. Implement operations like searching, insertion, and deletion , traversing mechanism etc. on
various data structures.
3. Students will be able to implement Linear and Non -Linear data st ructures.
4. Implement appropriate sorting/searching technique for given problem.
5. Design advance data structure using Non -Linear data structure.
6. Determine and analyze the complexity of given Algorithms.
Prerequisite: C Programming Language
Detailed syllabus:
Sr.
No. Module Detailed Content Hours CO
Mapping
0 Prerequisite C Programming Language 02
I Introduction to Data structures,
Need of Data structures, Types of 07 CO1
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 13
Introduction to
Data structures and
Analysis
Data structures : Linear and non
linear data structures
Arrays, Stacks, Queue, Linked list
and Tree, Graph, Recursion, ADT
(Abstract Data type).
Introduction to Analysis,
Algorithms, characteristics of an
algorithms, Time and Space
complexities, Order of growth
functions, Asymptotic notations CO2
CO3
CO6
II
Stack
Introduction to Stack, Stack as
ADT, Operations on stack,
Application of stack: – reversing
string, Polish notations 07 CO1
CO2
CO3
CO6
III
Queue
Introduction to Queue, Queue as
ADT, Operations on Queue, Linear
representation of queue, Circular
Queue, Priority Queue, De -queue,
Application of Queues
06 CO1
CO2
CO3
CO6
IV
Linked list
Introduction to Linked List, Basic
concept of Linked List, Memory
allocation & de allocation of
Linked list, Singly Linked list,
Doubly Linked list, Circular linked
list, Operations on linked list,
Linked representation of stack,
Linked representation of Queue,
Application of linked list. 08 CO1
CO2
CO3
CO6
V
Sorting and
Searching
Introduction to Sorting: Bubble
Sort, Selection Sort, Insertion Sort,
Quick Sort, Merge Sort, Heap Sort,
Shell Sort, Radix sort. Analysis of
Sorting Techniques. Comparison of
sorting Techniques
Introduction to Searching: Linear 12 CO4
CO5
CO6
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 14
search, Binary search, Hashing
Techniques, Different Hash
functions, Collision& Collision
resolution techniques, Analysis of
searching Techniques.
VI
Trees & Graph
Introduction to Trees, Definitions&
Tree terminologies, Binary tree
representation, Operations on
binary tree, Traversal of binary
trees, Binary search tree, Threaded
Binary tree, Expression tree,
Application of Trees
Introduction to Graph, Introduction
Graph Terminologies, Graph
Representation, Type of graphs,
Graph trave rsal:Depth first
search(DFS)&Breadth First
search(BFS), Minimum Spanning
Tree : Prim’s & Kruskal’s Shortest
Path Algorithm – Dijkstra’s
Algorithm . Applications of graph 10 CO1
CO2
CO3
CO6
Text Books:
1. Data structures using C by Tenenbaum, Langsam, Augenstein , Pearson.
2. Data Structures using C, ReemaThareja, Oxford.
3. C and Data structures, Prof. P.S.Deshpande, Prof. O.G.Kakde, Dreamtech Press.
4. Introduction to Data Structure and its Applications Jean -Paul Tremblay, P. G.
Sorenson
Reference Books:
1. Data Structures Using C & C++, Rajesh K. Shukla, Wiley - India.
2. Data Structures and Algorithm Analysis in C ,Mark A.Weiss ,Pearson
3. ALGORITHMS Design and Analysis, Bhasin, OXFORD.
4. Computer Algorithms by Ellis Horowitz and Sartaj Sahni, Universities Press.
Assessment:
Internal Assessment for 20 marks:
Consisting of Two Compulsory Class Tests
Approximately 40% to 50% of syllabus content must be covered in First test and remaining 40% to
50% of syllabus contents must be covered in second test.
End Semester Examination: Some guidelines for setting the question papers are as:
Weightage of each module in end semester examination is
expected to be/will be proportional to number of respective lecture
hours mentioned in the syllabus.
Question paper w ill comprise of total six questions , each
carrying 20 marks.
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 15
Q.1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of
the syllabus .
Remaining question will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2
has part (a) from module 3 then part (b) will be from any other
module. (Randomly selected from all the modules.)
Total four questions need to be solved.
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 16
Course Code Course Name Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Oral &
Practical Tutorial Total
ITC304 Database
Management
Systems 04 -- -- 04 -- -- 04
Course
Code Course Name Examination Scheme
Theory Marks
Term
Work Oral &
Practical Oral Total Internal assessment End
Sem.
Exam Test1 Test 2 Avg. of
two Tests
ITC304
Database
Management
Systems 20 20 20 80 -- -- -- 100
Course Objectives: Students will try:
1. To describe a sound introduction to the discipline of database management systems.
2. To give a good formal foundation on the relational model of data and usage of Relational
Algebra
3. To introduce the concepts of basic SQL as a universal Database language
4. To enhance knowledge to advanced SQL topics like embedded SQL, procedures connectivity
through JDBC
5. To demonstrate the principles behind systematic database design approaches by cover ing
conceptual design, logical design through normalization
6. To provide an overview of physical design of a database system, by discussing Database
indexing techniques and storage techniques.
Course Outcomes: S tudent should be able to:
1. Explain the features of database management systems and Relational database
2. Design conceptual models of a database using ER modeling for real life applications and also
construct queries in Relational Algebra
3. Create and populate a RDBMS for a real life application, with cons traints and keys, using SQL.
4. Retrieve any type of information from a data base by formulating complex queries in SQL.
5. Analyze the existing design of a database schema and apply concepts of normalization to design an
optimal database.
6. Build indexing mechani sms for efficient retrieval of information from a database
Detailed syllabus:
Sr.
No. Module Detailed Content Hours CO
Mapping
0 Prerequisites Basic knowledge of operating systems
and file systems, Any programming 02
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 17
knowledge
I Introduction
Database
Concepts Introduction, Characteristics of
databases, File system V/s Database
system, Users of a Database system
Data Models, Schemas, and Instances,
Three -Schema Architecture and Data
Independence, Database Administrator
(DBA), Role of a DBA 05 CO 1
II Entity –
Relationship
Data Model Conceptual Modeling of a database,
The Entity -Relationship (ER) Model,
Entity Types, Entity Sets, Attributes,
and Keys, Relationship Types,
Relationship Sets, Weak Entity Types
Generalization, Specialization and
Aggregation, Extended Entity -
Relationship (EER) Model. 09 CO 2
III Relational Model
and Relational
Algebra Introduction to Relational Model,
Relational Model Constraints and
Relational Database Schemas, Concept
of Keys: Primary Kay, Secondary key,
Foreign Key, Mapping the ER and EER
Model to the Relational Model,
Introduction to Relational Algebra,
Relational A lgebra expressions for
Unary Relational Operations,
Set Theory operations,
Binary Relational operation
Relational Algebra Queries 09 CO 2
IV Structured Query
Language (SQL) Overview of SQL , Data Definition
Commands, Set operations , aggregate
function , null values, , Data
Manipulation commands, Data Control
commands , Views in SQL, Complex
Retrieval Queries using Group By,
Recursive Queries, nested Queries ;
Referential in tegrity in SQL. Event
Condition Action (ECA) model
(Triggers) in SQL; Database
Programming with JDBC, Security
and authorization in SQL Functions
and Procedures in SQL and cursors. 10 CO 3,
CO 4
V Relational –
Database Design Design guidelines for relational
schema, Functional Dependencies,
Definition of Normal Forms - 1NF,
2NF, 3NF, BCNF, Converting
Relational Schema to higher normal
forms. 08 CO 5
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 18
VI Storage and
Indexing Operation on Files; hashing
Techniques; Types of Indexes: Single -
Level Order ed Indexes; Multilevel
Indexes; Overview of B -Trees and B+ -
Trees; Indexes on Multiple Keys. 09 CO 6
Text Books:
1. Korth, Slberchatz,Sudarshan, ”Database System Concepts”, 6th Edition, McGraw – Hill
2. Elmasri and Navathe, “ Fundamentals of Database Systems”, 6th Edition, PEARSON Education.
3. G. K. Gupta :”Database Management Systems”, McGraw – Hill
References:
1. Raghu Ramkrishnan and Johannes Gehrke, “ Database Management Systems”,TMH
2. Hector Garcia -Molina, Jeffrey D. Ullman, Jennifer Widom “Database System Implementation”,
Pearson Ltd. 1/ e
3. Thomas M. Connolly Carolyn Begg, Database Systems : A Practical Approach to Design,
Implementation and Management, 4/e, Pearson Education.
Assessment:
Internal Assessment for 20 marks:
Consisting of Two Compu lsory Class Tests
Approximately 40% to 50% of syllabus content must be covered in First test and remaining 40% to
50% of syllabus contents must be covered in second test.
End Semester Examination: Some guidelines for setting the question papers are as:
Weightage of each module in end semester examination is
expected to be/will be proportional to number of respective lecture
hours mentioned in the syllabus.
Question paper will comprise of total six questions , each
carrying 20 marks.
Q.1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of
the syllabus .
Remaining question will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2
has part (a) from module 3 then part (b) will be from any other
module. (Randomly selected from all the modules.)
Total four questions need to be solved.
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 19
Course
Code Course Name Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Oral &
Practical Tutorial Total
ITC305
Principle of
Communications 03 -- 01 03 -- 01 04
Course
Code Course Name Examination Scheme
Theory Marks
Term
Work Oral &
Practical Oral Total Internal assessment End
Sem.
Exa
m Test1 Test 2 Avg.
of 2
Tests
ITC305
Principle of
Communications 20 20 20 80 -- -- -- 100
$ 3 hours shown as theory to be taken class wise and 1 hour to be taken tutorial as batch wise
Course Objectives: Students will try to:
1. Study the basic principles and techniques used in analog and digital communications.
2. Understand the concept of noise and Fourier transform for designing and analysing
communication system.
3. Acquire the knowledge of different modulation techniques such as AM , FM and study the
block diagrams of transmitter and receiver.
4. Study the Sampling theorem and Pulse Analog Modula tion techniques.
5. Learn the concepts of Digital modulation techniques such as PCM, DM, ADM and
multiplexing techniques.
6. Gain the core idea of Electromagnetic Radiation and propagation of waves.
Course Outcomes: Students will be able to:
1. Differentiate ana log and digital communication systems
2. Identify different types of noise occurred, its minimization and able to apply Fourier analysis in
frequency & time domain to quantify bandwidth requirement of variety of analog and digital
communication systems.
3. Design generation & detection AM, DSB, SSB, FM transmitter and receiver.
4. Apply sampling theorem to quantify the fundamental relationship between channel bandwidth,
digital symbol rate and bit rate
5. Explain different types of line coding techniques for generati on and detection of signals.
6. Describe Electromagnetic Radiation and propagation of waves.
Prerequisite: Basic Electrical Engineering
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 20
Detailed syllabus:
Sr.
No. Module Detailed Content Hours CO
Mapping
0 Prerequisite Electrical engineering concepts,
analog and digital electronics. 02 --
I Introduction Basics of analog communication
systems (Block diagram), Sources
of information, Baseband and band
pass signals, Types of
communication channels,
Frequency / Spectrum allocations,
Need for modulation and
demodulation 03 CO1
II Fourier Transform
and Noise Introduction to Fourier Transform,
its properties (time and frequency
shifting and convolution property),
Fourier transform of unit step, delta
and gate function. Correlated and
uncorrelated sources o f noise in
communication system, Noise
parameters –Signal to noise ratio,
Noise factor, Noise figure, Friis
formula and Equivalent noise
temperature 05 CO2
III Modulation and
Demodulation
(AM and FM) AM: Amplitude modulation
techniques and its types - DSBFC
AM,
DSBSC -AM, SSB SC AM -
spectrum, waveforms, bandwidth,
Power calculations. AM Receivers
– Block diagram of TRF receivers
and Super heterodyne receiver.
Receiver characteristics -
Sensitivity, Selectivity, Fidelity,
Image frequency and its rejection
and double spotting
FM : Principle of FM - waveforms,
spectrum, bandwidth. Pre -
emphasis and de -emphasis in FM,
FM noise triangle, Comparison of
AM and
FM systems, FM generation: Direct
method –Varactor diode
Modulator, Indirect method
(Armstrong method) b lock diagram
and waveforms.
FM demodulator: Foster Seely
discriminator, Ratio detector. 12 CO3
IV Pulse Analog
Modulation Sampling theorem for low pass and
band pass signals with proof,
Anti- aliasing filter, PAM, PWM
and PPM generation and 05 CO4
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 21
Degeneration.
V Digital Modulation
Techniques and
Transmission Introduction to digital
communication (Block diagram),
Quantization process, Pulse code
modulation, Delta modulation,
Adaptive delta modulation,
Principle of time division
multiplexing, Frequency division
multiplexing and its applications.
Introduction to Line codes, Inter -
symbol interference, Binary phase
shift keying, Differentially encoded
phase shift keying, Quadrature
phase shift keying, M -ary phase
shift keying, Quadrature amplitude
shift key ing 08 CO5
VI Radiation and
Propagation of
Waves Electromagnetic radiation,
fundamentals, types of propagation,
ground wave, sky wave,
tropospheric scatter propagation 04 CO6
Text Books:
1. Simon Haykin, Michael Moher, Introduction to Analog & Digital Communications, Wiley India
Pvt. Ltd., 2nd Ed.
2. Herbert Taub, Donald L Schilling, Goutam Saha, Principles of Communication Systems, Tata
McGraw Hill, 3rdEd.
3. V Chandrasekar, Communication Systems, Oxford University Press, Ist Ed.
References:
1. George Kennedy, Bernard Davis, SRM Prasanna, Electronic Communication Systems, Tata
McGraw Hill, 5th Ed.
2. Wayne Tomasi, Electronic Communications Systems, Pearson Publication, 5th Ed.
3. BP Lathi,Zhi Ding, Modern Digital and Analog Communication Systems, Oxford Uni versity.
4. K Sam Shanmugam, Digital and Analog Communication Systems, Wiley India Pvt. Ltd, 1st Ed.
Suggested Topics for Tutorials (Any 10):
1. Demonstration of Amplitude modulation.
2. Demonstration of Frequency modulation.
3. Study of AM/ FM receiver.
4. Demonstr ation of Signal sampling and reconstruction.
5. Study of PWM generation and detection.
6. Study of PCM coding and decoding.
7. Study of Delta modulation and demodulation
8. Demonstration of TDM/ FDM.
9. Demonstration of BPSK, BFSK, BASK
10. Study of QPSK
11. Study of Inter sym bol Interference and Line coding.
12. Study of different types of Propagation.
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 22
Assessment:
Internal Assessment for 20 marks:
Consisting of Two Compulsory Class Tests
Approximately 40% to 50% of syllabus content must be covered in First test and remaining 40% to
50% of syllabus contents must be covered in second test.
End Semester Examination: Some guidelines for setting the question papers are as:
Weightage of each module in end semester examination is
expected to be/will be proportional to number of res pective lecture
hours mentioned in the syllabus.
Question paper will comprise of total six questions , each
carrying 20 marks.
Q.1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of
the syllabus .
Remaining question will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2
has part (a) from module 3 then part (b) will be from any other
module. (Randomly selected from all the modules.)
Total four questions need to be solved.
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 23
Course Code Course
Name Theory Practical Tutorial Theory TW/Prac
tical Tutorial Tota
l
ITL301 Digital
Design
Lab -- 2 -- -- 1 -- 01
Course
Code Course
Name Examination Scheme
Theory Marks
Term
Work Oral & Practical Total Internal assessment End
Sem.
Exam Test1 Test2 Avg. of
two Tests
ITL301 Digital
Design Lab -- -- -- -- 25 25 50
Lab Objectives: Students will try to :
1. Learn to minimize and design combinational logic;
2. Understand the relationships between combination logic and Boolean algebra, and between
sequential logic and finite state machines;
3. Appreciate tradeoffs in complexity and speed of combinational designs;
4. Understand how state can be stored in a digital logic circuit;
5. Study how to design a simple finite state machine from a specification and be able to
implement this in gates an d edge triggered flip -flops
6. Learn to translate real world problems into digital logic formulations
Lab Outcomes: Students will be able to:
1. Minimize the Boolean algebra and design it using logic gates.
2. Analyse and design combinational circuit.
3. Realise given function using combinational circuit.
4. Design and develop sequential circuits
5. Implement digital systems using programmable logic devices
6. Translate real world problems into digital logic formulations using VHDL.
Prerequisite: Concepts of Logic Desig n
Hardware requirement:
Digital Trainer kit, ICs for various logic gates and functions, connecting wires
Software requirement:
VHDL tool
Detail Syllabus:
Sr.
No. Module Detailed Content Hours LO
Mapping
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 24
I Boolean Algebra
and Logic gates a. Verify the truth table of logic
gates (basic and universal gates)
b. Realization of Boolean algebra
using gates 04 LO1
II Design and
Analysis of
Combinational
Circuits a. Design of Full Adder and Full
Subtractor.
b. verify the operation of 4 - bit
magnitude comparator 04 LO2
III Implementation of
Combinational
Circuits a. Implementation of MUX and
DeMUX.
b. Implementation of Encoder and
Decoder 04 LO3
IV Sequential Logic
Design a. To verify and observe the
operation of flip -flop(any two)
b. To design any two shift register.
c. To design Modulo and ring
Counter 06 LO4
V Programmable
logic Devices a. Evaluate and observe Boolean
expression using PALs and
PLAs.. 04 LO5
VI VHDL a. Implementation of Logic Gates
using VHD
b. Evaluate and observe
combinational circuits on
VHDL.
04 LO6
Text Books:
1. R. P. Jain, “Modern Digital Electronics”, Tata McGraw Hill.
2. Balbaniam,Carison,”Digital Logic Design Principles”, Wiley Publication
References:
1. M. Morris Mano, “Digital Logic and computer Design”, PHI
2. J. Bhasker.“ VHDL Primer”, Pearson Education.
Term Work:
Term Work shall consist of at least 10 to 12 practical’s based on the above list. Also Term work
Journal must include at least 2 assignments.
Term Work Marks: 25 Marks (Total marks) = 15 Marks (Experiment) + 5 Marks (Assignments) + 5
Marks (Attendance)
Oral & Practical Exam: An Oral & Practical exam will be held based on the above syllabus.
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 25
Course
Code Course Name Theory Practical Tutorial Theory TW/Pra
ctical Tutorial Total
ITL302 Data Structures
Lab -- 2 -- -- 1 -- 1
Course
Code Course Name Examination Scheme
Theory Marks
Term
Work Oral &
Practical
Total Internal assessment
End
Sem.
Exam Test1 Test2 Avg. of
two
Tests
ITL302 Data Structures
Lab -- -- -- -- 25 25 50
Lab Objectives: Students will try:
1. Understand and remember algorithms and its analysis procedure.
2. Introduce the concept of data structures through ADT including List, Stack, Queues .
3. To design and implement various data structure algorithms.
4. To introduce various techniques for representation of the data in the real world.
5. To develop application using data structure algorithms.
6. Compute the complexity of various algorithms.
Lab Outcomes: Students will be able to:
1. Select appropriate data structures as applied to specified problem definition.
2. Implement operations like searching, insertion, and deletion, traversing mechanism etc. on
various data structures.
3. Students will be able to implement Linear and Non -Linear data structures.
4. Implement appropriate sorting/searching technique for given problem.
5. Design advance data structure using Non -Linear data structure.
6. Determine and analyze the complexity of given Algorithms.
Prerequisite: C Programming Language
Hardware Requirement:
PC i3 processor and above Software requirement:
Turbo/Borland C complier.
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 26
Detailed Syllabus:
Sr.
No. Module Detailed Content Hours LO
Mapping
0 Prerequisite Introduction of C programming language
I Stack 1. Implementations of stack menu driven program
2. Implementation of multistack in one array.
3. *Implementations of Infix to Postfix
Transformation and its evaluation program.
4. Implementations of Infix to Prefix
Transformation and its evaluation program. 04 LO1
LO2
LO3
LO6
II Queue 1. Implementations of circular queue menu driven
program
2. * Implementations of double ended queue
menu driven program
3. Implementations of queue menu driven program
4. Implementation of Priority queue program using
array.
04 LO1
LO2
LO3
LO6
III Linked List 1. Implementations of Linked Lists menu driven
program.
2. *Implementation of different operations
on linked list –copy, concatenate, split,
reverse, count no. of nodes etc
3. Implementation of polynomials operations (
addition, subtraction) using Linked List.
4. Implementations of Linked Lists menu driven
program (st ack and queue) 04 LO1
LO2
LO3
LO6
IV Tree & Graph 1. Implementations of Binary Tree menu driven
program
2. Implementation of Binary Tree Traversal program.
3. *Implementation of construction of expression
tree using postfix expression.
4. Implementations of BST program
5. Implementation of various operations on tree
like – copying tree, mirroring a tree, counting
the number of nodes in the tree, counting only 04 LO1
LO2
LO3
LO6
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 27
leaf nodes in the tree.
6. Implementation of Preorder traversal of a threaded
binary tree.
7. Implementations of Huffman code construction
8. Implementations of Graph menu driven program
(DFS & BSF)
V Sorting 1. Implementations of Shell sort, Radix sort and
Insertion sort menu driven program.
2. *Implementations of Quick Sort, Merge sort
and Heap Sort menu driven program
3. Implementations of Advanced Bubble Sort,
Insertion Sort and Selection Sort menu driven
program 04 LO4
LO5
LO6
VI Searching 1. Implementations of searching methods (Index
Sequential, Interpolation Search) menu driven
program
2. *Implementation of hashing functions with
different collision resolution techniques 02 LO4
LO5
LO6
Text Books:
1. Data structures using C by Tenenbaum, Langsam, Augenstein , Pearson.
2. Data Structures using C, ReemaThareja, Oxford.
Reference Books:
1. C and Data structures, Prof. P.S.Deshpande, Prof. O.G.Kakde, Dreamtech Press.
2. Data Structures A Pseudocode Approach with C, Richard F. Gilberg & Behrouz A.
Forouzan, second edition, CENGAGE Learning.
Term Work:
Term Work shall consist of at least 10 to 12 practical’s based on the above list. Also Term work
Journal must include at least 2 assignments.
Term Work Marks: 25 Marks (Total marks) = 15 Marks (Experiment) + 5 Marks (Assignments) + 5
Marks (Attend ance)
Oral & Practical Exam: An Oral & Practical exam will be held based on the above syllabus.
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 28
Theory Practical Tutorial Theory TW/Prac
tical Tutorial Total
ITL303 SQL Lab -- 2 -- -- 01 -- 01
Subject
Code Subject
Name Examination Scheme
Theory Marks
Term
Work Oral & Practical
Total Internal assessment End
Sem.
Exam Test
1 Test 2 Avg. of 2
Tests
ITL303 SQL Lab
-- -- -- -- 25
25
50
Course Objectives: Students will try:
1. To provide a sound introduction to the creation of problem statements from real life situations.
2. To give a good formal foundation on the relational model of data and usage of Relational
Algebra.
3. To introduce the concepts of basic SQL as a universal Database language.
4. To enhance knowledge to advanced SQL topics like embedded SQL, procedures connectivity
through JDBC.
5. To enable the design of an efficient database using normalization concepts.
6. To enable students to be create indexes for databases for efficient retrieval.
Course Outcomes: Studen t should be able to:
1. Construct problem definition statements for real life applications and implement a database for
the same.
2. Design conceptual models of a database using ER modeling for real life applications and also
construct queries in Relational Alg ebra.
3. Create and populate a RDBMS, using SQL.
4. Write queries in SQL to retrieve any type of information from a data base.
5. Analyze and apply concepts of normalization to design an optimal database.
6. Implement indexes for a database using techniques like B or B+ trees.
Hardware Requirement:
PC i3 processor and above Software requirement:
Any SQL Compiler
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 29
Prerequisite: C Programming Language
Detailed syllabus:
Sr.
No. Detailed Content Hours
CO Mapping
1 a) Students to be given assignments to
construct detailed problem definitions
for real life applications.
b) Construction of ER/EER diagrams for
the given problems.
c) Assignment based on relational
Algebra 4 CO 1
CO 2
2 a) Basic SQL Queries -DDL and DML.
b) Construction of Database -Keys
c) Population of the database 5 CO 3
3 Complex Queries using group by, nested
queries, recursive queries, joins, views,
Triggers, Cursors 5 CO 4
4 Design and Implementation of a fully
fledged Database with front end for a real
life application (Using JDBC) 4 CO 1
5 Assignment for conversion of relation to
different normal forms. 2 CO 5
6 Program for construction of index - B-Tree
/ B+-Tree 4 CO 6
Text Books:
1. SQL The Complete Reference, 3rd Edition , James R Groff, Paul N. Weinberg, Andy Oppel,
McGraw Hill.
2. G. K. Gupta :”Database Management Systems”, McGraw – Hill
References:
1. Korth, Slberchatz,Sudarshan, :”Database System Concepts”, 6th Edition, McGraw – Hill
2. Raghu Ramkrishnan and Johannes Gehrke, “ Database Management Systems”, TMH
Term Work:
Term Work shall consist of at least 10 to 12 practical’s based on the above list. Also Term work
Journal must include at least 2 assignments.
Term Work Marks: 25 Ma rks (Total marks) = 15 Marks (Experiment) + 5 Marks (Assignments) + 5
Marks (Attendance)
Oral & Practical Exam: An Oral & Practical exam will be held based on the above SQL syllabus.
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 30
Course Code Course Name Theory Practical Tutorial Theory TW/Practical Tutorial Total
ITL304 Java
Programming
Lab -- 2+2* -- -- 2 -- 2
* 2 hours shown as practical’s to be taken class wise lecture and other 2 hours to be taken as batch
wise practical’s in Lab.
Lab Objectives: Students will try:
1. To understand how to design, implement, test, debug, and document programs that use basic data
types and computation, simple I/O, conditional and control structures, string handling and functions .
2. To understand the importance of Classes & objects along with constructors, Arrays and Vectors.
3. Discuss the principles of inheritance, interface and packages and demonstrate though problem
analysis assignments how they relate to the design of methods, abstract classes and interfaces and
packages.
4. To understand importance of Multi -threading & different exception handling mechanisms.
5. To learn experience of designing, implementing, testing, and debugging graphical user interfaces in
Java using applet and AWT that respond to different user events.
6. To understand Java Swings for des igning GUI applications based on MVC architecture.
Lab Outcomes: Upon Completion of the course the learner should be able to :
1. Implement Object Oriented programming concept using basic syntaxes of control Structures,
strings and function for developing s kills of logic building activity.
2. Identify classes, objects, members of a class and the relationships among them needed for a
finding the solution to speci fic problem
3. Demonstrates how to achieve reusability using inheritance, interfaces and packag es and
describes faster application development can be achieved.
4. Demonstrate understanding and use of different exception handling mechanisms and Course
Code Course Name Examination Scheme
Theory Marks
Term
Work Oral & Practical
Total Internal assessment
End
Sem.
Exam Test1 Test 2 Avg. of
two
Tests
ITL304
Java
Programming
Lab -- -- -- -- 50 50 100
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 31
concept of multithreading for robust faster and efficient application development.
5. Identify and describe common abstract user interface components to design GUI in Java
using Applet & AWT along with response to events
6. Ident ify, Design & develop complex Graphical user interfaces using principal Java Swing
classes based on MVC architecture
Hardware Requirements Software Requirements Other Requirements
PC With Following
Configuration
1. Intel PIV Processor
2. 2 GB RAM
3. 500 GB Harddisk
4. Network interface card 1. Windows or Linux Desktop OS
2. JDK 1.8 or higher
3. Notepad ++
4.JAVA IDEs like Netbeans or
Eclipse
1. Internet Connection for
installing additional packages
if required
Detailed Syllabus:
Sr.
No. Module Detailed Contents Hours LO
Mapping
1)
Fundamental
of Java
Programming Theory
1.1 Overview of procedure and object oriented
Programming, Java Designing Goals, Features of Java
Language.
1.2 I ntrod uction to the principles of object-oriented
programming: Classes, Obj ects, Abst raction,
Encapsulation, Inheritance, Polymorphism,
1.3 Keywords, Data types, Variables, Operators,
Expressions, Types of variables and methods.
1.4 Control Statements: If Statement, If -else, Nested
if, switch Statement, break, continue. Iteration
Statements: for loop, while loop, and do -while loop.
Experiment 1:
(Perform any three programs that covers Classes,
Methods, Control structures and Looping statements)
i) Write a Java program to understand how to
accept input using Scanner or 12
LO 1
LO 2
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 32
BufferedReader and print output using
System.out.println statement.
ii) Write a Java program to displ ay the
default value of all primit ive data types
in Java.
iii) Write a Java program that prints all real
solutions to the quadratic equation
ax2+bx+c = 0. Read in a, b, c and use the
quadratic formula. If the discriminate b2 -
4ac is negative, display a message stating
that there are no real solutions.
iv) Write a java pr ogram to test whether
string is palindrome or not
v) Write a java program to count number
of alphabets, digits, special symbols,
blank spaces and words from the given
sentence.
vi) Write a java program to count number of
vowels and consonants from the given
strings.
vii) Write a Menu driven program in java to
implement simple banking application. Application
should read the customer name, account number,
initial balance, rate of interest, contact number and
address field etc. Application should have following
methods.
1. createAccount()
2. deposit()
3. withdraw()
4. computeInterest()
5. displayBalance()
viii) Write a menu driven Java program which will
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 33
read a number and should implement the following
methods
1. factorial()
2. reverse()
3. testArmstrong()
4. testPalindrome()
5. testPrime()
6. fibonacciSeries()
ix) Write a Java program to demonstrate Method
overloading
2)
Classes,
Objects,
Arrays and
Recursion
Theory
2.1 Classes & Objects: Class Fundamentals:
Assigning Object Reference Variables, Passing
parameters to Methods and Returning parameters from
the methods, Nested and Inner Classes .
2.2 Constructors: Parameterized Constructors,
finalize( ) Method, Method overloading, Constructors
overloading, Recursion, Command -Line Arguments.
2.3 Wrapper classes, Java.util.Scanner, Java.
io.BufferedReader, Java.io.DataInputStream,
Java.io.DataOutputStream and String Buffer classes
and String functions.
2.4 Arrays & Vectors: One Dimensio nal arrays, Two
Dimensional array, Irregular arrays, dynamic arrays,
Array List and Array of Object.
Experiment 2
(Perform any Five programs that covers Classes &
objects, Constructors, Command Line Arguments, 12 LO 1
LO 2
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 34
Arrays/Vectors & recursions )
i) Write a java prog ram to demonstrate
Constructors, Parameterized Constructors
and Constructor Overloading
ii) Write a java program to demonstrate
Command Line Arguments
iii) Write a java program to demonstrate String
Functions
iv) Write a java program to demonstrate Array
and Vectors operations
v) Write a java programs to add n strings in a
vector array. Input new string and
check whether it is present in the vector. If it is
present delete it otherwise add it to the vector.
vi) Write a java programs to test whether the
given element is pres ent in the vector
array.
vii) Write a java programs to find frequency of
a element in the given Vector array.
viii) Write a java programs to add n strings in a
vector array. Input new string and check whether it
is present in the vector. If it is present delete it
otherwise add it to the vector.
ix) Write menu driven program to implement
recursive functions for following
tasks.
a) To find GCD and LCM
b) To find XY
c) To print n Fibonacci numbers
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 35
d) To find reverse of number
e) To 1+2+3+4+……..+(n -1)+n
x) Write the Menu driven program to perform
a) Addition of two matrices of order m*n and
p*q
b) Multiplication of two matrices of order m*n
and p*q
c) Transpose of matrix of order m*n
d) addition of di agonal and non -diagonal
elements
3)
Inheritance,
Interface and
Packages Theory
3.1 Inheritance Basics, , Types of Inheritance in
Java, Concept of Super and sub class, inheriting
Data members and Methods, Role of
Constructors in inheritance, Making methods and
classes final , Method overriding, Dynamic Method
Dispatch, Abstract classes and methods
3.2 Defining an interface, extending interfaces ,
implementing interfaces, accessing implementations
through interface references, Interfaces vs. Abstract
classes.
3.3 Packages – Steps for defining, creating and
accessing a Package, importing packages,Making
JAR Files for Library Packages, java.util.Vector
Experiment 3
(Perform any Two programs that covers Inheritance,
interfaces and packages)
i) Write a java programs to demonstrate
hierarchical inheritance
ii) Write a java program to demonstrate exten ding
& implementing Interfaces 08 LO 3
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 36
iii) Write a java program to demonstrate Modules
and packages
iv) Write a java program to create user defined
packages
4)
Exception
Handling and
Multithr eading
Theory:
4.1 Exception handling Mechanism: try, catch,
throw, throws and finally.
4.2 M ultithr eading: Need of Multithreading , Java
thread Model, thread Life -Cycle, thread class
Methods, Implementing Runnable, Extending thread,
Synchronizing threads, synchronized Statement,
Critical Factor in Thread –Deadlock.
Experiment 4
(Perform any Two programs that covers Exception
Handling & Multithreading)
i) Write java programs to demonstrate Exception
handling using try, catch, throw, throws and finally
state ments.
ii) Write a Java Program to input the data through
command Line and Find out total valid and in -valid
integers. (Hint: use exception handling).
iii) Write a Java Program to calculate the Result.
Result should consist of name, seatno, date, center
number and marks of semester three exam. Create a
User Defined Exception class
MarksOutOfBoundsException, If Entered marks of
any subject is greater than 100 or less than 0, and
then program should create a user defined Exception
of type MarksOutOfBoundsExc eption and must have
a provision to handle it. 06
LO3
LO 4
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 37
iv) Write java program to create a user defined
Exception class known as
PayOutOfBoundsException. Organization does not
offer basic salary less than 8000. If entered salary is
less than 8000 then program shoul d create an
Exception of Type PayOutOfBoundsException.
Program should calculate gross salary by considering
salary parameters such as DA, HRA, CA, TA,
Professional tax, TDS, PF.. etc
v) Write java programs to create user defined threads
by extending thread class and by implementing
runnable.
vi) Write java program to print Table of Five, Seven
and Thirteen using Multithreading (Use Thread class
for the implementation) .
vii) Write a java program to print first 20 prime
numbers and 15 Fibonacci numbers by c reating two
child threads and also print the total time taken by
each thread for the execution.
viii) Write a java program to implement use of nested
try-catch concept using appropriate example.
ix) Write java program to create the child thread.
Comment o n the execution of main and Child
Thread.
x) Write java program to implement the concept of
Thread Synchronization
xi) Write a Java program to identify whether inputted
data is byte/short/int/long/float/double/String/char
type. (Use Exception Handling)
5) Applet
Programming,
GUI 5.1 Applet: Applet fundamentals, Applet lifecycle,
Creating applet, paint method Applet tag, Applet
class methods. 10 LO3
LO4
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 38
development
using AWT
and Event
handling 5.2 Designing Graphical User Interfaces in Java,
Components and Containers, Basics of
Components, Using Containers, Layout Managers,
AWT Components, Adding a Menu to Window,
Extending GUI Features
5.3 Event -Driven Programming in Java, Event -
Handling Process, Event - Handling Mechanism,
Delegation Model of Event Handling, Event
Classes, Event Sources, Event Listeners, Adapter
Classes as Helper Classes in Event Handling.
Experiment 5
(Perform any Three programs that covers Applet
Programming, GUI development using AWT and
Event handling )
i) Write java pr ogram to draw the house on an applet.
ii) On Applet: Take a Login and Password from the
user and display it on the third Text Field which
appears only on clicking OK button and clear
both the Text Fields on clicking RESET button
Perform same using AWT and Swings as well.
iii) Write java program to create an advertisement
banner on an applet using multithreading
iv) Write java program to create a registration form
using AWT.
v) Write a Java program to demonstrate the use of
AWT component s namely buttons,labels, text boxes,
lists/combos, menus with event handling. LO 5
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 39
vi) Write a java program to store personal telephone
directory in such a way that when user hits a
character, the names which starts with the character
and telephone numbers shou ld appear.
6)
Java Swings Theory
6.1 Introducing Swing: AWT vs Swings,
Components and Containers, Swing Packages, A
Simple Swing Application, Painting in Swing,
Designing Swing GUI Application using
Buttons, JLabels, Checkboxes, Radio Buttons,
JScrollPane, JList, JComboBox, Trees, Tables Scroll
pane Menus and Toolbars
Experiment 6
(Perform any one programs that covers concept of
Swings )
i) Write a Java program to implement Swing
components namely Buttons, ,JLabels, Checkboxes,
Radio Buttons, JScrollPane, JList, JComboBox,
Trees, Tables Scroll pane Menus and Toolbars to
design interactive GUI.
ii) Write a program to create a window with four
text fields for the name, street, city and pincode with
suitable labe ls. Also windows contains a button
MyInfo. When the user types the name, his street,
city and pincode and then clicks the button, the
types details must appear in Arial Font with Size 32,
Italics. 06 LO4
LO 6
Textbook Books:
1. Herbert Schildt, “Java -The Complete Reference”, Seventh Edition, Tata McGraw Hill Publication
2. E. Balguruswamy, “Programming with java A primer”, Fifth edition, Tata McGraw Hill
Publication
Reference Books:
1. D.T. Editorial Services, “Java 8 Programming Black Book”, Dreamtech Pres s
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 40
2. H. M.Deitel, P. J. Deitel, S. E. Santry, “Advanced Java 2 Platform How to Program” Prentice Hall
3. Learn to Master JAVA, from Star EDU solutions , by ScriptDemics
Term Work:
The term Work shall consist of at least 1 2 to 15 practical’s based on the above list. The also Term
work Journal must include at least 2 assignments.
Term Work Marks: 50 Marks (Total marks) = 40 Marks (Experiment) + 5 Marks (Assignments) + 5
Marks (Attendance)
Oral & Practical Exam: An Oral & Practical exam will be held based on t he above syllabus.
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 41
University of Mumbai
Program Structure B.E. Information Technology, (Rev. 2016)
S. E. Information Technology ( Semester -IV)
Course
Code Course
Name Teaching Scheme
(Contact Hours) Credits Assigned
Theory Pract Tut Theory TW/
Pract Tut Total
ITC401 Applied Mathematics -IV 4+1@ - - 5 - - 5
ITC402 Computer Networks 4 - - 4 - - 4
ITC403 Operating Systems 4 - - 4 - - 4
ITC404 Computer Organization
and Architecture 4 - - 4 - - 4
ITC405 Automata Theory 3+1$ - - 4 - - 4
ITL401 Networking Lab - 2 - - 1 - 1
ITL402 Unix Lab - 2 - 1 - 1
ITL403 Microprocessor
Programming Lab - 2 - - 1 - 1
ITL404 Python Lab - 2+2* - - 2 - 2
Total 21 10 - 21 5 - 26
ourse
Code Course
Name Examination Scheme
Theory
TW
Oral &
Pract Total Internal Assessment End
Sem.
Exam Exam
Duration
( in Hrs) Oral
Test 1 Test 2 Avg.
ITC401 Applied Mathematics -IV 20 20 20 80 3 - - - 100
ITC402 Computer Networks 20 20 20 80 3 - - - 100
ITC403 Operating Systems 20 20 20 80 3 - - - 100
ITC404 Computer Organization
and Architecture 20 20 20 80 3 - - - 100
ITC405 Automata Theory 20 20 20 80 3 -- - - 100
ITL401 Networking Lab - - - - - 25 25 -- 50
ITL402 Unix Lab - - - - - 25 -- 25 50
ITL403 Microprocessor
Programming Lab - - - - - 25 25 -- 50
ITL404 Python Lab - - - - - 50 -- 50 100
Total 100 100 100 400 - 125 50 75 750
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 42
@ 4 hours shown as theory to be taken class wise and 1 hour to be taken tutorial as class wise
$ 3 hours shown as theory to be taken class wise and 1 hour to be taken tutorial as batch wise
*2 hours shown as practical’s to be taken class wise lecture and other 2 hours to be taken as
batch wise practicals in Lab.
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 43
Course
Code Course Name Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Oral &
Practical Tutorial Total
ITC401 Applied
Mathematics IV 04 -- 01 04 -- -- 05
Course
Code Course
Name Examination Scheme
Theory Marks
Term
Work Oral &
Practical Oral Total Internal assessment
End
Sem.
Exam Test1 Test2 Avg. of
Two
Tests
ITC401 Applied
Mathematic
s IV 20 20 20 80 -- -- -- 100
Course Objectives: Students will try to learn:
1. The concepts of Number Theory by using different theorem .
2. The concepts of probability and study PDF .
3. The concept of sampling theory and correlation .
4. The concept of graphs and trees .
5. The concept of groups theory .
6. The concept of Lattice theory .
Course Outcomes: Students will able to:
1. Apply the Number Theory to different applications using theorem.
2. Apply probability and understand PDF.
3. Understand sampling theory and correlation.
4. Apply the graphs and trees concepts to different app lications.
5. Understand group’s theory.
6. Understand the Lattice theory .
Prerequisite: Applied Mathematics III
Detailed syllabus:
Sr.
No. Module Detailed Content Hours CO
Mapping
0 Prerequisite Basic of Set, Permutations,
Combination and Probability . 02
I Elements of
Number Theory I Modular Arithmetic, Divisibility
and Euclid Algorithm, Primes and
the Sieve of Eratosthenes, Testing
for primes, Prime Number
Theorem
06 CO1
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 44
II Elements of
Number Theory II Euler’s, Fermat’s Little theorems,
Congruences, Computing Inverse
in Congruences, Legendre and
Jacobi Symbols, Chinese
Remainder Theorem 06 CO1
III Probability
Statistics: Formal concept, sample
space, outcomes, events
Random Variables: discrete &
continuous random variables,
expectation, Variance, Probability
Density Function & Cumulative
Density Function
Moments, Moment Generating
Function
Probability distribution: binomial
distribution, Poisson & normal
distribution
08 CO2
IV Sampling theory
Test of Hypothesis, Level of
significance, Critical region, One
Tailed and two Tailed test, Test of
significant for Large Samples: -
Means of the samples and test of
significant of means of two large
samples
Test of significant of small
samples: - Studen ts t- distribution
for dependent and independent
samples
Chi square test: - Test of goodness
of fit and independence of
attributes, Contingency table.
Correlation
Scattered diagrams
Karl Pearson’s coefficient of
correlation
Spearman’s Rank correlation
Regression Lines
10 CO3
V Graph & Groups
theory. Introduction to graphs, graph
terminology, representing graphs
and graph isomorphism,
connectivity, Euler and Hamilton
paths, planar graphs, graph
coloring, introduction to trees,
application of trees.
Groups, subgroups, generators and
evaluation of powers, cosets and
Lagrange's theorem, permutation
groups and Burnside's theorem,
isomorphism, automorphisms,
homomorphism and normal 12 CO4
CO5
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 45
subgroups, rings, integral domains
and fields.
VI Lattice theory Lattices and algebras systems,
principles of duality, basic
properties of algebraic systems
defined by lattices, distributive and
complimented lattices, Boolean
lattices and Boolean algebras,
uniqueness of finite Boolean
expressions, prepositional c alculus.
Coding theory: Coding of binary
information and error detection,
decoding and error correction. 08 CO5
Text Books:
1. Cryptograph and Network Security by B. A. Forouzan & D. Mukhopadhyay, 11th edition,
McGraw Hill Publication.
2. Network Security and Cryptograph byBernard Menezes, Cengage Learning Publication.
3. Higher Engineering Mathematics by Grewal B. S. 38th edition, Khanna Publication 2005.
4. Probability and Statistics for Engineering, Dr. J Ravichandran, Wiley -India.
5. Mathematical Statistics by H. C Saxena, S Chand & Co.
6. C. L. Liu: Elements of Discrete Mathematics , 2nd edition, TMH
References:
1. Elementary Number Theory and its applications by Kenneth H. Rosen, 5th edition, Addison
Wesley Publication.
2. Abstract Algebra by I. N. Herstain, 3rd eition, John Wiley and Sons Publication.
3. Discrete Mathematics by Norman Biggs, 2nd edition, Oxford University Press.
4. Advanced Engg. Mathematics by C. Ray Wylie & Louis Barrett.TMH International Edition.
5. Mathematical Methods of Science and Engineering by K anti B. Datta, Cengage Learning.
6. Advanced Engineering Mathematics by Kreyszig E. 9th edition, John Wiley.
7. Probability by Seymour Lipschutz, McGraw -Hill publication.
Assessment:
Internal Assessment for 20 marks:
Consisting of Two Compulsory Class Tests
Approximately 40% to 50% of syllabus content must be covered in First test and remaining 40% to
50% of syllabus contents must be covered in second test.
End Semester Examination: Some guidelines for setting the question papers are as:
Weightage of each m odule in end semester examination is
expected to be/will be proportional to number of respective lecture
hours mentioned in the syllabus.
Question paper will comprise of total six questions , each
carrying 20 marks.
Q.1 will be compulsory and should cover m aximum contents of
the syllabus .
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 46
Remaining question will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2
has part (a) from module 3 then part (b) will be from any other
module. (Randomly selected from all the modules.)
Total four questions need to be solved.
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 47
Course Code Course
Name Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Oral &
Practical Tutorial Total
ITC402 Computer
Networks 04 -- -- 04 -- -- 04
Course
Code Course Name Examination Scheme
Theory Marks
Term
Work Oral &
Practical Oral Total Internal assessment End
Sem.
Exam Test1 Test 2 Avg. of
two Tests
ITC402
Computer
Networks 20 20 20 80 -- -- -- 100
Course Objectives: Students will try to:
1. Study the basic taxonomy and terminology of the computer networking and enumerate the
layers of OSI model and TCP/IP model.
2. Acquire knowledge of Application layer and Presentation layer paradigms and protocols.
3. Study Session layer design issues, Transport layer services, and protocols.
4. Gain core knowled ge of Network layer routing protocols and IP addressing.
5. Study data link layer concepts, design issues, and protocols.
6. Read the fundamentals and basics of Physical layer, and will apply them in real time
applications.
Course Outcomes: Students will be ab le to:
1. Describe the functions of each layer in OSI and TCP/IP model.
2. Explain the functions of Application layer and Presentation layer paradigms and Protocols.
3. Describe the Session layer design issues and Transport layer services.
4. Classify the routing pro tocols and analyze how to assign the IP addresses for the given
network.
5. Describe the functions of data link layer and explain the protocols.
6. Explain the types of transmission media with real time applications.
Prerequisite: COA, Logic Design
Detailed syllabus:
Sr.
No. Module Detailed Content Hours CO
Mapping
0 Prerequisite Von Neumann model, Modulation,
Demodulation, encoding, Decoding. 02 --
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 48
I Introduction Network Criteria, Physical Structures,
Network Types: LAN, WAN,
Switching, OSI Reference model,
TCP/IP suite, Comparison of OSI and
TCP/IP, Network devices. 04 CO1
II Application layer
and Presentation
layer Introduction: Providing Services,
Application layer Paradigms, Client -
Server Paradigm: Application
Programming Interface, Using Services
of the Transport Layer, Standard Client
Server applications: World Wide Web
and HTTP, FTP, Electronic Mail,
TELNET, Secure Shell (SSH), Domain
Name System (DNS), Compression:
Lossless Compression, Lossy
Compression, Multimedia data: Text,
Image, Video , Audio ,Multimedia in
the Internet: Streaming Stored
Audio/Video, Streaming Live
Audio/Video, Real -Time Interactive
Audio/Video, Optimal Compression
Algorithms, Huffman Coding, Adaptive
Huffman Compression, Dictionary
Based Compression, Spee ch
Compression, LZW, RLE, Image
Compression – GIF,JPEG. 10 CO1
CO2
III Session layer and
Transport layer Session layer design issues, Session
Layer protocol - Remote Procedure Call
(RPC), Transport layer services,
Transport Layer Protocols: Simple
Protocol, Stop -and-Wait Protocol, Go -
Back -N Protocol (GBN), Selective -
Repeat Protocol, Bidirectional
Protocols: Piggybacking, Internet
Transport -Layer Protocols, User
Datagram Protocol: User Datagram,
UDP Services, UDP Applications,
Transmission Control Pr otocol: TCP
Services, TCP Features, Segment,
Segment, A TCP Connection, State
Transition Diagram, Windows in TCP,
Flow Control, Error Control, TCP
Congestion Control, TCP Timers,
Options. 10 CO1
CO3
IV Network Layer Introduction: Network -Layer Services,
Packet Switching, Network -Layer
Performance, Network -Layer
Performance, Network -Layer
Congestion, Structure of A Router,
Network Layer Protocols: IPv4
Datagram Format, IPv4 Addresses, 12 CO1
CO4
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 49
Forwarding of IP Packets, ICMPv4,
Unicast Routing: General Idea, Routing
Algorithms, Unicast Routing Protocols,
Multicast Routing : Introduction,
Multicasting Basics, Intradomain
Routing Protocols, Interdomain Routing
Protocols, Next generation IP: Packet
Format , IPv6 Addressing , Trans ition
from IPv4 to IPv6, ICMPv6, Mobile
IP: Addressing , Agents , Three Phases
, Inefficiency in Mobile IP.
V Data Link Layer Wired Networks; Introduction: Nodes
and Links, Two Types of Links, Two
Sublayers, Data Link Control: Framing,
Flow and Error Control, Error Detection
and Correction, Two DLC Protocols,
Medium Access Protocols: Random
Access, Controlled Access,
Channelization, Link Layer Addressing,
Wired LANS: Ethernet Protocol; IEEE
Project 802, Standard Ethernet, Fast
Ethernet (100 Mbps), Gigabit Ethernet,
10-Gigabit Ethernet, Virtual LANs,
Other Wired Networks: Point -to-Point
Networks, SONET, Switched Network:
ATM, Connecting Devices: Repeaters
or Hubs, Link -Layer Switches, Routers,
Sliding Window Compression. 09 CO1
CO5
VI Physical Layer Data and Signals: Analog and Digital,
Transmission Impairment, Data Rate
Limits, Performance, Digital
Transmission: Digital -to-Digital
Conversion , Analog -to-Digital
Conversion, Analog Transmission:
Digital -to-Analog Conversion, Analog -
to-Analog Conversion ,Bandwidth
Utilization: Multiplexing, Spread
Spectrum, Transmission Media:
Guided Media, Unguided Media:
Wireless, Real Time Interactive
Protocols: Rationale for New Protocols,
RTP, Session Initialization Protocol
(SIP), H.323, SCTP. 05 CO1
CO6
Text Books:
1. Behrouz A. Forouzan, Forouzan Mosharrat , Computer Networks A Top down Approach, Mc
Graw Hill education.
2. Andrew S Tanenbaum, Computer Networks -, 4th Edition, Pearson Education.
3. Ranjan Bose, Information Theory, Coding and Cryptography, Ranjan Bose, Tata McGrawHill ,
Second Edition.
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 50
4. Diane Teare, “ Authorized Self - Study Guide Designing for CISCO Internetwork
Solutions(DESGN), Second Edition.
References:
1. Behrouz A. Forouzan, Data communications and Networking, Fifth edition TMH 2013.
2. James F. Kurose, K. W. Ross, Computer Networking: A Top -Down Approach Featuring the
Internet, 3rd Edition, Pearson Eduction.
3. L. L. Peterson and B. S. Davie, Computer Network s: A Systems Approach, 4th Ed, Elsevier
India.
4. S. Keshav, An Engineering Approach to Computer Networks, 2nd Edition, Pearson Edication.
5. W. A. Shay, Understanding communications and Networks, 3rd Edition, W. A. Shay, Cengage
Learning.
6. Khalid Sayood, Introdu ction to Data Compression, Third Edition, Morgan Kaufman.
Assessment:
Internal Assessment for 20 marks:
Consisting of Two Compulsory Class Tests
Approximately 40% to 50% of syllabus content must be covered in First test and remaining 40% to
50% of syllabus contents must be covered in second test.
End Semester Examination: Some guidelines for setting the question papers are as:
Weightage of each module in end semester examination is
expected to be/will be proportional to number of respective lectur e
hours mentioned in the syllabus.
Question paper will comprise of total six questions , each
carrying 20 marks.
Q.1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of
the syllabus .
Remaining question will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2
has pa rt (a) from module 3 then part (b) will be from any other
module. (Randomly selected from all the modules.)
Total four questions need to be solved.
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 51
Course Code Course
Name Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Oral &
Practical Tutorial Total
ITC403 Operating
System 04 -- -- 04 -- -- 04
Course
Code Course
Name Examination Scheme
Theory Marks
Term
Work Oral &
Practical Oral Total Internal assessment
End
Sem.
Exam Test1 Test 2 Avg. of
two
Tests
ITC403 Operating
System 20 20 20 80 -- -- -- 100
Course Objectives: Students will try:
1. To understand the main components of an OS & their functions.
2. To study the process management and scheduling.
3. To understand various issues in Inter Process Communication (IPC) and the role of OS in IPC.
4. To understand the concepts and implementation Memory management policies and virtual
memory.
5. To understand the working of an OS as a resource manager, file system manager, process
manager, memory manager and I/O manager and methods used to implement the different parts
of OS
6. To study the need for special purpose operating system with the advent of new emerging
technologies
Course Outcomes: Student will be able to
1. Describe the important computer system resources and the role of operating system in
their management policies and algorithms.
2. Understand the process management policies and scheduling of processes by CPU
3. Evaluate the requirement for process synchronization and coordination handled by
operating system
4. Describe and analyze the me mory management and its allocation policies.
5. Identify use and evaluate the storage management policies with respect to different
storage management technologies.
6. Identify the need to create the special purpose operating system.
Prerequisite: Programming La nguage C
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 52
Detailed syllabus:
Sr.
No. Module Detailed Content Hours CO
Mapping
0 Prerequisite Programming Language C. Basic of Hardware i.e.
ALU,RAM,ROM, HDD etc. 02
I Overview of
Operating
System Introduction: Operating System Structure and
operations, Process management, Memory
management, storage management, Protection and
security, Distributed and special purpose Systems;
System Structure: Operating system services and
interface, System calls and its types, System
programs, Operating Syste m Design and
implementation, OS structure, Virtual machines, OS
debugging and generation, System boot. 07 C01
II Process
Management Process concept: Process Scheduling, Operation on
process and Interprocess communication;,
Multithreading, Process: Multithreading models and
thread libraries, threading issues; Process Scheduling:
Basic concepts, Scheduling algorithms and Criteria,
Thread Scheduling and Multiple Processor
Scheduling; 09 C02
III Process
coordination Synchronization: The critical Section Problem,
Peterson’s Solution, synchronization Hardware and
semaphores, Classic problems of synchronization,
monitors, Atomic transactions; Deadlocks: System
Model, Deadlock Characterization , Methods for
Handling Deadlocks, Deadlock Prevention, Deadlock
Avoidance , Deadlock Detection, Recovery from
Deadlock. 09 CO3
IV Memory
Management Memory Management strategies: Background,
Swapping, Contiguous Memory Allocation, Paging ,
Structure of the Page Table, Segmentation; Virtual
Memory Management: Demand Paging, Copy -on-
Write, Page Replacement, Allocation of Frames,
Thrashing, Memory -Mapped Files, Allocating Kernel
Memo ry, Other Considerations. 10 C04
V Storage
Management File system: File Concept , Access Methods,
Directory and Disk Structure, File -System Mounting,
File Sharing, Protection; Implementing file System:
File-System Structure, File -System Implementation,
Directory Implementation, Allocation Methods, Free -
Space Management, Efficiency and Performance,
Recovery, NFS; Secondary Storage Structure:
Overview of Mass -Storage
Structure, Disk Structure, Disk Attachment, Disk
Scheduling, Disk Management, RAID Structure,
Stable -Storage Implementation, Tertiary -Storage
Structure, Swap -Space Management; I/O systems:
Overview I/0 Hardware, Application I/0 Interface,
Kernel I/0 Subsys tem, Transforming I/0 Requests to 09 C05
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 53
Hardware Operations, STREAMS, Performance
VI Distributed
Systems Distributed operating System: Network based OS,
Network Structure and Topology, Communication
Structure and Protocols; Distributed File system:
Naming and transparency, Remote file access, Stateful
Versus Stateless Service, File Replication; Distributed
Synchronization: Mutual Exclusion, Concurrency
Control and Deadlock Handling, 06 C06
Text Books:
1. Operating System Concepts, Abraham Silberschatz , Greg Gagne , Peter Baer Galvin , 8th edition
Wiley .
2. Modern Operating System, Tanenbaum, Pearson Education.
3. Operating Systems: Internal and Design Principles: William Stallings, PHI
Reference Books:
1. Operating System Design and Implementation, A Tanenbaum, Pearson
2. Real Time Systems Design and Analysis, Wiley, IEEE Press
3. Principles of Operating Systems: Naresh Chauhan, Oxford Higher Education
Assessment:
Internal Assessment for 20 marks:
Consisting of Two Compulsory Class Tests
Approximately 40% to 50% of syllabus content must be covered in First test and remaining 40% to
50% of syllabus contents must be covered in second test.
End Semester Examination: Some guidelines for setting the question papers are as:
Weightage of each module in end semester examination is
expected to be/will be pro portional to number of respective lecture
hours mentioned in the syllabus.
Question paper will comprise of total six questions , each
carrying 20 marks.
Q.1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of
the syllabus .
Remaining question will be mi xed in nature (for example if Q.2
has part (a) from module 3 then part (b) will be from any other
module. (Randomly selected from all the modules.)
Total four questions need to be solved.
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 54
Course Code Course Name Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Oral &
Practical Tutorial Total
ITC404 Computer
Organization
and
Architecture 04 -- -- 04 -- -- 04
Course
Code Course Name Examination Scheme
Theory Marks
Term
Work Oral & Practical Total Internal assessment End
Sem.
Exam Test1 Test 2 Avg. of
two Tests
ITC404 Computer
Organizatio
n and
Architecture 20 20 20 80 -- -- 100
Course Objectives: Students will try to:
1. Conceptualize the basics of organizational and architectural issues of a digital computer.
2. Analyze processor performance improvement using instruction level parallelism.
3. Learn the function of each element of a memory hierarchy.
4. Study various data transfer techniques in digital computer.
5. Articulate design issues in the development of processor or other components that satisfy
design requirements and objectives.
6. Learn microprocessor architecture and study assembly language programming.
Course Outcomes: Students will be able to:
1. Describe basic organization of computer and the architecture of 8086 microprocessor.
2. Implement assembly language program for given task for 8086 microprocessor.
3. Demonstrate control unit operations and conceptualize instruction level parallelism.
4. Demonstrate and perform computer arithmetic operations on integer and real numbers.
5. Categorize memory or ganization and explain the function of each element of a memory
hierarchy.
6. Identify and compare different methods for computer I/O mechanisms.
Prerequisite: Fundamentals of Computer, Digital Logic Design
Detailed syllabus:
Sr.
No. Module Detailed Conte nt Hours CO
Mapping
0 Prerequisite basic combinational and sequential logic
circuits, binary numbers and arithmetic,
basic computer organizations 02
I Overview of
Computer
Architecture & Introduction of Computer Organization and
Architecture. Basic organization of computer
and block level description of the functional 07 CO1
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 55
Organization units. Evolution of Computers, Von
Neumann model. Performance measure of
Computer Architecture.
Architecture of 8086 family , 8086 Hardware
Design, Minimum mode & Maximum mode
of Operation. Study of bus controller 8288 &
its use in Maximum mode.
II Programming 8086 Addressing modes, Instruction Set,
Assembly Language Programming, Mixed
Language Programming, Programs based on
Stacks, Strings, Procedures, Macros, Timers,
Counters & delay. 10 CO2
III Processor
Organization and
Architecture CPU Architecture, Register Organization,
Instruction formats, basic instruction cycle.
Instruction interpretation and sequencing.
Control Unit: Soft wired (Micro -
programmed) and hardwired control unit
design methods. Microinstruction sequencing
and execution. Micro operations, concepts of
nano programming. Introduction to parallel
processing concepts, Flynn’s classifications,
pipelin e processing, instruction pipelining,
pipeline stages, pipeline hazards. 11 CO3
IV Data Representation
and Arithmetic
Algorithms Number representation: Binary Data
representation, two’s complement
representation and Floating -point
representation. Integer Data arithmetic:
Addition, Subtraction. Multiplication:
Unsigned & Signed multiplication - Add &
Shift Method, Booth’s algorithm. Division of
integers: Restoring and non -restoring
division, signed division, basics of floating
point representation IEEE 754 f loating
point(Single & double precision) number
representation. Floating point arithmetic:
Addition, subtraction 10 CO4
V Memory Organization Introduction to Memory and Memory
parameters. Classifications of primary and
secondary memories. Types of RAM and
ROM, Allocation policies, Memory
hierarchy and characteristics. Cache
memory: Concept, architecture (L1, L2, L3),
mapping techniques. Cache Co herency,
Interleaved and Associative memory. 07 CO5
VI I/O Organization Input/output systems, I/O modules and 8089
IO processor. Types of data transfer
techniques: Programmed I/O, Interrupt
driven I/O and DMA. 05 CO6
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 56
Text Books:
1. Carl Hamacher, Zvonko Vranesic and Safwat Zaky, “Computer Organization”, Fifth Edition, Tata
McGraw -Hill.
2. William Stallings, “Computer Organization and Architecture: Designing for Performance”, Eighth
Edition, Pearson.
3. 8086/8088 family: Design Programmin g and Interfacing: By John Uffenbeck (Pearson Education)
4. Microprocessor and Interfacing: By Douglas Hall (TMH Publication).
References:
1. B. Govindarajulu, “Computer Architecture and Organization: Design Principles and Applications”,
Second Edition, Tata Mc Graw -Hill.
2. Dr. M. Usha, T. S. Srikanth, “Computer System Architecture and Organization”, First Edition,
Wiley -India.
3. John P. Hayes, “Computer Architecture and Organization”, McGraw -Hill.,Third Edition.
4. K Bhurchandi, “Advanced Microprocessors & Peripherals ”, Tata McGraw -Hill Education
Assessment:
Internal Assessment for 20 marks:
Consisting of Two Compulsory Class Tests
Approximately 40% to 50% of syllabus content must be covered in First test and remaining 40% to
50% of syllabus contents must be covered in second test.
End Semester Examination: Some guidelines for setting the question papers are as:
Weightage of each module in end semester examination is
expected to be/will be proportional to number of respective lecture
hours mentioned in the syllabus.
Question paper will comprise of total six questions , each
carrying 20 marks.
Q.1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of
the syllabus .
Remaining question will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2
has part (a) from module 3 then part (b) will be from any other
module. (Randomly selected from all the modules.)
Total four questions need to be solved.
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 57
Course
Code Course Name Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Oral &
Practical Tutorial Total
ITC405 Automata Theory 03 -- 01 03 -- 01 04
Course
Code Course Name Examination Scheme
Theory Marks
Term
Work Oral &
Practical Oral Total Internal assessment
End
Sem.
Exam Test1 Test 2 Avg. of
two
Tests
ITC405 Automata
Theory 20 20 20 80 -- -- -- 100
$ 3 hours shown as theory to be taken class wise and 1 hour to be taken tutorial as batch wise
Course Objectives: Students will try:
1. To learn fundamentals of Regular and Context Free Grammars and Languages
2. To understand the relation between Regular Language and Finite Automata and machines.
3. To learn how to design Automata’s and machines as Acceptors, Verifiers and Translators.
4. To understand the relation between Contexts free Languages, PDA and TM.
5. To learn how to design PDA as acceptor and TM as Calc ulators.
6. To learn how to co -relate Automata’s with Programs and Functions.
Course Outcomes: The students will be able to:
1. Understand, design, construct, analyze and interpret Regular languages, Expression and
Grammars.
2. Design different types of Finite Automata and Machines as Acceptor, Verifier and Translator.
3. Understand, design, analyze and interpret Context Free languages, Expression and Grammars.
4. Design different types of Push down Automata as Simple Parser.
5. Design different types of Turing Machines as Acceptor, Verifier, Translator and Basic
computing machine.
6. Compare, understand and analyze different languages, grammars, Automata and Machines
and appreciate their power and convert Automata to Programs and Functio ns
Prerequisite: Basic Mathematical Fundamentals: Sets, Logic, Relations, Functions.
Detailed syllabus:
Sr.
No. Module Detailed Content Hours CO
Mapping
I Introductio
n and
Regular Languages: Alphabets and Strings.
Regular Languages: Regular
Expressions, Regular Languages,
Regular Grammars, RL and LL 06 CO1
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 58
Languages grammars, Closure properties
II Finite
Automata
and
machines Finite Automata: FA as language
acceptor or verifier, NFA ( with and
without ε) , DFA, RE to NFA, NFA to
DFA, Reduced DFA , NFA -DFA
equivalence, FA to RE.
Finite State Machines: m/c with output
Moore and Mealy machines. M/c as
translators. Melay and Moore m/c
conversion 09 CO2
III Context
Free
Grammars Context Free Languages: CFG,
Leftmost and Rightmost derivations,
Ambiguity,
Simplification and Normalization (
CNF) and Chomskey Hierarchy ( Types
0 to 3) 08 CO3
IV Push Down
Automata Push Down Automata: Deterministic (
single stack )PDA, Equivalence
between PDA
and CFG. 05 CO4
V Turing
Machine Turing Machine: Deterministic TM ,
Multi -track and Multi -tape TMs,
concept of UTM and idea of system
program. Issue and concept of Halting
Problem 07 CO5
VI Application
s of
Automata 1.Power and Limitations of Regular and
Context Free Grammars and Machines
2.Designing Functions:
FA: Acceptor and Verifier.
FSM: Translator
PDA: Simple Parser for WF parenthesis,
palindromes etc.
TM: Basic bit wise calculator(+ / -
/AND/OR) and Translator
( Note Added) 04 CO2
CO4
CO5
CO6
Text books
1. J.C.Martin, “Introduction to languages and the Theory of Computation”, TMH.
2. Kavi Mahesh, “Theory of Computation A Problem Solving Approach”, Wiley India
References
1. John E. Hopcroft, Rajeev Motwani, Jeffrey D. Ullman, “Introduction to Automata Theory,
Languages and Computation”, Pearson Education.
2. Daniel I.A. Cohen, “Introduction to Computer Theory”, John Wiley & Sons.
3. Theory of Computation - By Vivek Kulkarni from Oxford University.
4. N.Chandrashekhar& K.L.P. Mishra, “Theory of Computer Science, Automata Languages &
Computations”, PHI publications.
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 59
Sample Example for Tutorial : Applications of Automata
An automata can be easily converted to functions by converting States to functions and Transitions to
function calls or gotos begining with Starting state and Accepting in a terminating state.
A simple example of DFA is:
Functions
S( x )
{ if( x == 'a') goto A(next);
else print("Error"); }
A( x ) { if( x == 'a') goto A(next);
else if( x == 'b') goto B(next);
else print("Error"); \}
B( x )
{ if( x == 'a') goto A(next);
else if( x == 'b') goto B(next);
else if( end ) print("Accept");
else print("Error"); \}
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 60
Suggested Tutorials:
Sr.
No. Module Detailed Content
I Introduction and
Regular
Languages 1 Tutorial on design of RE, RG, RLG and LLG for given Regular
Language.
II Finite Automata
and machines 3 Tutorials for converting RE to NFA, NFA to DFA to Reduced DFA,
FA to RE.
1 Tutorial on design of Moore and Mealy machines.
III Context Free
Grammars 1 Tutorial on design of CFG and Leftmost and Rightmost derivations.
1 Tutorial for converting CFG to CNF.
IV Push Down
Automata 1 Tutorial on design of Push Down Automata.
V Turing Machine 1 Tutorial on design of single tape Turing Machine.
1 Tutorial on design of Multi -track and Multi -tape TMs.
VI Applications of
Automata 2 Tutorials for converting Automata to Functions:
a. FA to Acceptor / Verifier.
b. FSM to Translator.
c. PDA to Simple Parser for WF parenthesis, palindromes etc.
d. TM to Basic bit wise calculator(+ / - /AND/OR) / Translator
Assessment:
Internal Assessment for 20 marks:
Consisting of Two Compulsory Class Tests
Approximately 40% to 50% of syllabus content must be covered in First test and remaining 40% to
50% of syllabus contents must be covered in second test.
End Semester Examination: Some guidelines for setting the question papers are as:
Weightage of each module in end semester examination is
expected to be/will be proportional to number of respective lecture
hours mentioned in the syllabus.
Question paper will comprise of total six questions , each
carrying 20 marks.
Q.1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of
the syllabus .
Remaining question will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2
has part (a) from module 3 then part (b) will be from any other
module. (Randomly selected from all the modules.)
Total four questions need to be solved.
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 61
Course Code Course
Name Theory Practical Tutorial Theory TW/Prac
tical Tutorial Total
ITL401 Networking
Lab -- 02 -- -- 1 -- 1
Course
Code Course Name Examination Scheme
Theory Marks
Term Work Oral Total Internal assessment End
Sem.
Exam Test
1 Test 2 Avg. of 2
Tests
ITL401 Networking
Lab -- -- -- -- 25 25 50
Lab Objectives: Students will try:
1. To get familiar with the basic network administration commands.
2. To install and configure network simulator and learn basics of TCL scripting.
3. To understand the network simulator environment and visualize a network topology and
observe its performance
4. To analyze the traffic flow and the contents of protocol frames.
5. To implement client -server socket programs.
6. To design and configure a network for an organization.
Lab Outcomes : Student will be able to
1. Execute and evaluate network administration commands and demonstrate their use in different
network scenarios
2. Demonstrate the installation and configuration of network simulator.
3. Demonstrate and measure different netw ork scenarios and their performance behavior.
4. Analyze the contents the packet contents of different protocols.
5. Implement the socket programming for client server architecture.
6. Design and setup a organization network using packet tracer.
Hardware Requiremen t:
PC i3 processor and above Software requirement:
NS2.34, Protocol Analyzer ( eg. Wireshark),
Packet tracer (Eg. CISCO packet tracer)
Prerequisite: C Programming Language
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 62
Detailed syllabus:
Sr.
No. Module Detailed Content Hours LO
Mapping
0 Prerequisite Programming Language (C/java),
Basic commands of windows and
unix operating system, editor
commands (eg nano/vi editor etc) 02
I Fundamentals of
Computer
Network Understanding Basic networking
Commands: Ping, Tracert,
traceroute, ipconfig, ifconfig,
nslookup, netstat 02 LO1
II Basics of Network
simulation Installation and configuration of
NS2
Introduction to Tcl Hello
Programming 03 LO2
III Simulation of
Network Topology Implementation of Specific
Network topology with respect to
1. Number of nodes and
physical layer configuration
2. Graphical simulation of
network with Routing
Protocols and traffic
consideration (TCP, UDP)
using NAM.
3. Analysis of network
performance for quality of
service parameters such as
packet -delivery -ratio, delay
and thro ughput
4. Comparative analysis of
routing protocols with
respect to QOS parameters
using Xgraph/gnuplot for
different load conditions. 05 LO3
IV Protocol Analyzer Installation of Wire shark
Analysis of Packet headers, 04 LO4
V Socket
Programming Socket Programming with C/Java
1.TCP Client, TCP Server 04 LO5
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 63
2. UDP Client, UDP Server
VI Case study on
designing network
topology A case study to design and
configure any organization network
eg. College network or campus
network, using any packet tracer or
network topology design software
based on infrastructure
requirements, servers and clients,
traffic consideration and application
requirements. 06 L06
Text Books:
1. Computer Network: Top Down approach, Behrouz Forouzan, Firoz Mossharraf. MGH
2. Packet analysis with Wire shark, Anish Nath, PACKT publishing
Reference Books:
1. NS2.34 Manual
2. Introduction to Network Simulator NS2, 2nd Edition, Teerawat Issariyakul, Ekram Hossain,
Springer
Term Work:
Term Work shall consist of at least 10 to 12 practical’s based on the above list. Also Term work
Journal must include at least 2 assignments.
Term Work Marks: 25 Marks (Total marks) = 15 Marks (Experiment) + 5 Marks (Assignments) + 5
Marks (Attendance)
Oral Exam: An Oral exam will be held based on the above syllabus.
Course Code Course
Name Theory Practical Tutorial Theory TW/Prac
tical Tutorial Total
ITL402
Unix Lab
-- 2 -- -- 1 -- 1
Course
Code Course Name Examination Scheme
Theory Marks
Term
Work Oral & Practical
Total Internal assessment End
Sem.
Exam Test
1 Test 2 Avg. of
two Tests
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 64
ITL402
Unix Lab
-- -- -- -- 25 25 50
Lab Objectives: Students will try:
1. To introduce Basic Unix general purpose Commands
2. To learn network Unix commands.
3. To learn C programming in Unix editor environment.
4. To learn shell script and sed concepts.
5. To learn file management and permission advance commands.
6. To learn awk, grap, perl scripts.
Lab Outcomes: Student will be able to:
1. Identify the basic Unix general purpose commands.
2. Apply and change the ownership and file permissions using advance Unix commands.
3. Use the awk, grep, perl scripts.
4. Implement shell scripts and sed.
5. Apply basic of administrative task .
6. Apply networking Unix commands.
Prerequisite: C Programming Language and Operating System
Hardware requirement:
PC i3 and above.
Software requirement:
Unix, Editor, Bash shell, Bourne shell and C shell.
Detailed syllabus:
Sr.
No. Module Detailed Content Hours LO
Mapping
0 Prerequisite Programming syntax, Installation of
Unix, concepts of operating system 02 --
I Basic Commands A brief history of UNIX, Unix
Architecture. Logging into (and out
of) UNIX systems, Changing your
password, General format of UNIX
commands.
a) Installation of Unix operating
system.
b) User management in Unix.
c) Study of Unix general purpose 04 LO1
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 65
utility command list obtained from
(cd, cp, ps, ls, mv, rm, mkdir,
rmdir, man, who, cat, echo, more,
date, time, kill, history, chmod,
passwd, who am i, who, time, bc,
history, clear, man, lost, chown,
finger, pwd, cal, logout, shutdown)
commands.
II Advance
Commands a) Study of Unix networking
commands (ifconfig, ping,
traceroute, netstat, nslookup, whois,
hostname, tcpdump).
b) Study of Unix file system (tree
structure).
c) Study of .bashrc, /etc/bashrc and
Environment variables.
d) Study File and directory
permissions.
e) Study of Editor Vi/other editor.
f) Study of Bash shell, Bourne shell
and C shell in Unix operating
system. 04 LO1
LO2
LO5
LO6
III Basic System
administrative task Process management
Memory management
File system management
User management 04 LO1
LO2
LO5
IV Shell scripts a) Write a shell script program to
display list of user currently logged
in.
b) Write a shell script program to
display “HELLO WORLD”.
c) Write a shell script program to
develop a scientific calculator.
d) Write a shell Script program to
check whether the given number is 04 LO1
LO4
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 66
even or odd.
e) Shell script Program to search
whether element is presen t is in the
list or not.
V Shell scripts and
sed a) Shell script program to check
whether given file is a directory or
not.
b) Shell script program to count
number of files in a Directory.
c) Shell script program to copy
contents of one file to another.
d) Create directory, write contents
on that and Copy to a suitable
location in your home
directory.
e) Use a pipeline and command
substitution to set the length of a
line in file to a variable.
f) Write a program using s ed
command to print dupl icated lines
of Input.
06 LO1
LO4
VI grep, awk, perl
scripts a) Write a grep/egrep script to find
the number of words character,
words and lines in a file.
b) Write an awk script to develop a
Fibonacci series.
c) Write a perl script to compute the
power of a given number.
d) Write an awk script to display
the pattern of given string or
number.
e) Write a perl script to check a
number is prime or not.
f) Write an egrep script to display 04 LO1
LO2
LO3
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 67
list of files in the directory.
Text Books:
1. Unix, concepts and applications by Sumitabha Das, McGraw -Hill
2. Mastering Shell Scripting, Randal. K. Michael , Second Edition, Wiley Publication
References:
1. Unix Shell Programming by Yashwant Kanetkar
2. Unix shell programming by forozun
Term Work:
Term Work shall consist of at least 10 to 12 practical’s based on the above list. Also Term work
Journal must include at least 2 assignments.
Term Work Marks: 25 Marks (Total marks) = 15 Marks (Experiment) + 5 Marks (Assignments) + 5
Marks (Attendance)
Oral & Practical Exam: An Oral & Practical exam will be held based on the above syllabus.
Course Code Course Name Theory Practical Tutorial Theory TW/Prac
tical Tutorial Total
ITL403 Microprocessor
Programming
Lab -- 2 -- -- 1 -- 1
Course
Code Course Name Examination Scheme
Theory Marks
Term
Work Oral Total Internal assessment End
Sem.
Exam Test1 Test 2 Avg. of
two Tests
ITL403 Microprocessor
Programming
Lab -- -- -- -- 25 25 50
Lab Objectives: Students will try to:
1. Learn assembling and disassembling of PC.
2. Get hands on experience with Assembly Language Programming.
3. Study interfacing of peripheral devices with 8086 microprocessor.
4. Understand techniques for faster execution of instructions and improve speed of operation and
performance of microprocessors.
5. Learn fundamentals of designing embedded systems
6. Write and debug programs in TASM/MASM/hardware kits
Lab Outcome s: Students will be able to :
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 68
1. Apply the fundamentals of assembly level programming of microprocessors.
2. Build a program on a microprocessor using arithmetic & logical instruction set of 8086.
3. Develop the assembly level programming using 8086 loop instructi on set.
4. Write programs based on string and procedure for 8086 microprocessor.
5. Analyze abstract problems and apply a combination of hardware and software to address the
problem
6. Make use of standard test and measurement equipment to evaluate digital interfa ces.
Prerequisite: Logic Design, Programming Languages(C, C++), COA
Hardware Requirement:
Motherboard, RAM, Processor, Connectors, Cables, SMPS, HDD, Monitor, Graphics card
(optional), Cabinet.
8086 microprocessor experiment kits with specified interfacing study boards.
Software Requirement:
Microsoft Macro Assembler (TASM)/Turbo Assembler(TASM)
NOTE: Programs can be executed on assembler or hardware boards,
Detailed syllabus:
Sr.
No. Module Detailed Content Hours LO
Mapping
I PC Assembly
1. Study of PC Motherboard
Technology (South Bridge and
North Bridge).
2. Disassembling the System Unit
& Identifying Internal
Components and Connections.
3. Study of various connections and
ports used in computer
communication. 06 LO1
II Arithmetic and
logical operations
in 8086 Assembly
language
programming 1. Program for 16 bit BCD addition
2. Program to evaluate given
logical expression.
3. Convert two digit Packed BCD
to Unpacked BCD.
(any two) 04 LO2
LO6
III Loop operations in
8086 Assembly
language
programming 1. Program to move set of numbers
from one memory block to
another.
2. Program to count number of 1’s 06 LO3
LO6
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 69
and 0;s in a given 8 bit number
3. Program to find the
smallest/largest number from a
given set of numbers.
4. Program to search for a given
number
(any three)
IV String and
procedure in 8086
Assembly
language
programming 1. Check whether a given string is
a palindrome or not.
04 LO4
LO6
V Procedure in 8086
Assembly
language
programming 1. Compute the factorial of
a positive integer ‘n’ using
recursive procedure.
2. Generate the first ‘n’ Fibonacci
numbers.
(any one) 02 LO4
LO6
VI Interfacing with
8086
microprocessor 3. Interfacing Seven Segment
Display
4. Interfacing keyboard matrix
5. Interfacing DAC
(any two) 04 LO5
LO6
Text Books:
1. Scott Mueller,”Upgrading and repairing PCs”, Pearson,
2. John Uffenbeck, “8086/8088 family: Design Programming and Interfacing:”Pearson Education
Reference Books:
1. K Bhurchandi, “Advanced Microprocessors & Peripherals”, Tata McGraw -Hill Education
Term Work:
Term Work shall consist of at least 10 to 12 practical’s based on the above list. Also Term work
Journal must include at least 2 assignments.
Term Work Marks: 25 Marks (Total marks) = 15 Marks (Experiment) + 5 Marks (Assignments) + 5
Marks (Attendance)
Oral Exam: An Oral exam will be held based on the above syllabus.
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 70
Course Code Course Name Theory Practical Tutorial Theory TW/Pract
ical Tutorial Total
ITL404 Python lab -- 2+2* -- -- 02 -- 02
*2 hours shown as practical’s to be taken class wise lecture and other 2 hours to be taken as batch wise
practicals in Lab.
Lab Objectives: The course will help the students to get familiar with:
1. Basics of Python programming
2. Decision Making and Fun ctions in Python
3. Object Oriented Programming using Python
4. Files Handling in Python
5. GUI Programming and Databases operations in Python
6. Network Programming in Python
Lab Outcomes: Upon Completion of the course the learner should be able to:
1. Describe the Numbers, Math functions, Strings, List, Tuples and Dictionaries in Python
2. Express different Decision Making statements and Functions
3. Interpret Object oriented programming in Python
4. Understand and summarize different File handling operations
5. Explain how to design GUI Applications in Python and evaluate different database operations
6. Design and develop Client Server network applications using Python
Hardware & Software Requirements:
Hardware Requirements Software Requirements Other Requirements
PC With following
Configuration
1. Intel PIV Processor
2. 2 GB RAM
3. 500 GB Harddisk
4. Network interface card 1. Windows or Linux Desktop OS
2. Python 3.6 or higher
3. Notepad ++
4.Python IDEs like Pydev,
Netbeans or Eclipse
5. Mysql 1. Internet Connection for
installing additional packages
Course
Code Course Name Examination Scheme
Theory Marks
Term
Work Oral & Practical
Total Internal assessment
End
Sem.
Exam Test1 Test 2 Avg. of
two
Tests
ITL404
Python lab
-- -- -- -- 50 50 100
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 71
Prerequisite Subjects: Structured Programming Approach & Java Programming
Detailed Syllabus:
Sr.
No. Module Detailed Content Hours LO
Mapping
0 Prerequisite Basic Programming syntax of Java/C.
Installation and configuration of python. 02
I Basics of Python Theory : Numbers in Python, Basic & Built -in
Math functions, Number Formats, Strings,
Quotes, print() Function, Assigning Values to
Names & Changing Data Through Names,
Copying Data, Tuples — Unchanging
Sequences of Data, Lists — Changeable
Sequences of Data, Dictionaries — Groupings
of Data Indexed by Name, Special String
Substitution Using Dictionaries , Arrays,
Treating a String Like a Lis t, Special Types,
Ranges of Sequences, Working with Sets,
Arrays.
Lab Experiment:
Write python programs to understand
Expressions, Variables, Quotes, Basic Math
operations, Strings: Basic String Operations &
String Methods, List, Tuples, Dictionaries,
Arrays.
(Minimum Three Programs based on math
operations, Strings and List/Tuples/
Dictionaries) 10 LO 1
II Decision Making and
Functions Theory: If statement, if -elif-else, Repetition
using while loop, for loop, break statement,
Handling Errors - try: statement, except:
statement, Functions -Grouping Code under a
Name, defining a Function, describing a 10 LO 2
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 72
function in the function, Checking & Setting
Your Parameters, Calling Functions from
within Other Functions, Functions Inside of
Functions, Layers of Func tions
Lab Experiment:
Write python programs to understand
different decision making statements and
Functions.
(Minimum Three Programs based on
Decision making, Looping Statements and
Functions)
III Object Oriented
Programming using
Python programming Theory: Creating a Class, Self Variables,
Constructors, Types of Methods, Inner
Classes, Constructors in Inheritance,
Polymorphism,, The super() Method, Method
Resolution Order (MRO), Operator
Overloading, Method Overloading &
Overriding, Inter faces in Python. Exceptions
Handling: Errors in a Python Program,
Exceptions, Exception Handling, Types of
Exceptions, The Except Block, The assert
Statement.
Modules and Packages: Creating Modules and
Packages, Documenting & Viewing Module,
Basics of Testing Your Modules and
Packages, Importing & exporting Modules.
Lab Experiment:
Write python programs to understand
different Object oriented features in Python
(Minimum four programs based on
a) Classes & objects, 10 LO 3
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 73
b) Constructors,
c) Inheritance & Polymorphism,
d) Exception handling
IV Files Handling Theory: Types of Files in Python, Opening a
File, Closing a File. Writing Text Files,
Knowing Whether a File Exists or Not,
Working with Binary Files, Appending Text
to a File, Reading Text Files, File Exceptions,
The with Statement
Pickle in Python, Lambda and Filter, Map &
range functions.
Lab Experiment:
Write python programs to understand
different File handling operations 07 LO 4
V GUI Programming and
Databases Theory: GUI Programming - Writing a GUI
with Python: GUI Programming Toolkits,
Creating GUI Widgets with Tkinter, Creating
Layouts, Radio Buttons and Checkboxes,
Dialog Boxes.
Database Access - Python’s Database
Connectivity, Types of Databases Used with
Python, Mysql database Connectivity with
Python, Performing Insert, Deleting & Update
operations on database
Lab Experiment:
Write python programs to understand GUI
designing and database operations
(Minimum Three programs based on
GUI designing using Tkinter, Mys ql database
creation & Database connectivity with DML 07 LO 5
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 74
operations using python
VI Web Programming Theory: Understanding Protocols,
Introduction to Sockets, TCP/IP Server,
TCP/IP Client, UDP Server, UDP Client, File
Server, File Client, Two -Way Communication
between Server and Client , Multithreaded
Client -Server Chat Application
Lab Experiment:
Write python programs to understand TCP
and UDP Sockets in Python
(Minimum One programs based on TCP or
UDP Sockets) 06 LO 6
Text Books:
1. James Payne, ”Beginning Python: Using Python 2.6 and Python 3.1”,Wrox Publication
2. Dr. R. Nageswara Rao,”Core Python Programming” , Dreamtech Press, Wiley Publication.
3. Magnus Lie Hetland,”Beginning Python From Novice to Professional”, Second Edition”,
Apress Publication.
Reference Books:
1. Wesley J Chun,” Core Python Applications Programming”,Third Edition, Pearson
Publication.
2. E. Balguruswamy ,” Introduction to Computing and Problem Solving using Python”,
McGraw Hill Publication
3. Learn to Master Python , from Star EDU solutions , by ScriptDemics
Term Work:
Term Work shall consist of at least 12 to 15 practical’s based on the above list. Also Term work
Journal must include at least 2 assignments.
Term Work Marks: 50 Marks (Total marks) = 40 Marks (Experiment) + 5 Marks (Assignments) + 5
Marks (Attendance)
Oral & Practical Exam: An Oral & Practical exam will be held based on the above syllabus.
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 75
University of Mumbai
Program Structure B.E. Information Technology, (Rev. 2016)
T. E. Information Technology ( Semester -V)
Course
Code Course
Name Teaching Scheme
(Contact Hours) Credits Assigned
Theory Pract Tut Theory TW/
Pract Tut Total
ITC501 Microcontroller and
Embedded Programming 4 - - 4 - - 4
ITC502 Internet Programming 4 - - 4 - - 4
ITC503 Advanced Data Management
Technology 4 - - 4 - - 4
ITC504 Cryptography & Network
Security 4 - - 4 - - 4
ITDLO -I Department Level
Optional Course -I 4 - - 4 - - 4
ITL501 Internet Programming Lab - 2 - - 1 1
ITL502 Security Lab - 2 - - 1 - 1
ITL503 OLAP Lab - 2 - - 1 - 1
ITL504 IOT (Mini Project) Lab - 2 - - 1 - 1
ITL505 Business Communication
and Ethics - 2+2* - - 2 - 2
Total 20 14 - 20 7 - 26
Course
Code Course
Name Examination Scheme
Theory
TW
Oral &
Pract Total Internal Assessment End
Sem.
Exam Exam
Duration
( in Hrs)
Test 1 Test 2 Avg. Oral
ITC501 Microcontroller and
Embedded Programming 20 20 20 80 3 - - 100
ITC502 Internet Programming 20 20 20 80 3 - - 100
ITC503 Advanced Data Management
Technology 20 20 20 80 3 - - 100
ITC504 Cryptography & Network
Security 20 20 20 80 3 - - 100
ITDLO -I Department Level
Optional Course -I 20 20 20 80 3 -- - 100
ITL501 Internet Programming Lab - - - - - 25 -- 25 50
ITL502 Security Lab - - - - - 25 25 -- 50
ITL503 OLAP Lab - - - - - 25 25 -- 50
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 76
ITL504 IOT (Mini Project) Lab - - - - - 25 25 -- 50
ITL505 Business Communication
and Ethics - - - - - 50 -- -- 50
Total 100 100 100 400 - 150 75 25 750
# Department Level Optional Course (DLO)
Every student is required to take one Department Elective Course for Semester V. Different
sets of courses will run in both the semesters. Students can take these courses from the list of
department electives, wh ich are closely allied to their disciplines.
(DLO -I subjects will have no Labs only Theory)
Subject Code Department Level Optional Course
(DLO)
Semester V
ITDLO 5011 Advanced Data Structures & Analysis of Algorithms
ITDLO 5012 Image Processing
ITDLO 5013 E-Commerce & E -Business
ITDLO 5014 IT Enabled Services
ITDLO 5015 Computer Graphics & Virtual Reality
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 77
Course
Code Course Name Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Oral &
Practical Tutorial Total
ITC501 Microcontroller
and Embedded
Programming 04 -- 04 -- -- 04
Course
Code Course Name Examination Scheme
Theory Marks
Term
Work Oral &
Practical Oral Total Internal assessment
End
Sem.
Exam Test1 Test2 Avg. of
two
Tests
ITC501 Microcontroller
and Embedded
Programming 20 20 20 80 -- -- -- 100
Course Objectives: Students will try to learn:
1. The concepts and architecture of embedded systems
2. Basic of microcontroller 8051.
3. The concepts of microcontroller interface.
4. The concepts of ARM architecture
5. The concepts of real -time operating system
6. Different design platforms used for an embedded systems application
Course Outcomes: Students will be able to:
1. Explain the embedded system concepts and architecture of embedded systems
2. Describe the architecture of 8051 microcontroller and write embedded program for 8051
microcontroller.
3. Design the interfacing for 8051 microcontroller.
4. Understand the concepts of ARM architecture.
5. Demonstrate the open source RTOS and solve the design issues for the same.
6. Select elements for an embedded systems tool.
Prerequisite: COA, Microprocessors and Assembly Programming languages
Detailed syllabus:
Sr.
No. Module Detailed Content Hours CO
Mapping
0 Prerequisite Revision of microcomputer system
terminologies, High level, Machine level
and Assembly level programming
language , difference between
microprocessor and microcontroller 02
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 78
I Introduction to
Embedded
systems Overview of Embedded System
Architecture, Application areas,
Categories of embedded systems,
specialties of embedded systems.
Recent trends in embedded systems.
Brief introduction to embedded
microcontroller cores CISC, RISC,
ARM, DSP and SoC. 05 CO1
II The
Microcontroller
Architecture and
Programming of
8051: Introduction to 8051 Microcontroller,
Architecture, Pin configuration, Memory
organization, Input /Output Ports,
Counter and Timers, Serial
communication, Interrupts.
Instruction set, Addressing modes,
Development tools, Assembler
Directives, Programming based on
Arithmetic & Logical
Operations, I/O parallel and serial ports,
Timers & Counters, and ISR. 14 CO2
III Interfacing with
8051Microcontr
oller Interfacing ADC, DAC, Stepper motor,
LCD, KBD matrix, 8255 PPI 06 CO3
IV ARM 7
Architecture Architectural inheritance, Detailed study
of Programmer’s model, ARM
Development tools, Instruction set: Data
processing, Data
Transfer, Control flow. Addressing
modes. Writing simple assembly
language programs. Pipelining, Brief
introduction to exceptions and interrupts
handling. 10 CO4
V Open source
RTOS Basics of RTOS: Real -time concepts,
Hard Real time and Soft Real -time,
differences between general purpose OS
& RTOS, basic architecture of an RTOS,
scheduling systems, inter -process
communication, performance Matrix in
scheduling models, interrupt
management in RTOS environment,
memory management, file systems, I/O
systems, advantage and disadvantage of
RTOS. POSIX standards, RTOS issues –
selecting a Real Time Operating System,
RTOS comparative study. 07 CO5
VI Introduction to
Embedded target
boards
Introduction to Arduino, Raspberry Pi,
ARM Cortex, Intel Galileo etc. Open -
source prototyping platforms. Basic
Arduino programming; Extended
Arduino libraries; Arduino -based Internet
communication; Raspberry pi; ARM 08 CO6
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 79
Cortex Processors; Intel Galileo boards;
Sensors and Interfacing: Temperature,
Pressure, Humidity
Text Books:
1. M. A. Mazidi, J. G. Mazidi, R. D., McKinlay ,”The 8051 microcontroller & Embedded systems
Using Assembly and C”, Pearson, 3rd edition
2. Embedded / real – time systems: concepts, design & programming, Black Book, Dr. K.
V. K. K. Prasad, Dreamtech press, Reprint edition 2013
3. Shibu K. V., “Introduction to embedded systems”, McGraw Hil
References:
1. Laya B. Das, “Embedded systems an integrated approach”, Pearson, Thi rd impression, 2013
2. Steve Furber, “ARM System on chip Architecture”, Pearson, edition second
3. Michael Margolis, “Arduino Cookbook”, O’reilly
4. Simon Monk,” Raspberry Pi Cookbok”, O’reilly
5. Raspberry Pi User Guide.
6. Massimo Banzi, “Getting Started with Arduino: The Open Source Electronics Prototyping
Platform (Make) ”, O'Reilly Media.
Assessment:
Internal Assessment for 20 marks:
Consisting of Two Compulsory Class Tests
Approximately 40% to 50% of syllabus content must be covered in First test and remaining 40% to
50% of syllabus contents must be covered in second test.
End Semester Examination: Some guidelines for setting the question papers are as:
Weightage of each module in end semester examination is
expected to be/will be proportional to number of res pective lecture
hours mentioned in the syllabus.
Question paper will comprise of total six questions , each
carrying 20 marks.
Q.1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of
the syllabus .
Remaining question will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2
has part (a) from module 3 then part (b) will be from any other
module. (Randomly selected from all the modules.)
Total four questions need to be solved.
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 80
Course
Code Course Name Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Oral &
Practical Tutorial Total
ITC502 Internet
Programming
04 -- -- 04 -- -- 04
Course
Code Course Name Examination Scheme
Theory Marks
Term
Work Oral &
Practical Oral Total Internal assessment End
Sem.
Exam Test1 Test2 Avg. of
two Tests
ITC502
Internet
Programming
20 20 20 80 -- -- -- 100
Course Objectives: Students will try to learn :
1 To get familiar with basics of the Internet Programming.
2. To acquire knowledge and skills for creation of web site considering both client and server side
programming
3. To gain ability to develop responsive web applications
4. To explore different web extensions and web services standards
5. To learn characteristics of RIA –Web Mashup Eco System
6. To be familiarized with Python web framework -Django.
Cour se Outcomes: Students will be able to:
1. Implement interactive web page(s) using HTML,CSS and JavaScript.
2. Design a responsive web site using HTML5 and CSS3.
3. Demonstrate Rich Internet Application .
4. Build Dynamic web site using server side PHP Programming and Database connectivity.
5. Describe and differentiate different Web Extensions and Web Services.
6. Demonstrate web application using Python web Framework -Django
Prerequisite: Basic Java Programming and Python Programming.
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 81
Detailed syllabus:
Sr.
No. Module Detailed Content Hours CO
Mapping
0 Prerequisite Introduction to web technologies :
Introduction to OSI layers, 02 ---
I Client Side
Programming
:HTML, CSS and
JavaScript Basic of HTML: Web System
architecture -1,2,3 and n tier
architecture, URL, domain name
system, overview of HTTP and FTP,
Cross browser compatibility issues,
W3C Validators.
Formatting and Fonts, Anchors,
images, lists, tables, frames and
forms.
Introduction to CSS : Evolution of
CSS, Syntax of CSS, Exploring CSS
Selectors, Inserting CSS in an
HTML
Document, Defining Inheritance in
CSS.
Introduction to JavaScript:
JavaScript language constructs,
Objects in JavaScript - Built in,
Browser objects and DOM objects,
event handling, form validation and
cookies. 09 CO1
II HTML5 and
Responsive Web
Design with CSS3 HTML 5 : Fundamental Syntax and
Semantics, Native Audio and Video,
Micro data and Custom data,
Accessibility, Geo -location, Canvas
CSS3 and Responsive Web Design
Media Queries: Supporting Differing
Viewports, Embracing Fluid Layout.
CSS3: Selectors, Typography and
color Modes, Stunning Aesthetics
with CSS3, CSS3 Transitions,
Transformations and Animations,
Conquer Forms HTML5 and CSS3 12 CO1
CO2
III Rich Internet
Application(RIA) Characteristics of RIA,
Introduction to AJAX :AJAX
design basics, AJAX vs Traditional
Approach, , Rich User Interface
using Ajax.
Working with JavaScript Object
Notation(JSON) : Create data in
JSON format, JSON Parser . 09 CO3
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 82
Web Mashup Eco Systems –Mashup
Techniques: Mashing on the Web
Server, Mashing wit h JSON
IV Server Side
Programming:
PHP Introduction to PHP - Data types,
control structures, built in functions,
Building web applications using
PHP- tracking users, PHP and Mysql
database connectivity with example.
Introduction to PHP Framework. 08 CO4
V Web Extensions
and Web Services Web Extensions : Introduction to
XML, Introducing XSL.
Web services: Evolution and
differences with Distributed
computing, WSDL, SOAP, UDDI.
REST -ful web services, Resource
Oriented Architecture 07 CO5
VI Python Web
Framework:
Django Introduction, Web Frameworks,
Introduction to Django ,Projects and
Apps, “Hello World” Application. 05 CO6
Text Books:
1. HTML 5 Black Book: Kogent Learning solutions
2. “Learning PHP 5”, David Sklar, O’Reilly Publication
3. Rich Internet Application AJAX and Beyond WROX press
4. Responsive Web Design with HTML5 and CSS3, Ben Frain, PACKT Publication
References:
1. “Web Technologies: Black Book”, Dreamtech publication
2. HTML5 Cookbook, By Christopher Schmitt, Kyle Simpson, O'Reilly Media
3. Core Python Applications Programming by Wesley J Chun Third edition Pearson Publication
4. Advanced Internet Technologies (includes practicals), Deven Shah, Dreamtech publication
Assessment:
Internal Assessment f or 20 marks:
Consisting of Two Compulsory Class Tests
Approximately 40% to 50% of syllabus content must be covered in First test and remaining 40% to
50% of syllabus contents must be covered in second test.
End Semester Examination: Some guidelines for s etting the question papers are as:
Weightage of each module in end semester examination is
expected to be/will be proportional to number of respective lecture
hours mentioned in the syllabus.
Question paper will comprise of total six questions , each
carrying 20 marks.
Q.1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of
the syllabus .
Remaining question will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2
has part (a) from module 3 then part (b) will be from any other
module. (Randomly selected from all the modules.)
Total four questions need to be solved.
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 83
Course Code Course Name Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Oral &
Practical Tutorial Total
ITC503
Advanced
Data
Management
Technology 04 -- -- 04 -- -- 04
Course
Code Course Name Examination Scheme
Theory Marks
Term
Work Oral &
Practical Oral Total Internal assessment End
Sem.
Exam Test1 Test2 Avg. of
two Tests
ITC503
Advanced
Data
Management
Technology 20 20 20 80 -- -- -- 100
Course Objectives : Students will try to learn :
1. To introduce advanced concepts of transaction management and recovery techniques.
2. To impart knowledge related to query processing and query optimizer phases of a database
management system
3. To introduce concepts of advanced access control techniques like role based and discretionary
methods
4. To introduce advanced database models like distributed databases.
5. To impart an overview of emerging data models like temporal, mobile and spatial databases.
6. To create awareness of how enterprise can organize and analyze larg e amounts of data by
creating a Data Warehouse.
Course Outcomes: Students will be able to:
1. Explain and understand the concept of a transaction and how ACID properties are
maintained when concurrent transaction occur in a database
2. Measure query costs a nd design alternate efficient paths for query execution .
3. Apply sophisticated access protocols to control access to the database.
4. Implement alternate models like Distributed databases and Design applications using
advanced models like mobile, spatial databa ses.
5. Organize strategic data in an enterprise and build a data Warehouse.
6. Analyze data using OLAP operations so as to take strategic decisions.
Prerequisite: Database Management System.
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 84
Detailed syllabus:
Sr.
No. Module Detailed Content Hours CO
Mapping
0 Prerequisites Reviewing basic concepts of a
Relational database, SQL concepts 02
I Query Processing
and Optimization: Overview, Measures of Query Cost
Selection Operation, Sorting, Join
Operation, Other Operations
Evaluation of Expressions.
Query Optimization Overview,
Transformation of Relational
Expressions Estimating Statistics of
Expression Results Choice of
Evaluation Plans 06 CO1
II Transactions
Management and
Concurrency: Transaction concept, Transaction
states, ACID properties,
Implementation of atomicity and
durability, Concurrent Executions,
Serializability, Recoverability,
Implementation of isolation,
Concurrency Control: Lock -based,
Time -stamp based Deadlock
handling, Recovery System: Failure
Classification, Stor age structure,
Recovery & atomicity, Log based
recovery, Checkpoints, Shadow
Paging, ARIES Algorithm. 10 CO2
III Advanced Data
Management
techniques Advanced Database Access protocols:
Discretionary Access Control Based
on Granting and Revoking Privileges;
Mandatory Access Control and Role -
Based Access Control.
Overview of Advanced Database
models like Mobile databases,
Temporal databases, Spatial da tabases. 09 CO3
CO4
IV Distributed
Databases Introduction : Distributed Data
Processing, What is a Distributed
Database System? Design Issues .
Distributed DBMS Architecture.
Distributed Database Design : Top -Down
Design Process, Distribution Design
Issues, Fragmentation , Allocation .
Overview of Query Processing : Query
Processing Problem, Objectives of Query
Processing, Complexity of Relational
Algebra Operations, Characterization of
Query Processors, Layers of Query
Processing, Query Optimiza tion in
Distributed Databases; 09 CO4
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 85
Overview of Transaction Management in
DDB;
Overview of Concurrency Control in
DDB;
Overview of Recovery in DDB
V Data Warehousing,
Dimensional
Modeling and
OLAP The Need for Data Warehousing; Data
Warehouse Defined; Benefits of Data
Warehousing ; Features of a Data
Warehouse; Data Warehouse
Architecture; Data Warehouse and
Data Marts; Data Warehousing Design
Strategies.
Dimensional Model Vs ER Model;
The Star Schema; How Does a Query
Execute? The Snowflake Schema;
Fact Tables and Dimension Tables;
Factless Fact Table; Updates To
Dimension Tables, Primary Keys,
Surrogate Keys & Foreign Keys;
Aggregate Tables; Fact Constellation
Schema or Families of Star
Need for Online Analytical
Processing; OLTP vs OLAP; OLAP
Operati ons in a cube: Roll -up, Drill -
down, Slice, Dice, Pivot ; OLAP
Models: MOLAP, ROLAP, HOLAP. 10 CO5
VI ETL Process Challenges in ETL Functions; Data
Extraction; Identification of Data
Sources; Immediate Data Extraction,
Deferred Data Extraction; Data
Transformation: Tasks Involved in
Data Transformation, Techniques of
Data Loading, Loading the Fact
Tables and Dimension Tables 06 CO6
Text Books:
1. Korth, Slberchatz,Sudarshan, :”Database System Concepts”, 6th Edition, McGraw – Hill
2. Elmasri and Navathe, “Fundamentals of Database Systems”, 6th Edition, PEARSON
Education.
3. Theraja Reema, “Data Warehousing”, Oxford University Press, 2009.
4. Raghu Ramakrishnan and Johannes Gehrke, “Database Management Systems” 3rd Edition -
McGraw Hill
References:
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 86
1. Paulraj Ponniah, “Data Warehousing: Fundamentals for IT Professionals”, Wiley India.
2. Hector Garcia -Molina, Jeffrey D. Ullman, Jenni fer Widom “Database System
Implementation”, Pearson Ltd. 1/ e
3. Thomas M. Connolly Carolyn Begg, Database Systems : A Practical Approach to Design,
Implementation and Management, 4/e, Pearson Ltd.
4. Ralph Kimball, Margy Ross, “The Data Warehouse Toolkit: The Definitive Guide To
Dimensional Modeling”, 3rd Edition. Wiley India.
5. Han, Kamber, "Data Mining Concepts and Techniques", Morgan Kaufmann 3nd Edition.
Assessment:
Internal Assessment for 20 marks:
Consisting of Two Compulsory Class Tests
Approximately 40% to 50% of syllabus content must be covered in First test and remaining 40% to
50% of syllabus contents must be covered in second test.
End Semester Examination: Some guidelines for setting the question papers are as:
Weightage of each m odule in end semester examination is
expected to be/will be proportional to number of respective lecture
hours mentioned in the syllabus.
Question paper will comprise of total six questions , each
carrying 20 marks.
Q.1 will be compulsory and should cover m aximum contents of
the syllabus .
Remaining question will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2
has part (a) from module 3 then part (b) will be from any other
module. (Randomly selected from all the modules.)
Total four questions need to be solved.
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 87
Course Code Course Name Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Oral &
Practical Tutorial Total
ITC504 Cryptography
& Network
Security 04 -- -- 04 -- -- 04
Course
Code Course Name Examination Scheme
Theory Marks
Term
Work Oral &
Practical Oral Total Internal assessment End
Sem.
Exam Test
1 Test2 Avg. of
two Tests
ITC504 Cryptography
& Network
Security 20 20 20 80 -- -- -- 100
Course Objectives: Students will try to learn :
1. The concepts of classical encryption techniques and concepts of finite fields and
number theory.
2. And explore the working principles and utilities of various cryptographic algorithms
including secret key cryptography, hashes and message digests, and public key
algorithms
3. And explore the design issues and working principles of various authentication
protocols, PKI standards.
4. And explore various secure communication standards including Kerberos, IPsec, and
SSL/TLS and email.
5. The ability to use existing cryptographic utilitie s to build programs for secure
communication.
6. The concepts of cryptographic utilities and authentication mechanisms to design secure
applications
Course Outcomes: Students will be able to:
1. Identify information security goals, classical encryption techniques and acquire
fundamental knowledge on the concepts of finite fields and number theory.
2. Understand, compare and apply different encryption and decryption techniques to solve
problems related to confidentiality and authentication
3. Apply the knowledg e of cryptographic checksums and evaluate the performance of
different message digest algorithms for verifying the integrity of varying message sizes
4. Apply different digital signature algorithms to achieve authentication and create secure
applications
5. Appl y network security basics, analyze different attacks on networks and evaluate the
performance of firewalls and security protocols like SSL, IPSec, and PGP.
6. Apply the knowledge of cryptographic utilities and authentication mechanisms to
design secure applic ations
Prerequisite: Computer Networks
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 88
Detailed syllabus:
CO
Mapping Hours Detailed Content Module Sr No
-- 02 Basic concepts of OSI Layer Prerequisites 0
CO1 09 Services, Mechanisms and attacks -the OSI
security architecture -Network security
model -Classical Encryption techniques
(Symmetric cipher model, mono -alphabetic
and poly -alphabetic substitution techniques:
Vignere cipher, playfair cipher, Hill cipher,
transposition techniques: keyed and keyless
transposition ciphers, steganography). Introduction
& Number
Theory I
CO2
CO6 09 Data Encryption Standard -Block cipher
principles -block cipher modes of operation -
Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) -Triple
DES -Blowfish -RC5 algorithm.
Public key cryptography: Principles of public
key cryptosystems -The RSA algorithm, The
knapsack algorithm, El -Gamal Algorithm.
Key management – Diffie Hellman Key
exchange
Block
Ciphers &
Public Key
Cryptography II
CO3 09 Authentication requirement – Authentication
function , Types of Authentication, MAC –
Hash function – Security of hash function and
MAC –MD5 – SHA – HMAC – CMAC,
Digital Certificate: X.509, PKI Cryptographi
c Hashes,
Message
Digests and
Digital
Certificates III
CO4 07 Digital signature and authentication protocols
: Needham Schroeder Authentication
protocol, Digital Signature Schemes – RSA,
EI Gamal and Schnorr, DSS. Digital
signature
schemes and
authenticatio
n Protocols IV
CO5 10 Network security basics: TCP/IP
vulnerabilities (Layer wise), Packet Sniffing,
ARP spoofing, port scanning, IP spoofing,
TCP syn flood, DNS Spoofing. Denial of
Service: Classic DOS attacks, Source
Address spoofing, ICMP flood, SYN flood,
UDP flood, Distr ibuted Denial of Service,
Defenses against Denial of Service Attacks. Network
Security V
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 89
Firewalls, Intrusion Detection Systems: Host
Based and Network Based IDS, Honey pots.
CO5
CO6 06 Authentication Applications, Kerberos,
Internet Security Protocols: SSL, TLS,
IPSEC:AH, ESP, Secure Email: PGP and
S/MIME, Key Management. Network
Security
Applications VI
Text Books:
1. Mark Stamp’s Information Security Principles and Practice, Wiley
2. William Stallings, Cryptography and Network Security, Principles and Practice, 6th Edition,
Pearson Education, March 2013
3. Behrouz A. Ferouzan, “Cryptography & Network Security”, Tata Mc Graw Hill
4. Bernard Menezes, “Cryptography & Network Security”, Cengage Learning
Reference Books:
1. Applied Cryptography, Protocols Algorithms and Source Code in C, Bruce Schneier, Wiley.
2. Cryptography and Network Security, Atul Kahate, Tata Mc Graw Hill.
Assessment:
Internal Assessment for 20 marks:
Consisting of Two Compulsory Class Tests
Approximately 40% to 50% of syllabus content must be covered in First test and remaining 40% to
50% of syllabus contents must be covered in second test.
End Semester Examination: Some guidelines for setting the question papers are as:
Weightage of each module in end semester examination is
expected to be/will be proportional to number of respective lecture
hours mentioned in the syllabus.
Question paper will comprise of total six q uestions , each
carrying 20 marks.
Q.1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of
the syllabus .
Remaining question will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2
has part (a) from module 3 then part (b) will be from any other
module. (Randomly se lected from all the modules.)
Total four questions need to be solved.
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 90
Course
Code Course Name Theory Practical Tutorial Theory TW
/Practical Tutorial Total
ITL501
Internet
Programming
Lab
-- 2 -- -- 1 -- 1
Course
Code Course Name Examination Scheme
Theory Marks
Term
Work Oral & Practical
Total Internal assessment End
Sem.
Exam Test
1 Test 2 Avg. of
two Tests
ITL501
Internet
Programming
Lab
-- -- -- -- 25 25 50
Lab Objectives: Students will try:
1. To Acquire knowledge and Skills for creation of Web Site considering both client - and server -side
Programming .
2. To create Web application using tools and techniques used in industry.
3. To learn the characteristics of RIA
4. To Demonstrate Amazo n/Google or Yahoo mashup
5. To be well versed with XML and web services Technologies.
6. To be familiarized with open source Frameworks for web development.
Lab Outcomes: Students will learn to;
1. Design a basic web site using HTML5 and CSS3 to demonstrate responsive web design.
2. Implement dynamic web pages with validation using JavaScript objects by applying different
event handling mechanism.
3. Use AJAX Programming Technique to develop RIA
4. Develop simple web application using server side PHP progr aming and Database
Connectivity using MySQL.
5. Build well -formed XML Document and implement Web Service using Java.
6. Demonstrate simple web application using Python Django Framework.
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 91
Hardware and Software requirements:
Hardware Requirements Software Requirements Other Requirements
PC With following
Configuration
1. Intel Core i3/i5/i7
Processor
2. 4 GB RAM
3. 500 GB Harddisk 1. Windows or Linux Desktop OS
2. HTML5 compatible web
browsers(Chrome, Opera,
Firefox, Safari etc)
3. HTML,CSS editors like
Dreamweaver, Notepad++ etc.
4. Netbeans or Eclipse IDE
5. XAMPP 1. Internet Connection
installation of web
frameworks
Prerequisite: Basics of Java and Python Programming
Guidelines
1. The mini project work is to be conducted by a group of three students
2. Each group will be associated with a subject Incharge/ mini project mentor. The group should meet
with the concerned faculty during Laboratory hours and the progress of work discussed must be
documented.
3. The students may do will visit different websites to identify their website topic for the mini proje ct.
4. Each group will identify the Hardware and software requirement for their mini project problem
statement.
5. Mini Project consists of Responsive Website Development.
6. Which includes following points
a. Introduction to RWD frame work?
b. Identify tools
c. CSS preprocessor
d. Construction and design of skeleton for website
e. Enhancing CSS3 an d HTM L5 in website
f. Server Side Programming: website using server side scripting in PHP and database
connectivity using MySQL (PHP framework like Laravel/Joomla can be used)
g. XML ,XSL and Web Services
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 92
h. Developing RIA using AJAX including -A browser built -in XMLHttpRequest object (to
request data from a web server) and JavaScript and HTML DOM (to display or use the
data) Building Amazon/Yahoo /Google Web Mashups for the website.
i. Website Security
j. Develop full website and launch it.
7. Each group may present their work in various project competitions and paper presen tations.
8. A detailed report is to be prepared as per guidelines given by the concerned faculty.
Text Books:
1. Responsive Web Design by Example Beginner's Guide by Thoriq Firdaus, PACKT
2. Responsive Web Design with HTML5 and CSS3 PACKT
3. Professional Rich Internet Application : AJAX and Beyond WROX press
References:
1. Laravel: Up and Running, By Matt Stauffer O'Reilly Media.
2. Advanced Internet Technologies (includes practicals) ,Deven Shah ,Dreamtech publication
3. Django By Example By Antonio Melé,Pakt Publication
Term Work:
Term Work shall consist of full Mini Project on above guidelines/syllabus. Also Term work Journal
must include at least 2 assignments.
Term Work Marks: 25 Marks (Total marks) = 15 Marks (Mini Project) + 5 Ma rks (Assignments) + 5
Marks (Attendance)
Oral Exam: An Oral exam will be held based on the Mini Project and Presentation.
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 93
Course
Code Course Name Theory Practical Tutorial Theory TW /Practical Tutorial Total
ITL502 Security Lab -- 2 - -- 1 - 1
Course
Code Course
Name Examination Scheme
Theory Marks
Term
Work Oral &
Practical
Oral Total Internal assessment End Sem.
Exam Test1 Test2 Avg. of
two Tests
ITL502
Security
Lab -- -- -- -- 25 -- 25 50
Lab Objectives: Students will try:
1. To be able to apply the knowledge of symmetric cryptography to implement simple ciphers
2. To be able to analyze and implement public key algorithms like RSA and El Gamal
3. To analyze and evaluate performance of hashing algorithms
4. To explore the different network reconnaissance tools to gather information about networks
5. To explore and use tools like sniffers, port scanners and other related tools for analyzing
packets in a network.
6. To be able to set up firewalls and intrusion detection systems usi ng open source technologies
and to explore email security.
Lab Outcome: Students will learn to:
1. Apply the knowledge of symmetric cryptography to implement simple ciphers
2. Analyze and implement public key algorithms like RSA and El Gamal
3. Analyze and evaluate performance of hashing algorithms
4. Explore the different network reconnaissance tools to gather information about networks
5. Use tools like sniffers, port scanners and other related tools for analyzing packets in a network.
6. Apply and set up firewalls and int rusion detection systems using open source technologies and
to explore email security.
Hardware and Software requirements:
Hardware Requirements Software Requirements
PC With following
Configuration
1. Intel Core i3/i5/i7
Processor
2. 4 GB RAM
3. 500 GB Harddisk 1. Windows or Linux Desktop OS
2. wireshark
3. ARPWATCH
4. Kismet, NetStumbler
5. NESSUS
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 94
Prerequisite: Computer Networks, Operating System, Basics of Java and Python Programming
Detail Syllabus:
Module
No. Description Hours
CO mapping
I a) Design and Implementation of a product cipher
using Substitution and Transposition ciphers
b) Implementation and analysis of RSA
cryptosystem and Digital signature scheme
using RSA/El Gamal 4
LO1
LO2
II a) Implementation of Diffie Hellman Key
exchange algorithm
b) For varying message sizes, test integrity of
message using MD -5, SHA -1, and analyse the
performance of the two protocols. Use crypt
APIs
c) Exploring wireless security tools like Kismet,
NetStumbler etc. 4
LO2
LO3
III a) Study the use of network reconnaissance tools
like WHOIS, dig,traceroute, nslookup to gather
information about networks and domain
registrars.
b)Study of packet sniffer tools wireshark, : -
1. Observer performance in promiscuous as well
as non -promiscuous mod e.
2. Show the packets can be traced based on
different filters.
4
LO4
LO5
IV Download and install nmap.
Use it with different options to scan open ports,
perform OS fingerprinting, do a ping scan, tcp port
scan, udp port scan, etc. 4
LO5
V a) Detect ARP spoofing using nmap and/or open
source tool ARPWATCH and wireshark.
b) Simulate DOS attack using Hping and other
tools
c) Use the NESSUS /ISO Kaali Linux tool to
scan the network for vulnerabilities. 6
LO4
LO5
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 95
VI a) Set up IPSEC under LINUX.
b) Set up Snort and study the logs.
c) Explore the GPG tool of linux to implement
email security 4
LO6
Text Books:
1. Build your own Security Lab, Michael Gregg, Wiley India
2. CCNA Security, Study Guide, TIm Boyles, Sybex
Reference Books:
1. Network Security Bible, Eric Cole, Wiley India
Term Work:
Term Work shall consist of at least 10 to 12 practical’s based on the above list. Also Term work
Journal must include at least 2 assignments.
Term Work Marks: 25 Marks (Total marks) = 15 Marks (Experiment) + 5 Ma rks (Assignments) + 5
Marks (Attendance)
Oral Exam: An Oral exam will be held based on the above syllabus.
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 96
Course Code Course
Name Theory Practical Tutorial Theory TW/
Practical Tutorial Total
ITL503 OLAP Lab -- 2 -- -- 1 -- 01
Course
Code Course Name Examination Scheme
Theory Marks
Term
Work Oral &
Practical Oral Total Internal assessment End
Sem.
Exam Test Test2 Avg. of
two Tests
ITL503 OLAP Lab -- -- -- -- 25 -- 25 50
Lab Objectives: Students will try:
1. To introduce advanced concepts of transaction management and recovery techniques.
2. To impart knowledge related to query processing and query optimizer phases of a database
management system
3. To initiate awareness about the potential security threats that exists in database systems and
how to tackle them.
4. To introduce advanced database models like distributed databases.
5. To impart an overview of emerging data models like temporal, mobile and spatial databases.
6. To create awareness of how enterprise can organize and analyze large amounts of data by
creating a Data Warehouse.
Lab Outcomes: Student should be able:
1. Implement simple query optimizers and design alternate efficient paths for query execution .
2. Simulate the working of concurrency protocols, recovery mechanis ms in a database
3. Design applications using advanced models like mobile, spatial databases .
4. Implement a distributed database and understand its query processing and transaction
processing mechanisms
5. Build a data warehouse
6. Analyze data using OLAP operatio ns so as to take strategic decisions.
Hardware and Software requirements:
Hardware Requirements Software Requirements
PC With following
Configuration
1. Intel Core i3/i5/i7 1. ETL tools
2. Warehouse tools
3. Java/Python compiler
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 97
Processor
2. 4 GB RAM
3. 500 GB Harddisk
Prerequisite: DBMS.
Detailed syllabus:
Module
No. Detailed Content Hours
CO Mapping
I a) Implementation of any Query
optimizer (Java/Python)
b) Assignments for query evaluation
path expressions. 4 LO 2
II c) Simulation of Concurrency Control
Algorithm, Recovery Algorithm
(Java/Python) 4 LO1
III a) Design of a distributed database for a
real life application - Fragmentation,
Query Processing
b) Simulation of Recovery methods. 4 LO 4
IV Advanced Database Models
Case study based assignments for
Temporal, Mobile or Spatial databases 4 LO 3
V Data Warehouse Construction
a) Real life Problem to be defined for
Warehouse Design
b) Construction of star schema
c) ETL Operations. 6 LO 4
VI OLAP Exercise
a) Construction of Cubes
b) OLAP Operations, OLAP Queries 4 LO 6
Text Books:
1. Elmasri and Navathe, “Fundamentals of Database Systems”, 6th Edition, PEARSON
Education.
2. Theraja Reema, “Data Warehousing”, Oxford University Press, 2009.
3. Data Warehousing, Data Mining, & OLAP by Alex Berson McGraw Hill.
References:
1. Hector Garcia -Molina, Jeffrey D. Ullman, Jennifer Widom “Database System
Implementation”, Pearson Ltd. 1/ e
2. Thomas M. Connolly Carolyn Begg, Database Systems : A Practical Approach to Design,
Implementation and Management, 4/e Pearson Ltd
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 98
3. Ralph Kimball, Margy Ross, “The Data Warehouse Toolkit: The Definitive Guide To
Dimensional Modeling”, 3rd Edition. Wiley India.
Term Work:
Term Work shall consist of at least 10 to 12 practical’s based on the above list. Also Term work
Journal must include at least 2 assignments.
Term Work Marks: 25 Marks (Total marks) = 15 Marks (Experiment) + 5 Marks (Assignments) + 5
Marks (Attendance)
Oral Exam: An Oral exam will be held based on the above syllabus.
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 99
Course Code Course
Name Theory Practical Tutorial Theory TW/
Practical Tutorial Total
ITL504
IOT (Mini
Project) Lab
-- 2 -- -- 1 -- 1
Course
Code Course Name Examination Scheme
Theory Marks
Term
Work Oral &
Practical Oral Total Internal assessment End
Sem.
Exam Test1 Test2 Avg. of
two Tests
ITL504
IOT (Mini
Project) Lab -- -- -- -- 25 -- 25 50
Lab Objectives: Students will try to:
1. Address the real world problems and find the required solution.
2. Design the problem solution as per the requirement analysis done.
3. Study the basic concepts of programming/ hardware/ emulator for Raspberry pi/Arduino/
ARM Cortex/ Intel Galileo etc.
4. Fabricate and implement the mini project intended solution for project based learning.
5. Build and test the mini project successfully.
6. Improve the team building, communication and management skills of the students.
Lab Outcomes: Student will be able to:
1. Identify the requirements for the real world problems.
2. Conduct a survey of several available literatures in the preferred field of study.
3. Study and enhance software/ hardware skills.
4. Demonstrate and build the project successfully by hardware requirements, coding, emulating
and testing.
5. To report and present the findi ngs of the study conducted in the preferred domain
6. Demonstrate an ability to work in teams and manage the conduct of the research study.
Guidelines
1. The mini project work is to be conducted by a group of three students
2. Each group will be associated with a subject Incharge/ mini project mentor. The group should meet
with the concerned faculty during Laboratory hours and the progress of work discussed must be
documented.
3. The students may do survey for different application using Raspberry pi/Arduino/ ARM Co rtex/
Intel Galileo etc topics for the mini project.
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 100
4. Each group will identify the Hardware and software requirement for their mini project problem
statement.
5. Prototype/Design your own circuit board using Raspberry pi/Arduino/ ARM Cortex/ Intel Galileo
etc.
6. Installation, configure and manage your Raspberry pi/Arduino/ ARM Cortex/ Intel Galileo etc
board/kit.
7. Work with operating system and do coding to for input devices on board.
8. The project assessment for term work will be done at least two times at depar tment level by giving
presentation to panel members which consist of at least three (3) members as Internal examiners
(including the project guide/mentor) appointed by the Head of the department of respective
Programme.
9. Create and interface using Web to pu blish or remotely access the data on Internet.
10. Each group along with the concerned faculty shall identify a potential problem statement, on which
the study and implementation is to be conducted.
11. Each group may present their work in various project compet itions and paper presentations.
12. A detailed report is to be prepared as per guidelines given by the concerned faculty.
Text Books:
1. Massimo Banzi,“Getting Started with Arduino”,O’reilly, 2nd edition
2. Simon Monk,” Raspberry Pi Cookbok”, O’reilly
3. Raspberry Pi User Guide
References:
1. Internet of Things (A Hands -on-Approach) , Vijay Madisetti , Arshdeep Bahga
Term Work:
Term Work shall consist of full Mini Project on above guidelines/syllabus. Also Term work Journal
must include at least 2 assignments.
Term Work Marks: 25 Marks (Total marks) = 15 Marks (Mini Project) + 5 Marks (Assignments) + 5
Marks (Attendance)
Oral Exam: An Oral exam will be held based on the Mini Project and Presentation.
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 101
Course Code Course Name Theory Practical Tutorial Theory TW/
Practical Tutorial Total
ITL505
Business
Communication
and Ethics 2 2* -- -- 2 -- 2
Course
Code Course Name Examination Scheme
Theory Marks
Term
Work Oral &
Practical Oral Total Internal assessment
End
Sem.
Exam Test1 Test2 Avg. of
two
Tests
ITL505
Business
Communication
and Ethics -- -- -- -- 50 -- -- 50
* Batch wise practical’s
Pre-requisite
Communication Skills
Course Objective: Students will try:
1. To inculcate professional and ethical attitude at the workplace
2. To enhance effective communication and interpersonal skills
3. To build multidisciplinary approach towards all life tasks
4. To hone analytical and logical skills for problem -solving
Course Outcomes: Students will learn to:
1. Design a technical document using pr ecise language, suitable vocabulary and apt style.
2. Develop the life skills/ interpersonal skills to progress professionally by building stronger
relationships.
3. Demonstrate awareness of contemporary issues knowledge of professional and ethical
responsibilit ies.
4. Apply the traits of a suitable candidate for a job/higher education, upon being trained in the
techniques of holding a group discussion, facing interviews and writing resume/SOP.
5. Deliver formal presentations effectively implementing the verbal and non -verbal skills.
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 102
Module Detailed Contents Hrs.
01 Report Writing 05
1.1 Objectives of Report Writing
1.2 Language and Style in a report
1.3 Types : Informative and Interpretative (Analytical, Survey and
Feasibility)and Formats of reports (Memo, Letter, Short and Long
Report )
02 Technical Writing 03
2.1 Technical Paper Writing (IEEE Format)
2.2 Proposal Writing
03 Introduction to Interpersonal Skills 08
3.1 Emotional Intelligence
3.2 Leadership and Motivation
3.3 Team Building
3.4 Assertiveness
3.5 Conflict Resolution and Negotiation Skills
3.6 Time Management
3.7 Decision Making
04 Meetings and Documentation 02
4.1 Strategies for conducting effective meetings
4.2 Notice, Agenda and Minutes of a meeting
4.3 Business meeting etiquettes
05 Introduction to Corporate Ethics 02
5.1 Professional and work ethics (responsible use of social media -
Facebook, WA, Twitter etc.)
5.2 Introduction to Intellectual Property Rights
5.4 Ethical codes of conduct in business and corporate activities (Personal
ethics, conflicting values, choosing a moral response and
making ethical decisions)
06 Employment Skills 06
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 103
1. Report Writing (Theory)
2. Technical Proposal
3. Technical Paper Writing (Paraphrasing a published IEEE Technical Paper )
4. Interpersonal Skills (Group activities and Role plays)
5. Interpersonal Skills (Documentation in the form of soft copy or hard copy)
6. Meetings and Documentation (Notice, Agenda, Minutes of Mock Meetings)
7. Corporate ethics (Case studies, Role plays)
8. Writing Resume and Statement of Purpose
1. Term Work:
2. Term work shall consist of all assignments from the list. The distributio n of marks for term
3. work shall be as follows:
4. Book Report………………………………………………..(10) Marks
5. Assignments ……………………………………………… (10) Marks
6. Project Report Presentation……………………………….. (15) Marks
7. Group Discussion.………………………………………… (10) Marks
8. Attendance …………………………………………………(05) Marks
9. TOTAL: ……………………………………………………(50) Marks
The final certification and acceptance of term work ensures the satisfactory performance of
work assigned and minimum passing in the term work.
References
1. Fred Luthans, “Organizational Behavior”, McGraw Hill, edition
2. Lesiker and Petit, “Report Writing for Business”, McGraw Hill, edition
3. Huckin and Olsen, “Technical Writing and Professional Communication”, McGraw Hill 6.1 Group Discussion
6.2 Resume Writing
6.3 Interview Skills
6.4 Presentation Skills
6.5 Statement of Purpose
26
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 104
4. Wallace and Masters, “Personal Development for Life and Work”, Thomson Learning, 12th
edition
5. Heta Murphy , “Effective Business Communication”, Mc Graw Hill, edition
6. Sharma R.C. and Krishna Mohan, “Business Correspondence and Report Writing”, Tata
McGraw -Hill Education
7. Ghosh, B. N., “Managing Soft Skills for Personality Development”, Tata McGraw Hill.
Lehman,
8. Dufrene, Sinha, “BCOM”, Cengage Learning, 2nd edition
9. Bell, Smith, “Management Communication” Wiley India Edition, 3rd edition.
10. Dr. Alex, K., ”Soft Skills”, S Chand and Company
11. Subramaniam, R., “P rofessional Ethics” Oxford University Press.
12. Robbins Stephens P., “Organizational Behavior”, Pearson Education
13. https://grad.ucla.edu/asis/agep/advsopstem.pdf
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 105
Course
Code Course Name Theory Practical Tutorial Theory TW/
Practical Tutorial Total
ITDLO 50
11 Advanced Data
Structures &
Analysis of
Algorithms
04 -- -- 04 -- -- 04
Course
Code Course Name Examination Scheme
Theory Marks
Term
Work Oral &
Practical
Total Internal assessment
End
Sem.
Exam Test1 Test2 Avg.
of two
Tests
ITDLO 50
11 Advanced Data
Structures &
Analysis of
Algorithms
20 20 20 80 -- --
100
Course Objectives: Students will try:
1. To learn mathematical background for analysis of algorithm
2. To learn various advanced data structures.
3. To understand the concept of designing an algorithm.
4. To learn dynamic programming and greedy method.
5. To understand the concept of pattern matching
6. To learn advanced tree and graph applications.
Course Outcomes:
1. Students will be able to choose appropriate advanced data structure for given problem.
2. Students will be able to calculate complexity.
3. Students will be able to select appropriate design techniqu es to solve real world problems.
4. Students will able to apply the dynamic programming technique to solve the problems.
5. Students will be able to apply the greedy programming technique to solve the problems.
6. Students will be able to select a proper pattern ma tching algorithm for given problem.
Prerequisite : Knowledge Any Programming Language, Data structures and Analysis
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 106
Detailed syllabus:
Sr.
No. Module Detailed Content Hours CO
Mapping
Prerequisite Data structures and analysis 02 --
I Introduction
Introduction
• Introduction to advanced data
structures:
• Introduction /Fundamentals of
the analysis of algorithms
o Recurrences:
The substitution
method
Recursive tree
method
Masters method
o Probabilistic analysis
o Amortized analysis
o Randomiz ed algorithms
o Mathematical aspects
and analysis of
algorithms 10 CO1
CO2
II Advanced Data
Structures
Introduction
AVL tree
Huffman algorithm
B/B+ tree
2-3 tree operations
Red-Black Trees
tries
Heap operations
Implementation of priority
queue using heap
Topological sort
Analysis of All problems 11 CO1
CO2
CO3
III Divide and
Conquer
Introduction
Binary search
Finding the minimum and
maximum
Merge sort
Quick sort
Strassen’s matrix multiplication
Analysis of All problems 7 CO2
CO3
IV Greedy algorithms
Introduction
Knapsack problem
Job sequencing with deadlines
Minimum cost spanning trees 8 CO2
CO3
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 107
o Kruskal’s algorithm
o Prim’s algorithm
Optimal storage on tapes
Optimal merge pattern
Subset cover problem
Container loading problem
Analysis of All problems CO5
V Dynamic
algorithms
And
NP-Hard and NP -
Complete
Introduction Dynamic algorithms
All pair shortest path
0/1 knapsack
Travelling salesman problem
Coin Changing Problem
Matrix Chain Multiplication
Flow shop scheduling
Optimal binary search tree
(OBST)
Analysis of All problems
Introduction to NP -Hard And
NP-Complete Problems 8 CO2
CO3
CO4
VI String Matching
introduction
The naïve string matching
algorithm
Rabin Karp algorithm
Knuth -Morris -Pratt algorithm
(KMP)
Longest common
subsequence(LCS)
Analysis of All problems
Genetic algorithms
6 CO2
CO3
CO6
Text Books:
1. Introduction to ALGORITHMS, Cormen, Leiserson, Rivest, Stein, PHI.
2. Algorithms: Design and Analysis, Harsh Bhasin, OXFORD.
3. Fundamentals of Computer Algorithms, Horowitz, Sahani, Rajsekaran, Universities Press.
4. C and Data structures, Deshpande, Kakde, Dreamtech Press.
Reference Books:
1. Data Structures and Algorithms in C++, Goodritch, Tamassia, Mount, WILEY.
2. Data Structures using C, Reema Thareja, OXFORD.
3. Data Structures and Algorithm Analysis in C, Mark A. Weiss, Pearson.
Assessment:
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 108
Internal Assessment for 20 marks:
Consisting of Two Compulsory Class Tests
Approximately 40% to 50% of syllabus content must be covered in First test and remaining 40% to
50% of syllabus contents must be covered in second test.
End Semester Examination: Some guidelines for setting the question papers are as:
Weightage of each module in end semester examination is
expected to be/will be proportional to num ber of respective lecture
hours mentioned in the syllabus.
Question paper will comprise of total six questions , each
carrying 20 marks.
Q.1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of
the syllabus .
Remaining question will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2
has part (a) from module 3 then part (b) will be from any other
module. (Randomly selected from all the modules.)
Total four questions need to be solved.
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 109
Course Code Course
Name Theory Practical Tutorial Theory TW/
Practical Tutorial Total
ITDLO 5012 Image
Processing
04 -- -- 04 -- -- 04
Subject
Code Subject
Name Examination Scheme
Theory Marks
Term
Work Oral & Practical
Total Internal assessment End
Sem.
Exam Test1 Test2 Avg. of
two Tests
ITDLO 5012 Image
Processing
20 20 20 80 -- --
100
Course Objectives: The course will help the students to get familiar with
1. Fundamental concepts of a digital image processing system.
2. Concepts of image enhancement techniques.
3. Various Image Transforms.
4. Compression techniques and Morphological concepts
5. Various segmentation techniques, and object descriptors.
6. Color models and various applications of image processing.
Course Outcomes: Students should be able to:
1. Rememb er the fundamental concepts of image processing.
2. Explain different I mage enhancement techniques
3. Understand and review image transforms
4. Analyze the basic algorithms used for image processing & image compression with morphological
image processi ng.
5. Contrast Image Segmentation and Representation
6. Design & Synthesize Color image processing and its real world applications.
Prerequisite: Mathematics and Statistics.
Detail Syllabus:
Sr.
No
. Module Detailed Content Hours CO
Mapping
0 Prerequisite As images are two dimensional signals,
the single dimensional Digital Signal
Processing fundamentals. 02
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 110
I Introduction to
digital image
processing system Fundamental Steps in Digital Image
Processing, Components of an Image
Processing System, Image Sensing and
Acquisition, Image Sampling and
Quantization, Basic Relationships
between Pixels. 07 CO 1
II Image enhancement Intensity Transformations and Spatial
Filtering, Histogram processing, Filtering
in Frequency Domain 09 CO 2
III Image transforms Discrete Fourier transform - Properties of
two dimensional DFT, DCT, DST, Walsh,
Hadamard, Haar Transform and their
properties. 07 CO 3
IV Image compression
and morphological
image processing Fundamentals of compression, Basic
compression Methods, Huffman Coding,
Arithmetic Coding , LZW Coding , Run -
Length Coding , Symbol -Based Coding,
Bit-Plane Coding, Block Transform
Coding , Predictive Coding.
Image morphology, Opening & Closing,
Hit or Miss Transform, Basic
Morphological Alg orithms 11 CO 4
V Image segmentation
and representation The detection of discontinuities - Point,
Line and Edge detections , Hough
Transform, Thresholding Region based
segmentation
Chain codes, Polygon approximation,
Shape numbers, Fourier descriptors,
statistical Moments. 08 CO 5
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 111
VI Color Image
Processing and
Applications Color Fundamentals and Models,
Pseudocolor Image Processing,
Smoothing and Sharpening, Image
Segmentation Based on Color. Biometric
Authentication, Digital watermarking,
Content Base Image Retrieval. Vector
quantization 08 CO 6
Text Books:
1. Rafael C. Gonzalez and Richard E.woods, “Digital Image Processing”, Addition - Wesley
Publishing Company, New Delhi, Third Edition, 2007.
2. William K. Pratt, “Digital Image Processing”, John Wiley, NJ, Fourth Edition 2007.
Reference Books:
1. Sid Ahmed M.A., “Image Processing Theory, Algorithm and Architectures”, McGraw -Hill,
1995.
2. Kenneth R Castleman, “Digital Image Processing”, Prentice Hall, New Delhi, 1996.
3. Anil.K.Jain, “Fundamentals of Digital Image Processing”, Prentice Hall of India Pvt Ltd.,
New Delhi, 1995.
4. S. Sridhar, “ Digital Image Processing”, second Edition, Oxford university press, New Delhi,
2016.
5. S. Jayaraman, S. Esakkirajan, T. Veerakumar “ Digital Image Processing”, McGra w-Hill,
2016
Assessment:
Internal Assessment for 20 marks:
Consisting of Two Compulsory Class Tests
Approximately 40% to 50% of syllabus content must be covered in First test and remaining 40% to
50% of syllabus contents must be covered in second test.
End Semester Examination: Some guidelines for setting the question papers are as:
Weightage of each module in end semester examination is
expected to be/will be proportional to number of respective lecture
hours mentioned in the syllabus.
Question paper w ill comprise of total six questions , each
carrying 20 marks.
Q.1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of
the syllabus .
Remaining question will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2
has part (a) from module 3 then part (b) will be from any other
module. (Randomly selected from all the modules.)
Total four questions need to be solved.
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 112
Course
Code Course Name Theory Practical Tutorial Theory TW/
Practical Tutorial Total
ITDLO 5013 E-Commerce &
E-Business
04 -- -- 04 -- -- 04
Course Code Course
Name Examination Scheme
Theory Marks
Term
Work Oral & Practical
Total Internal assessment End
Sem.
Exam Test1 Test2 Avg. of
two Tests
ITDLO 5013
E-Commerce
20 20 20 80 -- -- 100
Course Objectives: Students will try to :
1. Understand concept of Ecommerce and its types.
2. Be familiarized with technologies for Ecommerce.
3. Understand different types of Online Payment systems .
4. Understand Selling and marketing on web.
5. Be familiarized with concept of E -business and E -business Models.
6. Understand various E -business Strategies.
Course Outcomes: Students will be able to:
1. Define and differentiate various types of E -commerce.
2. Describe Hardware and Software Technologies for E -commerce.
3. Explain payment systems for E -commerce .
4. Describe the process of Selling and Marketing on web.
5. Define and Describe E -business and its Models.
6. Discuss various E -business Strategies.
Prerequisite: Internet Technologies, Internet Security, Middleware technologies, web services
Detailed syllabus:
Sr.
No. Module Detailed Content Hours CO
Mapping
0 Prerequisite Internet Technologies, Internet Security,
Middleware technologies, web services 02
I
Introduction to E E –commerce :Definition of e commerce ,
different types of E -commerce ,Examples 04 CO1
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 113
–commerce of E- commerce, E -commerce trade cycle ,
advantages and disadvantages of E -
commerce , Traditional commerce Vs E -
commerce
II Overview of
Hardware and
Software
Technologies for
Ecommerce Overview of Client side programming
( Dream weaver , Front page )
Hardware and , Server side Programming
(PHP) , Database Software connectivity ,
session tracking, middleware technologies
for ecommerce perspective and security
aspects with respect to e commerce,
integration of web services 08
CO2
III Payment System
for Ecommerce Traditional payment model ,
Characteristics of payment, Online
Payment Basics, Payment Cards,
Electronic Cash, Electronic Wallets,
Stored -Value Cards, SET Protocol for
credit card payment, Internet Technologies
and the Banking Industry 10 CO3
IV Selling and
Marketing on Web
Selling on the Web: Revenue Models and
Building a Web Presence: Revenue
Models, Revenue Models in Transition,
Revenue Strategy Issues, Creating an
Effective Web Presence, Web Site
Usability, Connecting with Customers
Marketing on the Web: Web Marketing
Strategies, Communicating with Different
Market Segments, Beyond M arket
Segmentation: Customer Behavior and
Relationship Intensity, Advertising on the
Web, E -Mail Marketing, Technology -
Enabled Customer Relationship
Management, Creating and Maintaining
Brands on the Web
Online Auctions, Virtual Communities,
and Web Portals 10 CO4
V E business : -
Introduction to e
business
and Developing
E-business models
Definition of e - business , Characteristics ,
elements of e business , e business roles ,
Impact of e business , challenges of e
business , difference between e business
and e commerce , E -business structure,
Evolution of E –business and stages , E –
business models , Characteristics of
Internet based software and e business
solutions 10 CO5
VI E business
strategies
Strategic planning process, SCM , CRM ,
ERP , procurement 08 CO6
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 114
Text Books:
1 E -Commerce Fundamentals and application (Henry Chan) Wiley publication
2. Electronics Commerce (Gary Schneider) Thomson Course technology
3.E –Business , Parag Kulkarni , Sunita Jahirabadkar, Pradip Chande , Oxford Higher Education ,
Oxford University Press
4. E –business and E –commerce Management , Dave Chaffey , Pearson , 3rd edition
5. E commerce by Laudon
References:
1. E-Commerce Strategies, Technology and applications (David Whitley) Tata McGrawHill
2. Introduction to E -commerce Elias Awad
Assessment:
Internal Assessment for 20 marks:
Consisting of Two Compulsory Class Tests
Approximately 40% to 50% of syllabus content must be covered in First test and remaining 40% to
50% of syllabus contents must be covered in second test.
End Semester Examination: Some guidelines for setting the question papers are as:
Weightage of each module in end semester examination is
expected to be/will be proportional to number of respective lecture
hours mentioned in the syllabus.
Question paper will comprise of total six questions , each
carrying 20 marks.
Q.1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of
the syllabus .
Rem aining question will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2
has part (a) from module 3 then part (b) will be from any other
module. (Randomly selected from all the modules.)
Total four questions need to be solved.
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 115
Course Code Course
Name Theory Practical Tutorial Theory TW/
Practical Tutorial Total
ITDLO 5014 IT Enabled
Services 04 -- -- 04 -- -- 04
Course
Code Course
Name Examination Scheme
Theory Marks
Term
Work Oral & Practical
Total Internal assessment End
Sem.
Exam Test1 Test2 Avg. of
two Tests
ITDLO 5014 IT
Enabled
Services 20 20 20 80 -- -- 100
Course Objectives: Students will try:
1. To understand importance of IT enabled services and challenges for the same.
2. To understand strategic IT planning for industries.
3. To develop enterprise IT architecture for Information technology.
4. To encourage the use of Information Technology so as to enable students to improve their
skills, knowledge and job prospects and enable them to obtain employment in sunrise
industries.
5. To develop the ability to integrate various resources for optimization in the industry as well as
for strategic utilization of IT enabled services and functions.
6. To develop competence in global sourcing: strategy and management to gain a perspective on
the gl obal services sourcing landscape: past, present, and future.
Course Outcomes: Students will be able to:
1. Describe the importance of IT enabled services and challenges.
2. Identify strategic IT planning for software development.
3. Recognize enterprise IT archit ecture for Information technology .
4. Use of Information Technology so as to enable them for job in sunrise industries.
5. Illustrate various IT web services for betterment of knowledge.
6. Use their skills to find out various current IT trends in ITES.
Prerequi site: Internet Programming.
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 116
Detailed syllabus:
Sr.
No. Module Detailed Content Hours CO
Mapping
0 Prerequisite Information Technology and
Project Management, Web
Engineering and Technology. 02
I Business strategy:
challenges and
opportunities for
IT
Business Strategy: Challenges and
Opportunities in the Globalized,
Interconnected, Convergent World,
Establish Principles before Practice,
IT Strategy, Application Strategy,
Technology Strategy for IT, IT
Management Strategy, Developing
IT Strategy fo r Competitive
Advantage, Stages of IT Strategy
Development and Implementation,
Challenges of IT and Business
Strategy Alignment, Inhibitors of
Business and IT Strategy
Alignment, Three -D Framework for
Business and IT Strategy
Alignment.
09 CO1
II Strategic IT
planning
Business Implications for IT
Strategic and Planning, Strategic IT
Planning Motivations, SITP
Process:
Prevalent Planning Approaches,
Difficulties in Developing and
Executing SITP, Best Practices for
Achieving Good SITP, SITP
Approac hes-Prevalent Researches.
09 CO2
III Enterprise IT
architecture
Defining EITA, Contents of a
Typical Enterprise IT Architecture,
Standard for Enterprise IT
Architecture,
Technology Management strategy
Framework, Prevalent Technology
Reference Architectures
Framework and Standards, Program
Management, Benefits of PMO,
Desired Qualities of a Program
Office Manager, Maturity of PMO,
Implementation of PMO Strategy,
Measuring PMO Performance,
Success Factors for PMO, Project
Scope Management, PMO
Dashboard and Reporting. 08 CO3
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 117
IV IT service
management
strategy
Information Technology
Infrastructure Library (ITIL), ITIL
Overview, ITIL Service Support
Processes,
Incident Management, Problem
Management, Service Delivery,
Service Level Management,
Financial
Management, Capacity
Management, IT Service Continuity
Management (ITSCM), Availability
Management, Imperatives for
Outsourcing, IT Management
Layers, Variants of Outsourcing,
Business
Process Outsourcing, In sourcing.
08 CO4
V IT enabled web
services
Overview of basic features of PHP:
arrays, functions and state
management, working with PHP
forms,
More advanced PHP, OOP’s
concept in PHP, Portable database
supported with different, exception
handling, concepts of UDDI,
WSDL, SO AP.
08 CO5
VI Current trends in
ITES
Current Employment in the IT and
ITES industry: Newly emerging
area and requirement of IT enabled
service sector. Industry Oriented
Human Resource Requirement:
Outlook of the IT and ITES
Industry.
Barriers to Trade in ITES Role of
International Bodies (WTO &
UNCTAD) in facilitating Trade in
ITEST/ITES, experiences and Case
studies of ITES -call centers, ERP,
google.
08 CO6
Text Books:
1. Sanjiva Shankar Dubey, “ IT strategy and Management”, PHI.
2. K. Venkatesh, “ Marketing of Information Technology”,TMH.
3. Steve Suehring, Timconverse, Joyoe Park , “PHP 6 and MySQL Bible”, Wiley.
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 118
References:
1. Shiro Uesugi, “IT Enabled Services”, Springer; 2013 edition, 2013.
2. Sanjiva Shankar Dubey, “IT Services Business Management: Concepts, Processes and
Practices”, PHI, 2012.
3. Nikhil Treebhoohu, “Promoting IT Enabled Services”, Addison -Wesley, 2013.
Assessment:
Internal Assessment for 20 marks:
Consisting of Two Com pulsory Class Tests
Approximately 40% to 50% of syllabus content must be covered in First test and remaining 40% to
50% of syllabus contents must be covered in second test.
End Semester Examination: Some guidelines for setting the question papers are as:
Weightage of each module in end semester examination is
expected to be/will be proportional to number of respective lecture
hours mentioned in the syllabus.
Question paper will comprise of total six questions , each
carrying 20 marks.
Q.1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of
the syllabus .
Remaining question will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2
has part (a) from module 3 then part (b) will be from any other
module. (Randomly selected from all the modules.)
Total four quest ions need to be solved.
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 119
Course Code Course Name Theory
Practical
Tutorial
Theory
TW/Practical Tutorial Total
ITDLO 5015
Computer
Graphics &
Virtual
Reality
04
--
---
04
--
--
04
Course
Code
Course Name Examination Scheme
Theory Marks
Oral & Practical
Internal assessment End Term
Total
Test1
Test2 Avg. of Sem. Work
two Tests Exam
ITDLO 50
15
Computer
Graphics &
Virtual Reality
20
20
20
80
----
--
100
Course Objectives: Students will try:
1. To introduce the use of the components of a graphics system and become familiar
with building approach of graphics system components and algorithms related with
them.
2. To learn the basic principles of 3 -dimensional computer graphics.
3. Provide an understanding of how to scan convert the basic geometrical primitives,
how to transform the shapes to fit them as per the picture definition.
4. Provide an understanding of mapping from a world coordinates to device
coordinates, clipping, and projections.
5. To be able to discuss the application of computer graphics concepts in the
development of computer games, information visualization, and business
applications.
6. To comprehend and analyze the fundamentals of animation, virtual reality,
underlying technologies, principles, and applications.
Course Outcomes: Students will be able to:
1. To list the basic concepts used in computer graphics.
2. To implement various algorithms to scan, convert the basic geometrical primitives,
transformations, Area filling, clipping.
3. To describe the importance of viewing and projections.
4. To define the fundamentals of animation, virtual reality and its related te chnologies.
5. To understand a typical graphics pipeline
6. To design an application with the principles of virtual reality
Prerequisite: Basic Mathematics
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 120
Detailed syllabus:
Sr. Module Detailed Content Hours CO Mapping
No.
0 Prerequisite Knowledge of Mathematics
2
I. Introduction to
Computer graphics
and Output primitives
Introduction : Display Devices, Bitmap and
Vector based graphics, Overview of Coordinate
System.
Scan Conversion of: point, line using Digital
differential analyzer & Bresenham’s
algorithm, circle using midpoint approach,
Curve Generation : Bezier and B -Spline
curves.
Introduction to fractals : generation procedure,
classification, dimension and Koch Curve. 7 CO1
II.
Area Filling,
Transformations (2D
and 3D)
Area filling : Inside/Outside Test, Scan line
Polygon Fill Algorithm, Boundary Fill and
Flood Fill algorithm.
Basic Geometrical 2D Transformations:
Translation, Rotation, Scaling, Reflection,
Shear, their homogeneous Matrix
representation and Composite transformation.
Three Dimensional transformations:
Translation, Scaling, Rotations, Composite.
8
CO1
CO2
III. Viewing (2D and 3D)
Projection and Clipping
Viewing : Introduction, Viewing Pipeline, View
Coordinate reference frame, Window to
viewport transformation.
Three -Dimensional Viewing: 3D Pipeline,
Viewing transformation, Projections : Parallel
(Oblique and orthographic), Perspective (one
Point)
Clipping : Point clipping, Line
clipping : Cohen Sutherland Algorithm, Liang
Barsky algorithms, Polygon clipping:
Sutherland Hodgeman polygon clipping and
Weiler Atherton. Text Clipping. 10 CO1
CO2
CO3
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 121
IV.
Introduction
To Animation
Animation : Key Frame Animation, Animation
Sequence, Motion Control Methods,
Morphing , Warping - Mesh Warping.
4
CO1
CO2
CO4
CO5
Text Books
1 Donald Hearn and M. Pauline Baker, “Computer Graphics”, Pearson Education.
2 R. K Maurya, “Computer Graphics with Virtual Reality”, Wiley India.
Reference Books
1. Grigore Burdea, Philippe Coiffet, “Virtual Reality Technology”, Wiley.
2. Steven Harrington, “Computer Graphics”, McGraw Hill.
3. Rogers, “Procedural Elements of Computer G raphics”, Tata McGraw Hill.
4. Vince, “Virtual Reality Systems”, Pearson Education.
5. F.S. Hill, Stephen M. Kelley , “Computer Graphics using Open GL” Prentice Hall
6. Samyak Datta , “Learning OpenCV 3 Application Development”, Packt
V. Introduction
to
Virtual Reality
Virtual Reality: Basic Concepts, Overview and
perspective on virtual reality, Human sensation
and perception.
Classical Components of VR System, Types of
VR Systems, Three -Dimensional Position
Trackers, Navigation and Manipulation
Interfaces, Gesture Interfaces, Input Devices,
Graphical Display, Sound displays, and Haptic
Feedback. Graphical Rendering Pipeline, Haptic
Rendering Pipeline, Open GL rendering pipeline.
Applications of Virtual Reality.
9
CO1
CO2
CO4
CO6
VI.
VR Modeling and
Programming
Geometric Modeling : Virtual Object Shape,
Object Visual Appearance.
Kinematics Modeling : Object Position,
Transformation Invariants, Object Hierarchies,
Physical Modeling : Collision Detection,
Surface Deformation, Force Computation.
Behavior Modeling . Programming through
VRML/X3D : Defining and Using Node s and
Shapes, VRML Browsers,
Java 3D, OpenCV for augmented reality
12
CO1
CO2
CO4
CO6
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 122
Assessment:
Internal Assessment for 20 marks:
Consisting of Two Compulsory Class Tests
Approximately 40% to 50% of syllabus content must be covered in First test and remaining 40% to
50% of syllabus contents must be covered in second test.
End Semester Examination: Some guidelines for setting the question papers are as:
Weightage of each module in end semester examination is
expected to be/will be proportional to number of respective lecture
hours mentioned in the syllabus.
Question paper will comprise of total six q uestions , each
carrying 20 marks.
Q.1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of
the syllabus .
Remaining question will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2
has part (a) from module 3 then part (b) will be from any other
module. (Randomly selected from all the modules.)
Total four questions need to be solved.
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 123
University of Mumbai
Program Structure B.E. Information Technology, (Rev. 2016)
T. E. Information Technology ( Semester -VI)
Course
Code Course
Name Teaching Scheme
(Contact Hours) Credits Assigned
Theory Pract Tut Theory TW/
Pract Tut Total
ITC601 Software Engineering with
Project Management 4 - - 4 - - 4
ITC602 Data Mining and Business
Intelligence 4 - - 4 - - 4
ITC603 Cloud Computing &
Services 4 - - 4 - - 4
ITC604 Wireless Networks 4 - - 4 - - 4
ITDLO -II Department Level
Optional Course -II 4 - - 4 - - 4
ITL601 Software Design Lab - 2 - - 1 - 1
ITL602 Business Intelligence Lab - 2 - - 1 - 1
ITL603 Cloud Service Design Lab - 2 - - 1 - 1
ITL604 Sensor Network Lab - 2 - - 1 - 1
ITM605 Mini -project - 4 - - 2 - 2
Total 20 12 - 20 6 - 26
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 124
Course
Code Course
Name Examination Scheme
Theory
TW
Oral &
Pract Total Internal Assessment End
Sem.
Exam Exam
Duration
( in Hrs) Oral
Test 1 Test 2 Avg.
ITC601 Software Engineering with
Project Management 20 20 20 80 3 - - - 100
ITC602 Data Mining and Business
Intelligence 20 20 20 80 3 - - - 100
ITC603 Cloud Computing &
Services 20 20 20 80 3 - - - 100
ITC604 Wireless Networks 20 20 20 80 3 - - - 100
ITDLO -II Department Level
Optional Course -II 20 20 20 80 3 - - - 100
ITL601 Software Design Lab - - - - - 25 25 -- 50
ITL602 Business Intelligence Lab - - - - - 25 25 -- 50
ITL603 Cloud Service Design Lab - - - - - 25 25 -- 50
ITL604 Sensor Network Lab - - - - - 25 25 -- 50
ITM605 Mini -Project - - - - - 25 25
-- 50
Total 100 100 100 400 - 125 125 -- 750
# Department Level Optional Course (DLO)
Every student is required to take one Department Elective Course for Semester VI. Different sets of
courses will run in both the semesters. Students can take these courses from the list of department
electiv es, which are closely allied to their disciplines.
(DLO -I subjects will have no Labs only Theory)
Subject Code Department Level Optional Course
(DLO)
Semester VI
ITDLO6 021 Advance Internet Programming
ITDLO 6022 Software Architecture
ITDLO 6023 Digital Forensics
ITDLO 6024 Multimedia Systems
ITDLO 6025 Green IT
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 125
Course Code Course Name Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Oral &
Practical Tutorial Total
ITC601
Software
Engineering with
Project
Management 04 -- -- 04 -- -- 04
Course Code Course Name Examination Scheme
Theory Marks
Term
Work
Oral & Practical
Total Internal assessment End
Sem.
Exam Test1 Test2 Avg. of
two Tests
ITC601
Software
Engineering
with Project
Management 20 20 20 80 -- -- 100
Course Objectives: Students will try:
1. To understand the nature of software development and software life cycle process models,
agile software development, SCRUM and other agile practices.
2. To Explain methods of capturing, specifying, visualizing and analyzing software
requirements.
3. To understand concepts and principles of software design and user -centric approach and
principles of effective user interfaces.
4. To know basics of testing and unde rstanding concept of software quality assurance and
software configuration management process.
5. To understand need of project management and project management life cycle.
6. To understand project scheduling concept and risk management associated to various type
of projects.
Course Outcomes: Students will be able to:
1. Define various software application domains and remember different process model used in
software development.
2. Explain needs for software specifications also they can classify different types of software
requirements and their gathering techniques.
3. Convert the requirements model into the design model and demonstrate use of software and
user-interface design principles.
4. Distinguish among SCM and SQA and can classify different testing strategies and tactics
and compare them.
5. Justify role of SDLC in Software Project Development and they can evaluate importance
of Software Engineering in PLC.
6. Generate project schedule and can construct, design a nd develop network diagram for
different type of Projects. They can also organize different activities of project as per Risk
impact factor.
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 126
Prerequisite: Programming and Networking .
Detailed syllabus:
Sr.
No. Module Detailed Content Hours CO
Mapping
0 Prerequisite Nature of Software, Software
Definition, Software
Characteristics, Software
Application Domains 02
I The Software
Process Generic view of Process,
Prescriptive Models: Waterfall
Model, Incremental -RAD Model,
Evolutionary Process Model -
Prototyping, Spiral and Concurrent
Development Model, Specialized
Models: Component based, Aspect
Oriented Development, Agile
Methodology, Scrum and Extreme
Programming 07 CO1
II Requirements
Engineering and
Cost Estimation Requirement, Types of
Requirements, Requirement
gathering, Requirement
Engineering Task, Identifying
Stakeholders, Multiple viewpoints,
SRS (Software Requirement
Specification) Project Estimation,
LOC based, FP based and Use case
based estimation. 07 CO1
CO2
III Analysis and
Design
Engineering Introduction of Analysis elements,
Scenario based, Flow based,
behavior and class based Design
Concepts and Principles,
Architecture Design, Component
Level Design, System Level
Design, User Interface Design . 09 CO1
CO2
CO3
IV Quality &
Configuration
Management Need for Testing, Testing Tactics,
Testing strategies, McCall’s
Quality Factor, Software
Configuration Management, SCM
Process 07 CO4
V IT Project
Management Introduction, 4 P’s, W5HH
Principle, Need for Project
Management, Project Life cycle
and ITPM, Project Feasibility, RFP,
PMBOK Knowledge areas,
Business Case, Project Planning,
Project Charter and Project Scope. 10 CO5
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 127
VI Project Scheduling
and Risk
Management WBS, Developing the Project
Schedule, Network Diagrams
(AON, AOA), CPM and PERT,
Gantt Chart, Risk Identification,
Risk Projection and RMMM 10 CO1
CO2
CO3
CO4
CO6
Text Books:
1. Roger S Pressman “Software Engineering : A Practitioner’s Approach” 7th Edition Mcgraw -Hill
ISBN:0073375977
2. Jack T. Marchewka, “Information Technology Project Management” 4th Edition ,Wiley India
References:
1. “Software Engineering : A Precise Approach” Pankaj Jalote , Wiley India
2. Ian Sommerville “ Software Engineering” 9th edition Pearson Education SBN -13: 978 -0- 13-
703515 -1, ISBN -10: 0 -13-703515 -2
3. John M. Nicholas, Project Management for Business and Technology, 3rd edition, Pearson
Education.
4. Software Project management by Bob Hughes, Mike Cotterell , Rajib Mall
Assessment:
Internal Assessment for 20 marks:
Consisting of Two Compulsor y Class Tests
Approximately 40% to 50% of syllabus content must be covered in First test and remaining 40% to
50% of syllabus contents must be covered in second test.
End Semester Examination: Some guidelines for setting the question papers are as:
Weigh tage of each module in end semester examination is
expected to be/will be proportional to number of respective lecture
hours mentioned in the syllabus.
Question paper will comprise of total six questions , each
carrying 20 marks.
Q.1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of
the syllabus .
Remaining question will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2
has part (a) from module 3 then part (b) will be from any other
module. (Randomly selected from all the modules.)
Total four questions need to be solved.
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 128
Course Code Course
Name Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Oral &
Practical Tutorial Total
ITC602 Data Mining
and
Business
Intelligence 04 -- 04 -- -- 04
Course
Code Course
Name Examination Scheme
Theory Marks
Term
Work Oral & Practical
Total Internal assessment End
Sem.
Exam Test1 Test2 Avg. of
two Tests
ITC602 Data Mining
and
Business
Intelligence 20 20 20 80 -- -- 100
Course Objectives: Students will try:
1. To introduce the concept of data Mining as an important tool for enterprise data management
and as a cutting edge technology for building competitive advantage.
2. To enable students to effectively identify sources of data and process it for data mining
3. To m ake students well versed in all data mining algorithms, methods of evaluation.
4. To impart knowledge of tools used for data mining
5. To provide knowledge on how to gather and analyze large sets of data to gain useful business
understanding.
6. To impart skills that can enable students to approach business problems analytically by
identifying opportunities to derive business value from data.
Course Outcomes: S tudent will be able to:
1. Demonstrate an understanding of the importance of data mining and the principles of business
intelligence
2. Organize and Prepare the data needed for data mining using pre preprocessing techniques
3. Perform exploratory analysis of the data to be used for mining.
4. Implement the appropriate data mining methods like classification, clustering or Frequent Pattern
mining on large data sets.
5. Define and apply metrics to measure the performance of various data mining algorithms.
6. Apply BI to solve practical problems : Analyze the problem domain, use the data collected in
enterprise apply the appropriate data mining technique, interpret and visualize the results and
provide decision support.
Prerequisite: Database Management System, Advanced Data Management Technology.
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 129
Detailed syllabus:
Sr.
No. Module Detailed Content Hours CO
Mapping
0 Prerequisites Knowledge of databases, and Date
warehousing, OLAP 02 --
I Introduction to
Data Mining What is Data Mining; Kind of
patterns to be mined; Technologies
used; Major issues in Data Mining 03 CO1
II Data Exploration
and Data
Preprocessing Types of Attributes; Statistical
Description of Data; Data
Visualization; Measuring similarity
and dissimilarity.
Why Preprocessing? Data
Cleaning; Data Integration; Data
Reduction: Attribute subset
selection, Histograms, Clustering
and Sampl ing; Data Transformation
& Data Discretization:
Normalization, Binning, Histogram
Analysis and Concept hierarchy
generation. 09 CO2
CO3
III Classification Basic Concepts; Classification
methods: 1. Decision Tree
Induction: Attribute Selection
Measures, Tree pruning. 2.
Bayesian Classification: Naïve
Bayes ‟ Classifier. Prediction:
Structure of regression models;
Simple linear regression, Multiple
linear regression. Accuracy and
Error measures, Precision, Recall,
Holdout, Random Sampling, Cross
Validation. 09 CO4
CO5
IV Clustering Cluster Analysis: Basic Concepts;
Partitioning Methods: K -Means, K -
Mediods; Hierarchical Methods:
Agglomerative, Divisive, BIRCH;
Density -Based Methods: DBSCAN
What are outliers? Types,
Challenges; Outlier Detection
Methods: Supervised, Semi
Supervised, Unsupervised,
Proximity based, Clustering Based. 10 CO4
CO5
V Frequent Pattern Market Basket Analysis, Frequent
Itemsets, Closed Itemsets, and 10 CO4
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 130
Mining Association Rules; Frequent Pattern
Mining, Efficient and Scalable
Frequent Itemset Mining Methods,
The Apriori Algorithm for finding
Frequent Itemsets Using Candidate
Generation, Generating Association
Rules from Frequent Itemsets,
Improving the Efficiency of
Apriori, A pattern growth approach
for mining Frequent Itemsets;
Mining Frequent itemsets using
vertical data formats; Introduction
to Mining Multilevel Association
Rules and Multidimensional
Association Rules; From
Association Mining to Correlation
Analysis, lift, ; Introduction to
Constraint -Based Association
Mining. CO5
VI Business
Intelligence What is BI? Business intelligence
architectures; Definition of decision
support system; Development of a
business intelligence system using
Data Mining for business
Applications like Fraud Detection,
Clickstream Mining, Market
Segmentation, retail industry,
telecommunications industry,
banking & finance CRM etc. 09 CO6
Text Books:
1. Han, Kamber, "Data Mining Concepts and Techniques", Morgan Kaufmann 3nd Edition.
2. P. N. Tan, M. Steinbach, Vipin Kumar, “Introduction to Data Mining”, Pearson Education.
3. Business Intelligence: Data Mining and Optimization for Decision Making by Carlo Vercellis
,Wiley India Publications.
4. G. Shmueli, N.R. Patel, P.C. Bruce, “Data Mining for Business Intelligence: Concepts,
Techniques, and Applications in Microsoft Office Excel with XLMiner”, 2nd Edition, Wiley India.
References:
1. Michael Berry and Gordon Linoff “Data Mining Techniques”, 2nd Edition Wiley Publications.
2. Michael Berry and Go rdon Linoff “Mastering Data Mining - Art & science of CRM”, Wiley
Student Edition.
3. Vikram Pudi & Radha Krishna, “Data Mining”, Oxford Higher Education.
Assessment:
Internal Assessment for 20 marks:
Consisting of Two Compulsory Class Tests
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 131
Approximately 40 % to 50% of syllabus content must be covered in First test and remaining 40% to
50% of syllabus contents must be covered in second test.
End Semester Examination: Some guidelines for setting the question papers are as:
Weightage of each module in end semester examination is
expected to be/will be proportional to number of respective lecture
hours mentioned in the syllabus.
Question paper will comprise of total six questions , each
carrying 20 marks.
Q.1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum conten ts of
the syllabus .
Remaining question will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2
has part (a) from module 3 then part (b) will be from any other
module. (Randomly selected from all the modules.)
Total four questions need to be solved.
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 132
Course Code Course
Name Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Oral &
Practical Tutorial Total
ITC603
Cloud
Computing
& Services 04 -- -- 04 -- -- 04
Course
Code Course Name Examination Scheme
Theory Marks
Term
Work Oral &
Practical
Total Internal assessment End
Sem.
Exam Test1 Test2 Avg. of
two Tests
ITC603
Cloud
Computing
& Services 20 20 20 80 -- -- 100
Course Objectives: Students will try to learn:
1. Basics of cloud computing.
2. Key concepts of virtualization.
3. Different Cloud Computing services
4. Cloud Implementation, Programming and Mobile cloud computing
5. Key components of Amazon Web Services
6. Cloud Backup and solutions
Course Outcomes: Students should be able to:
1. Define Cloud Computing and memori ze the different Cloud service and deployment models
2. Describe importance of virtualization along with their technologies.
3. Use and Examine different cloud computing services
4. Analyze the components of open stack & Google Cloud platform and understand Mobil e Cloud
Computing
5. Describe the key components of Amazon web Service
6. Design & develop backup strategies for cloud data based on features.
Prerequisite Subjects: Computer Network, Operating System
Detailed syllabus:
Sr.
No. Module Detailed Content Hours CO
Mapping
0 Prerequisites OSI Layers, Basics of OS. 02 --
I Introduction Defining Cloud Computing, Cloud and other
similar configurations, Components of Cloud 06 CO1
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 133
Computing, Cloud types: NIST and Cloud Cube
Models, Cloud Deployment Models and Service
Models, Cloud computing architecture,
Advantages and Disadvantages of Cloud
Computing.
II Virtualization Virtualization: Characteristics of virtualized
environment, Understanding the importance of
Hypervisors, Type I & Type II Hypervisors,
Taxono my of virtualization, Implementation
Levels of Virtualization, Virtualization of CPU,
Memory and I/O Devices , Virtualization and
Cloud Computing, Pros and Cons of
virtualization, Technology Examples: KVM, Xen,
Vmware and HyperV 10 CO2
III Cloud Computing
Services Exploring Cloud Computing Services: SPI
Model: Software as a service, Platform as a
service, and Infrastructure as a service.
Anything as a service or Everything as a service
(XaaS): Security as a Service, Identity
management as a Servi ce, Database as a Service,
Storage as a Service, Collaboration as a Service,
Compliance as a Service, Monitoring as a
Service, Communication as a Service, Network as
a Service, Disaster recovery as a service,
Analytics as a Service, Backup as a Service. 09 CO1
CO2
CO3
IV Cloud
Implementation,
Programming
and Mobile Cloud
Computing Open Stack Cloud Architecture: Feature of Open
stack, Components of Open stack, mode of
operations.
Programming support for Google apps engine -
GFS, Bigtables, Chubby, Google API s.
Mobile Cloud Computing: Definition,
architecture, benefits and challenges of mobile 09 CO1
CO2
CO3
CO4
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 134
cloud computing
V
Exploring the
Components of
Amazon Web
Services AWS cloud computing Platform,
a) Elastic Compute Cloud(EC2): Compute
Basics, Instance types, Life cycle of instances.
b) Simple Storage Service (S3): Basics and
Operations, Features, Amazon Glacier, Glacier vs
S3.
c) Elastic Block Storage (EBS):Basics and Types
of EBS Volumes
d)Amazon Virtual Private Cloud (Amazon VPC):
Subnets, Ro ute tables, Elastic IP Addresses (EIP),
Elastic Network Interfaces (ENIs) & Security
groups & ACL.
e) Exploring Elastic Load Balancing (ELB):
Basics, Types of load balancers, Configuring
Elastic Load Balancing, Basics of Cloud Watch
& Auto Scaling. 11
CO1
CO2
CO3
CO4
CO5
VI Cloud Backup &
Solutions Cloud Backup Solutions and their features, Cloud
data management interface (CDMI), Cloud
Storage gateways (CSG), Comparison between
different cloud platforms: Amazon web services
& Open stack (Based on Type of deployment,
Services supported and their components). 05 CO1
CO2
CO3
CO4
CO5
CO6
Text Books:
1. Barrie Sosinsky ,”Cloud Computing Bible”,Wiley Publication.
2. Kailash Jayaswal, Jagannath Kallalurchi, Donald J. Houde, Dr. Deven Shah, ”Cloud Computing
Black Book”, Dreamtech Press.
3. Joe Baron et.al ,”AWS certified solution Architect”, Sybex publication.
4. Mastering Cloud Computing, Rajkumar Buyya, MGH publication
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 135
Reference Books:
1. Thomas Erl,Robert Cope,Amin naserpour,”Cloud Computing Design Patterns”,Pearson
Publication.
2. Judith Hurwitz ,”Cloud Computing for Dummies” , Wiley Publication.
Assessment:
Internal Assessment for 20 marks:
Consisting of Two Compulsory Class Tests
Approximately 40% to 50% of syllabus content must be covered in First test and remaining 40% to
50% of syllabus contents must be covered in second test.
End Semester Examination: Some guidelines for setting the qu estion papers are as:
Weightage of each module in end semester examination is
expected to be/will be proportional to number of respective lecture
hours mentioned in the syllabus.
Question paper will comprise of total six questions , each
carrying 20 marks.
Q.1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of
the syllabus .
Remaining question will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2
has part (a) from module 3 then part (b) will be from any other
module. (Randomly selected from all the modules.)
Total four questions need to be solved.
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 136
Course Code Course
Name Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Oral &
Practical Tutorial Total
ITC604
Wireless
Network
04 -- -- 04 -- -- 04
Course
Code Course
Name Examination Scheme
Theory Marks
Term
Work Oral & Practical
Total Internal assessment End
Sem.
Exam Test1 Test2 Avg. of
two Tests
ITC604
Wireless
Network
20 20 20 80 -- -- 100
Course Objectives: Students will try to:
1 Understand the fundamentals of wireless networks.
2 Learn and analyze the different wireless technologies.
3 Evaluate Ad -hoc networks and wireless sensor networks.
4 Understand and evaluate emerging wireless technologies and standards
5 Understand design considerations for wireless networks
6 Learn and analyze and evaluate the security threats and related security standards
Course Outcomes: Students will be able to:
1. Explain the basic concepts of wireless network and wireless generations.
2. Demonstrate the different wireless technologi es such as CDMA, GSM, GPRS etc
3. Appraise the importance of Ad -hoc networks such as MANET and VANET and Wireless
Sensor networks
4. Describe and judge the emerging wireless technologies standards such as WLL,
WLAN, WPAN, WMAN.
5. Explain the design consideration s for deploying the wireless network infrastructure.
6. Differentiate and support the security measures, standards. Services and layer wise security
considerations.
Prerequisite: Computer Networks.
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 137
Detailed syllabus:
Sr.
No. Module Detailed Content Hours CO
Mapping
0 Prerequisite Modulation and Demodulation
Techniques, PSTN 02
I Fundamentals
Wireless
Communication Fundamentals of Wireless
Communication, Advantages,
limitations and application, wireless
media, Infrared Modulation
Techniques, DSSS and FHSS,
Frequency Spectrum: Radio and
Infrared; Wireless generations: 1G:
Cellular,2G: Mobile Radio,3G:
UMTS - Security related Encryption
Algorithm,4G 07 CO1
II Evolution of
Wireless
Technologies Multiple Access Technique:
TDMA, FDMA, CSMA, CDMA
Wireless Technologies: GSM,
GPRS, EDGE,CDMA,LTE, UMTS 10 CO1
CO2
III Types of Wireless
Networks Ad-hoc: MANET & VANET,
Application, Advantage and
limitations; Wireless Sensor
Network: Application, advantages
and limitations 09 CO1
CO3
IV Emerging Wireless
Technologies and
standards WLL , WLAN - 802.11 (Wi -Fi),
WPAN - 802.15.1/3/4 (Bluetooth,
Zigbee), WMAN -802.16a (Wi -
max) , Wi -max and LTE /3GPP
comparison, Mi -fi, Ly -fi, 10 CO1
CO2
CO4
V Wireless Network
Design
Considerations Wireless technology, Cisco Unified
Wireless Network, Designing
Wireless Networks with
Lightweight Access Points and
Wireless LAN Controllers 07 CO1
CO2
CO3
CO4
CO5
VI Wireless Network
Security The need, attacks, security serviced,
WEP, Mobile IP, VPN( PPTP,
LLTP, IPSec), Network Layer
Security, Transport Layer Security,
Email Security: PGP, S/ MIME,
Internet Firewalls for Trusted
System 07 CO1
CO2
CO3
CO6
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 138
Text Books:
1. Cellular Communications: A Comprehensive and Pratical Guide, Nishith Tripathi, Jeffery H Reed,
Wiley
2. Wireless Mobile Internet Security, 2nd Edition, Man, Young Rhee, Wiley - IEEE press
3. Designing for Cisco Internetwork Solutions (DESGN), 2nd Edition, CCDA, Diane Teare, cisco
Press.
References:
1. Introduction to Digital mobile communication, 2nd Edition, Yoshihiko Akaiwa
2."Wireless Communications and networks" , William Stallings , Pearson / Prentice Hall
3. Wireless communication and networking, Vijay Garg
Assessment:
Internal Assessment for 20 marks:
Consisting of Two Compulsory Class Tests
Approximately 40% to 50% of syllabus content must be covered in First test and remaining 40% to
50% of syllabus contents must be covered in second test.
End Semester Examination: Some guidelines for setting the question papers are as:
Weightage of each module in end semester examination is
expected to be/will be proportional to number of respective lecture
hours mentioned in the syllabus.
Question paper will comprise of total six questions , each
carrying 20 marks.
Q.1 will be compul sory and should cover maximum contents of
the syllabus .
Remaining question will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2
has part (a) from module 3 then part (b) will be from any other
module. (Randomly selected from all the modules.)
Total four questions need to be solved.
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 139
Course Code Course
Name Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical
/Oral Tutorial Total
ITL601
Software
Design Lab
-- 02 -- -- 1 -- 1
Course
Code Course
Name Examination Scheme
Theory Marks
Term
Work Oral &
Practical Oral Total Internal assessment End
Sem.
Exam Test1 Test2 Avg. of
two Tests
ITL601
Software
Design Lab
-- -- -- -- 25 -- 25 50
Course Objectives: Students will try to:
1 Learn basic concepts of UML.
2 Master the vocabulary, rules, and idioms of the UML and learn how to model it effectively.
3 Understand how to apply the UML to solve a number of common modeling problems.
4 Model the systems, from concept to executable artifact, using object -oriented techniques.
5 Apply the knowledge of Software engineering and project management.
6 Understand the software development process using tool.
Course Outcomes: Students will be able to:
1. Sketch a Modeling with UML.
2. Deploy Structural Modeling.
3. Deploy Behavioral Modeling.
4. Deploy Architectural Modeling.
5. Examine estimation about schedule and cost for project development.
6. Select project development tool.
Prerequisite: Object oriented Concept, Java programming language.
Requirem ent:-
Hardware Software
PC i3 or above.
IBM Rational Rose Modeler,
Dia, StarUML (Any One)
Orange Scrum, Xampp , GitHub
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 140
Guidelines
1. Students should take one case study as a mini project work which is to be conducted by a group of
three students
2. Each group will be associated with a subject Incharge/ mini project mentor. The group should meet
with the concerned faculty during Laboratory hours and the progress of work discussed must be
documented.
3. The students must be able to identify Object oriente d Technologies, Basic expression of Classes,
Attributes and operations.
4. Students must develop a Conceptual Model of the UML for above case study.
5. Students should define Classes, Relationships, Class Diagrams, Advanced Classes and
Relationship, Object Diagr ams for above case study.
6. Students should define Use Cases, Use case Diagrams, Activity Diagrams, Interaction Diagrams,
State Chart Diagrams for above case study.
7. Students should define Components, Deployment, Collaborations, Component Diagrams,
Deployment Diagrams for above case study
8. Students should define SRS, WBS, Network Diagram, Gantt Chart, Cost Estimation Techniques
9. Demonstration it using Scrum Tool
10. Each group may present their work in various project competitions and paper presentations.
11. A detailed report is to be prepared as per guidelines given by the concerned faculty.
Text Books:
1. “The Unified Modeling Language User Guide” by Grady Booch, James Rumbaugh, Ivar Jacobson,
Pearson Publication,ISBN 978 -81-7758 -372-4
2. Jack T. Marchewka, Informati on Technology Project Management, 4th edition, Wiley India, 2009.
References:
1. UML – Tutorial “www.tutorialspoints.com/uml/”
2. “An Introduction to Object -Oriented Analysis: Objects and UML in plain English” by Davis
William Brown, Wiley, Secon d Edition
3. “Fundamentals of Object -Oriented Design in UML”, Meilir Page -Jones, Pearson Education
4. UML in 24 Hours
5. UML Basics — an Introduction to the Unified Modeling Language – IBM
“www.ibm.com › Learn › Rational”
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 141
Term Work:
Term Work shall consist of full Mini Project on above guidelines/syllabus. Also Term work Journal
must include at least 2 assignments.
Term Work Marks: 25 Marks (Total marks) = 15 Marks (Case Study) + 5 Marks (Assignments) + 5
Marks (Attendance)
Oral Exam: An Oral exam will be held based on the Case Study and Presentation.
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 142
Course
Code Course Name Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical
/Oral Tutorial Total
ITL602
Business
Intelligence lab -- 02 -- -- 01 -- 01
Course
Code Course Name Examination Scheme
Theory Marks
Term
Work Oral &
Practical Oral Total Internal assessment
End
Sem.
Exam Test1 Test2 Avg. of
two
Tests
ITL602
Business
Intelligence
Lab -- -- -- -- 25 -- 25 50
Lab Objectives: Students will try:
1. To introduce the concept of data Mining as an important tool for enterprise data management
and as a cutting edge technology for building competitive advantage.
2. To enable students to effectively identify sources of data and process it for data mining
3. To make students well versed in all data mining algorithms, methods, and tools.
4. To learn how to gather and analyze large sets of data to gain useful business understanding.
5. To impart skills that can enable students to approac h business problems analytically by
identifying opportunities to derive business value from data.
6. To identify and compare the performance of business.
Lab Outcomes: Students should be able to:
1. Identify sources of Data for mining and perform data explorati on
2. Organize and prepare the data needed for data mining algorithms in terms of attributes and
class inputs, training, validating, and testing files.
3. Implement the appropriate data mining methods like classification, clustering or association
mining on larg e data sets using open source tools like WEKA
4. Implement various data mining algorithms from scratch using languages like Python/ Java etc.
5. Evaluate and compare performance of some available BI packages
6. Apply BI to solve practical problems : Analyze th e problem domain, use the data collected in
enterprise apply the appropriate data mining technique, interpret and visualize the results and
provide decision support.
Prerequisite: Object oriented Concept, Java programming language.
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 143
Requirement: -
Hardware Software
PC i3 or above.
Open source data mining and BI tools like
WEKA, Rapid Miner, Pentaho.
Detailed syllabus:
Module Detailed Content Hours LO
Mapping
1
&
II 2 tutorials
a) Solving exercises in Data Exploration
b) Solving exercises in Data preprocessing 04 LO 1
LO 2
III Using open source tools Implement
a) Classifiers
b) Clustering Algorithms
c) Association Mining Algorithms 06 LO 3
IV a) Implementation of any one classifier
using languages like JAVA/ python/R
b) Implementation of any one clustering
algorithm using languages like JAVA/
python
c) Implementation of any one association
mining algorithm using languages like
JAVA/ python 06 LO 4
V Detailed case study of any one BI tool
(open source tools like Pentaho can be used)
(paper Assignment) 04 LO 5
VI Business Intelligence Mini Project : Each
group assigned one new case study for this;
A BI report must be prepared outlining the
following steps:
a)Problem definition, Identifying which data
mining task is needed
b) Identify and use a standard data mining
dataset available for the problem. Some links
for data mining datasets are: WEKA site,
UCI Machine Learning Repository, KDD
site, KDD Cup etc.
c) Implement the data mining algorithm of
choice 06 LO 6
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 144
d) Interpret and v isualize the results e)
Provide clearly the BI decision that is to be
taken as a result of mining.
Text Books:
1. Han, Kamber, "Data Mining Concepts and Techniques", Morgan Kaufmann 3nd Edition.
2. G. Shmueli, N.R. Patel, P.C. Bruce, “Data Mining for Business Intelligence: Concepts, Techniques,
and Applications in Microsoft Office Excel with XLMiner”, 1st Edition, Wiley India.
References:
1. P. N. Tan, M. Steinbach, Vipin Kumar, “Introduction t o Data Mining”, Pearson Education.
2. WEKA, RapidMiner Pentaho resources from the Web.
Term Work:
Term Work shall consist of at least 10 to 12 practical’s based on the below list. Also Term work
Journal must include at least 2 assignments.
Term Work Mark s: 25 Marks (Total marks) = 15 Marks (Experiment) + 5 Marks (Assignments) + 5
Marks (Attendance)
Oral Exam: An Oral exam will be held based on the above syllabus.
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 145
Course Code Course
Name Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical
/Oral Tutorial Tota
l
ITL603
Cloud
Service
Design Lab -- 02 -- -- 01 -- 01
Course
Code Course Name Examination Scheme
Theory Marks
Term
Work Oral &
Practical Oral Total Internal assessment End
Sem.
Exam Test1 Test2 Avg. of
two Tests
ITL603
Cloud
Service
Design Lab -- -- -- -- 25 -- 25 50
Lab Objectives: S tudents to get familiar with:
1. Key concepts of virtualization & different types of Hypervisors used in virtualization along
with implementation
2. Concept of On demand Application Delivery like SaaS using Ulteo
3. Open source cloud implementation and administration using Open Stack
4. Various Cloud services provided by Amazon Web Services
5. Programming on Platform as a Service cloud
6. Implementation of Storage as a service using Own Cloud.
Lab Outcom es: Students should be able to:
1. Define & implement Virtualization using different types of Hypervisors
2. Describe steps to perform on demand Application delivery using Ulteo .
3. Examine the installation and configuration of Open stack cloud
4. Analyze and unders tand the functioning of different components involved in Amazon web
services cloud platform.
5. Describe the functioning of Platform as a Service
6. Design & Synthesize Storage as a service using own Cloud
Prerequisite Subjects: Computer Network, Operating System, Java Programming
Hardware & Software Requirements:
Hardware Requirements Software Requirements Other Requirements
a)Hardware Configuration
for server
1.Intel or AMD Multi Core
processors (like i3/i5/i7/Quad
core/Octa core) with Intel
VT-X or AM D-V support a) Software Requirements for
Server
1.Server OS for Physical Sever
like CentOS /Fedora/Ubuntu/
Redhat Server
2.Pre -configured OpenSSH 1. Internet Connection for
each PC with at least 2
MBPS bandwidth and LAN
bandwidth of 1 GBPS.
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 146
2. 6 GB RAM
3. 500 GB Harddisk
4. Gigabit Ethernet (GbE)
network interface card (NIC)
b)Hardware Configuration
for Cloud Client
PC/Laptop/Smart phone/Thin
Client or Any device which
has built -in Wifi, Ethernet or
data connection facility. 3.Xen Server DVD
4.Ulteo DVD
a) Software Requirements for
Clients
1. JDK 1.8 or higher & .NET
Framework 4
2. Netbeans or Eclipse IDEs
3. OpenSSH client or putty
4.Vmware Workstation,
5.Oracle Virtualbox
6. Built -in web browser.
Suggested List of Experiments
Sr.
No. Module Detailed Content
Hours LO
Mapping
I Virtualization 1. Creating and running
virtual machines on Hosted
Hypervisors like KVM Type 1
,Vmware Workstation,Oracle
Virtualbox
2. Creating and running
virtual machines on Bare -Metal
Hypervisors Type 0 like
Xen,Vmware ESXI or HyperV 06 LO1
II On demand
Application
Delivery and
Virtual Desktop
infrastructure Installation and Configuration of
Ulteo to demonstrate on demand
Application delivery over web
browser to explore SaaS
Environment. 04 LO2
III Open source cloud
implementation
and administration To demonstrate installation and
Configuration of Open stack
Private cloud. 04 LO3
IV Amazon Web
Services Like auto scaling, elastic load
balancing, virtual private
computing & Networking. Security
service provided by Amazon web
services. Accessing AWS using 06 LO4
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 147
web services API provided by
Amazon.
V Platform as a
Service To Demonstrate Platform as a
Service using Googleapp
Engine/IBM BlueMix/tSuru 04 LO5
VI Storage as a
Service Explore Storage as a service using
own Cloud for remote file access
using web interfaces. S3 storage
and glacier storage and understand
the storage LC management
provided by AWS. 02 LO6
Text Books:
1. Barrie Sosinsky ,”Cloud Computing Bible”,Wiley Publication.
2. Kailash Jayaswal, Jagannath Kallalurchi, Donald J. Houde, Dr.Deven Shah, ”Cloud Computing
Black Book”, Dreamtech Press.
3. Joe Baron et.al ,”AWS certified solution Architect”, Sybex public ation.
4. Mastering Cloud Computing, Rajkumar Buyya, MGH publication
Reference Books:
1. Learn to Master Cloud Computing by Star EduSolutions
2. Kai Hwang,”Distributed and Cloud Computing”,MK Publication
3. Thomas Erl,Robert Cope,Amin naserpour,”Cloud Computing Design Patterns”,Pearson
Publication.
4. Judith Hurwitz ,”Cloud Computing for Dummies” , Wiley Publication.
Web Resources:
1. http://fosshelp.blogspot.in
2. https:// aws.amazon.com/
3. https://docs.openstack.org/
4. https:// owncloud .org/
5. https://appengine.google.com
Term Work:
Term Work shall consist of at least 10 to 12 practical’s based on the below list. Also Term work
Journal must include at least 2 assignments.
Term Work Marks: 25 Marks (Total marks) = 15 Marks (Experiment) + 5 Marks (Assignments) + 5
Marks (Attendance)
Oral Exam: An Oral exam will be held based on the above syllabus.
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 148
Course Code Course
Name Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical
& Oral Tutorial Tota
l
ITL604 Sensor
Network
Lab -- 02 -- -- 1 -- 1
Course
Code Course Name Examination Scheme
Theory Marks
Term
Work Practic
al &
Oral Oral Total Internal assessment End
Sem.
Exam Test
1 Test2 Avg. of
twoTests
ITL604 Sensor
Network Lab -- -- -- -- 25 -- 25 50
Lab Objectives: Students will try:
1. To learn different types of sensors from Motes families.
2. To design the problem solution as per the requirement analysis done using Motes sensors.
3. To study the basic concepts of programming/sensors/ emulator like cooja etc.
4. To design and implement the mini project intended solution for proje ct based learning.
5. To build and test the mini project successfully.
6. To improve the team building, communication and management skills of the students.
Lab Outcomes: S tudent will be able to:
1. Identify the requirements for the real world problems.
2. Conduct a survey of several available literatures in the preferred field of study.
3. Study and enhance software/ hardware skills.
4. Demonstrate and build the project successfully by hardware/sensor requirements, coding,
emulating and testing.
5. To report and present the f indings of the study conducted in the preferred domain
6. Demonstrate an ability to work in teams and manage the conduct of the research study.
Guidelines
1. The mini project work is to be conducted by a group of three students
2. Each group will be associated w ith a subject Incharge/ mini project mentor. The group should meet
with the concerned faculty during Laboratory hours and the progress of work discussed must be
documented.
3. The students may do survey for different application using different types of senso rs for their mini
project.
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 149
4. Each group will identify the Hardware (Motes from different Motes families) & sensor
configuration and software requirement for their mini project problem statement.
5. Design your own circuit board using multiple sensors etc.
6. Installation, configure and manage your sensors in such away so that they can communicate with
each other.
7. Work with operating system, emulator like contiki cooja and do coding to for input devices on
sensors.
8. Create and interface using Mobile/Web to publish or remotely access the data on Internet.
9. Each group along with the concerned faculty shall identify a potential problem statement, on which
the study and implementation is to be conducted.
10. Each group may p resent their work in various project competitions and paper presentations.
11. A detailed report is to be prepared as per guidelines given by the concerned faculty.
Text Books:
1. Fundamentals of Sensor Network Programming: Applications and Technology, By S. Sit harama
Iyengar, Nandan Parameshwaran, Vir V. Phoha, N. Balakrishnan, Chuka D. Okoye, Wiley
publication.
2. Contiki Cooja User Guide.
References:
1. Internet of Things (A Hands -on-Approach) , Vijay Madisetti , Arshdeep Bahga
2. A comparative review of wireless sens or network mote technologies, IEEE paper 2009
Term Work:
Term Work shall consist of full Mini Project on above guidelines/syllabus. Also Term work Journal
must include at least 2 assignments.
Term Work Marks: 25 Marks (Total marks) = 15 Marks (Mini Project) + 5 Marks (Assignments) + 5
Marks (Attendance)
Oral Exam: An Oral exam will be held based on the Mini Project and Presentation.
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 150
Course Code Course
Name Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical
/ Oral Tutorial Total
ITM605
Mini -Project
-- 04 -- -- 2 -- 2
Course
Code Course Name Examination Scheme
Theory Marks
Term
Work Practic
al &
Oral Oral Total Internal assessment End
Sem.
Exam Test1 Test2 Avg. of
two Tests
ITM605
Mini -Project
-- -- -- -- 25 -- 25 50
Lab Objectives: Students will try:
1. To offer students a glimpse into real world problems and challenges that need IT based
solutions
2. To enable students to create very precise specifications of the IT solution to be designed.
3. To introduce students to the vast array of literature available of the various research challenges
in the field of IT
4. To create awareness among the students of the characteristics of several domain areas where IT
can be effectivel y used.
5. To enable students to use all concepts of IT in creating a solution for a problem
6. To improve the team building, communication and management skills of the students.
Lab Outcomes: Student will be able to:
1. Discover potential research areas in the fi eld of IT
2. Conduct a survey of several available literature in the preferred field of study
3. Compare and contrast the several existing solutions for research challenge
4. Demonstrate an ability to work in teams and manage the conduct of the research study.
5. Formulate and propose a plan for creating a solution for the research plan identified
6. To report and present the findings of the study conducted in the preferred domain
Guidelines
1. The project work is to be conducted by a group of three students
2. Each grou p will be associated with a project mentor/guide. The group should meet with the project
mentor/guide periodically and record of the meetings and work discussed must be documented.
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 151
3. Department has to allocate half day for the project work in VI semester, 1 day in VII semester and
2 day in VIII semester every week.
4. To encourage project based learning in the curriculum students may identify their technical domain
area in semester VI and can perform the Mini -project in the VI semester or students may do
literat ure survey
5. Each group along with its guide/mentor shall identify a potential research area/problem domain, on
which the study is to be conducted.
6. Each team will do a rigorous literature survey of the problem domain by reading and understanding
at least 3-5 research papers from current good quality national/international journals/conferences.
(Papers selected must be indexed by Scopus/IEEE/Springer/ACM etc.). The list of papers surveyed
must be clearly documented.
7. The project assessment for term work will be done at least two times at department level by giving
presentation to panel members which consist of at least three (3) members as Internal examiners
(including the project guide/mentor) appointed by the Head of the department of respective
Programme.
8. A report is to be prepared summarizing the findings of the literature survey. A comparative
evaluation of the different techniques surveyed is also to be done.
9. Teams must analyze all the results obtained by comparing with other standard techniques.
10. Every t eam must publish their work in national / international conference/journals (if possible
publish in Scopus indexed journals) .
11. The team will finally propose a plan for project work to be continued in the final year.
12. Semester VII to carry out the project go od quality project and all these project part
Evaluation
1. Each team has to give presentation/demo to the Internal Panel and External examiner.
2. Each team will prepare a report that will summarize the results of the literature survey and the
project propos al. The list of papers surveyed must be clearly documented.
3. Each group will be jointly evaluated by a team of Internal and External Examiners approved by the
University of Mumbai.
4. Oral exam will be conduct on the project done by the students.
Term Work:
Term Work shall consist of full Mini Project on above guidelines/syllabus.
Term Work Marks: 25 Marks (Total marks) = 20 Marks (Mini Project) + 5 Marks (Attendance)
Oral Exam: An Oral exam will be held based on the Mini Project and Presentation.
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 152
Course Code Course Name Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical
/Oral Tutorial Total
ITDLO 6021 Advance
Internet
Programming
04 -- -- 04 -- -- 04
Course Code Course Name Examination Scheme
Theory Marks
Term
Work Oral & Practical
Total Internal assessment
End
Sem.
Exam Test1 Test2 Avg. of
two
Tests
ITDLO 6021 Advance
Internet
Programming
20 20 20 80 -- -- 100
Course Objectives: Students will try:
1. To get familiar with the concept of Search Engine Basics.
2. To Understand Search Engine Optimization Techniques.
3. To Learn Web Service Essentials.
4. To gain knowledge of Rich Internet Application Technologies.
5. To be familiarized with Web Analytics 2.0
6. To explore Web 3.0 and Semantic web standards.
Course Outcomes: Students w ill be able to:
1. Determine SEO Objectives and Develop SEO plan prior to Site Development.
2. Explain Search Engine Optimization Techniques and Develop Keyword Generation.
3. Describe different Web Services Standards.
4. Develop Rich Internet Application using proper choice of Framework.
5. Apply multiple quantitative and qualitative methods for web analytics 2.0.
6. Explain Web 3.0 and Semantic web standards
Prerequisite: Basics of Internet Programming – HTML5, CSS3, XML.
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 153
Detailed syllabus:
Sr.
No. Module Detailed Content Hours CO
Mapping
0 Prerequisite Introduction to HTML 5 & CSS3 basics, XML
basics 02
I Search Engine
Basics Search Engine Basics
Algorithm based Ranking Systems – Determining
Searcher Intent and Delivering Relevant, Fresh
Content, Analyzing Ranking Factors, Using
Advanced Search Techniques, Vertical Search
Techniques, Country Specific search engines.
Determining SEO Objective and F inding Your
Site’ s Audience – Setting SEO Goals and Objective
Developing SEO plans Prior to Site Development,
SEO for Raw traffic ; E-commerce Sales;
Mindshare /Branding; Direct Marketing; Reputation
Management; Ideological Influence 09 CO1
II Search Engine
Optimization Getting started SEO: Defining Your Site ’s
Information Architecture, Auditing an Existing Site
to identify SEO Problems, Identifying Current
Server Statistic Software and Gaining Access –
Determining Top competitors, Benchmarking
Current Indexing Status, Current Rankings,
Benchmarking Current Traffic Source and
Volumes, Conduct SEO/Website SWOT analysis.
Keyword Generation – Creating Pages – Website
Structure - Creating Content -Creating
Communities -
building Links -Using Google Analytics -Social
Media Optimization -Creating Pay -per-click
Campaigns - Optimizing PPC Campaigns through
Quality Score optimization - Tracking Results
and Measuring Success.
09 CO1
CO2
III Web Services Web Services: Introduction to Web Services, XML,
XSL, XSLT, WSDL, SOAP, UDDI, Transaction,
Business Process Execution Language for web
Services, WS -Security and web service security
specification, WS -Reliable Messaging, WS -Policy,
WS-Attachments. REST -ful web services,
Resource Oriented Architecture, Comparison of
REST, SOA, SOAP. 08 CO1
CO2
CO3
IV Rich Internet
Application Introduction to A JAX , Blogs, Wikis, RSS feeds
Working with Java Script Object Notation
(JSON) , Implement JSON on server side, 08 CO4
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 154
Implementing Security and Accessibility in AJAX
Applications: Secure AJAX application, Accessible
Rich Internet Applications
Developing RIA using AJAX Techniques: CSS,
HTML, DOM, XMLHTTPRequest, JavaScript,
PHP, AJAX as REST Client
Introduction to Open Source Frameworks and
CMS for RIA: Django, Drupal, Joomla
introdu ction and comparison.
V Web Analytics 2.0 Introduction to Web Analytics 2.0 1: State of the
Analytics Union, State of the Industry, Rethinking
Web Analytics: Meet Web Analytics 2.0, Optimal
Strategy for Choosing Your Web Analytics Soul
Mate. The Awesome World of Clickstream
Analysis: Metrics. The Key to Glory: Measuring
Success. Failing Faster: Unleashing the Power of
Testing and Experimentation. 08 CO4
CO5
VI Web 3.0 and
Semantic Web Web 3.0 and Semantic Web : Challenges,
Components,
Semantic Web Stack: RDF, RDF Schema (RDFS),
Simple Knowledge Organization System (SKOS),
SPARQL as RDF query language, N -Triples as a
format for storing and transmitting data, Turtle
(Terse RDF Triple Language), Web Ontology
Language (OWL) a family of knowledge
repres entation languages, Rule Interchange Format
(RIF), a framework of web rule language dialects
supporting rule interchange on the Web 08 CO4
CO5
CO6
Text Books:
1. The Art of SEO O ’Reilly Publication
2. Web Services Essentials by Ethan Cerami O'Reilly Media
3. Web Analytics 2.0: The Art of Online Accountability and Science of Customer Centricity, by
Avinash Kaushik, ISBN: 978 -0-470-52939 -3, wiley publication.
4. “Semantic Web Technologies: Trends and Research in Ontology -based Systems”, by John Davies,
Rudi Studer, and Paul Warren John, Wiley & Son'
5. Advance Internet Technology by Dr. Deven Shah Dreamtech.
References:
1. RESTful Web Services, By Leonard Richardson, Sam Ruby, O'Reilly Media
2. Rich Internet Application AJAX and Beyond WROX press
3. Han dbook of Semantic Web Technologies, by John Domingue, Dieter Fensel, Springer Reference
4. Tim O’Reilly, What is Web 2.0? : Design Patterns and Business Models for the Next Generation of
Software, O’REILLY
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 155
Assessment:
Internal Assessment for 20 marks :
Consisting of Two Compulsory Class Tests
Approximately 40% to 50% of syllabus content must be covered in First test and remaining 40% to
50% of syllabus contents must be covered in second test.
End Semester Examination: Some guidelines for setting the question papers are as:
Weightage of each module in end semester examination is
expected to be/will be proportional to number of respective lecture
hours mentioned in the syllabus.
Question paper will comprise of total six questions , each
carrying 20 marks .
Q.1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of
the syllabus .
Remaining question will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2
has part (a) from module 3 then part (b) will be from any other
module. (Randomly selected from all the modules.)
Total four questions need to be solved.
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 156
Course Code Course
Name Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical/
Oral Tutorial Total
ITDLO 6022
Software
Architecture 04 -- -- 04 -- -- 04
Course Objectives: Students will try:
1. To understand importance of architecture in building effective, efficient, competitive software
product.
2. To understand principal design decisions governing the system.
3. To understand role of architecture in software engineering
4. To understand designing application from architectura l perspective
5. To understand different notations used for capturing design decisions.
6. To understand different functional and non -functional properties of complex software systems.
Course Outcomes Students will be able to:
1. Students will cite knowledge of v arious approaches to document a software system
(Remembering)
2. Students will be able to describe functional and non -functional requirements (Understanding)
3. Students will be able to use proper architecture for software (Applying)
4. Students will be able to cat egorize different components used in the software system
(Analyzing)
5. Students will be able to choose from different architectural styles (Evaluating)
6. Students will be able to improve quality of software by selecting proper architecture (Creating)
Prerequ isite: Programming Language, UML
Course Code Course Name Examination Scheme
Theory Marks
Term
Work Oral &
Practical
Total Internal assessment End
Sem.
Exam Test1 Test2 Avg. of
two Tests
ITDLO 6022
Software
Architecture 20 20 20 80 -- -- 100
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 157
Detailed syllabus:
Sr.
No. Module Detailed Content Hours CO
Mapping
0 Prerequisite Power of analogy: Architecture of
the building, limitations of analogy,
The reorientation of software
engineering, 02 CO1
I Introduction to
Software
Architecture and
Software Product
Life Cycle Evolution of Software
Development, Fundamentals of
Software Engineering, Elements of
Software Architecture.
Management View, Software
Engineering View, Engineering
Design View, Architectural View, 07 CO1
CO2
II Architectural
Design Process
and Introduction to
Software Design Understanding the problem,
Identifying design elements and
their relationship, Evaluating the
Architecture, Transforming the
Architecture, Problems in Software
Architectural Design, Function
form and Fabrication, The scope of
Design, Psychology and Philosophy
of Design, General Methodology of
Design 09 CO1
CO2
CO3
III Complexity,
Modularity,
Models and
Knowledge
Representation Complexity, Modularity, What are
Models, What are Models used for,
What roles do Models Play,
Modeling the Problem and Solution
Domain, Views, 09 CO1
CO4
IV Architecture
Representation and
Architectural
Design Principles Goals of Architecture
Representation, Foundation of
Architectural Representation,
Architectural Description
Language, Architectural Level of
Design, Architecting with Design
Operators, Functional Design
Strategies. 09 CO4
V Architectural
Styles, Patterns
and Meta models Defining Architectural Patterns and
Style, Common Architectural
Styles, Understanding Metamodels,
Applying Reference Models,
Fundamental Metamodel for
describing Software Component 08 CO4
CO5
VI Architectural
Description and
Architectural Standardizing Architectural
Description, Creating an
Architectural Description, Applying 08 CO1
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 158
Framework,
Architecture
Quality Architectural Description, Software
Architecture Framework, 4+1 View
Model of Architecture, Reference
Model for Open Distributed
Processing, Importance of
Assessing Software Quality, How
to improve Quality. DevOps
practice and Architecture. CO6
Text Books:
1. The Art of Software Architecture: Design Methods and Techniques, Stephen T.Albin, Wiley
India Private Limited.
2. Software Architecture, Foundations, Theory, and Practise, Richard Taylor, Nenad Medvidovic,
Eric M Dashofy, Wiley Student Edition.
References:
1. Software Architecture in Practice by Len Bass, Paul Clements, Rick Kazman, Pearson.
2. DevOps A Software Architect’s Perspective, Len Bass, Ingo Weber, Liming Zhu, Addison
Wesley
Assessment:
Internal Assessment for 20 marks:
Consisting of Two Compulsory Class Tests
Approximately 40% to 50% of syllabus content must be covered in First test and remaining 40% to
50% of syllabus contents must be covered in second test.
End Semester Examination: Some guidelines for setting the question papers are as:
Weightage of each module in end semester examination is
expected to be/w ill be proportional to number of respective lecture
hours mentioned in the syllabus.
Question paper will comprise of total six questions , each
carrying 20 marks.
Q.1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of
the syllabus .
Remaining question will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2
has part (a) from module 3 then part (b) will be from any other
module. (Randomly selected from all the modules.)
Total four questions need to be solved.
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 159
Course Code Course Name Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical/Oral Tutorial Total
ITDLO6 023
Digital
Forensics
04 -- - 04 -- - 04
Course Code Course
Name Examination Scheme
Theory Marks
Term
Work Oral &
Practical
Total Internal assessment
End Sem.
Exam Test1 Test2 Avg. of
two
Tests
ITDLO6 023
Digital
Forensics
20 20 20 80 -- -- 100
Course Objectives: Students will try:
1. To understand underlying principles and many of the techniques associated with the digital
forensic practices and cyber crime
2. To explore practical knowledge about ethical hacking Methodology.
3. To learn the importance of evidence handling and storage for various devices
4. To develop an excellent understanding of current cyber security issues (Computer Security
Incident) and analyzed the ways that exploits in securities.
5. To investigate attacks, IDS .technical exploits and router attacks and “Trap and Trace”
computer network s.
6. To apply digital forensic knowledge to use computer forensic tools and investigation report
writing.
Course Outcomes: Student will able to:
1. Define the concept of ethical hacking and its associated applications in Information
Communication Technology (I CT) world.
2. Underline the need of digital forensic and role of digital evidences .
3. Explain the methodology of incident response and various security issues in ICT world, and
identify digital forensic tools for data collection .
4. Recognize the importance of digital forensic duplication and various tools for analysis to
achieve adequate perspectives of digital forensic investigation in various applications /devices
like Windows/Unix system.
5. Apply the knowledge of IDS to secure network and performing router and network analysis
6. List the method to generate legal evidence and supporting investigation reports and will also
be able to use various digital forensic tools .
Prerequisite: Cryptography and Security, Computer Networks
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 160
Detailed syllabus:
CO
Mappin g Hours Detailed Content Module Sr.
No.
2
Cryptography and Security ,Computer
Networks
Prerequisite 0
CO1
6
Introduction of Cybercrime : Types
of cybercrime ,categories of
cybercrime , Computers' roles in
crimes, Prevention from Cyber crime,
Hackers, Crackers, Phreakers
Ethical Hacking :Difference between
Hacking and Ethical hacking : Steps of
Ethical Hacking, Exploring some tools
for e thical hacking: reconnaisance
tools, scanning tools Introduction to
Cyber Crime
and
Ethical Hacking I
CO2
6
Digital Forensic ,Rules for Digital
Forensic The Need for Digital
Forensics, Types of Digital Forensics,
Ethics in Digital Forensics,
Digital Evidences : Types and
characteristics and challenges for
Evidence Handling
Introduction to
Digital
Forensics and
Digital
Evidences II
CO3 11 Introduction to Computer Security
Incident Goals of Incident response,
Incident Response Methodology,
Formulating Response Strategy,
IR Process – Initial Response,
Investigation, Remediation, Tracking
of Significant ,Investigative
Information, Reporting
Pre Incident Preparation, Incident
Detec tion and Characterization.
Live Data Collection :
Live Data Collection on Microsoft
Windows Systems: Live Data Computer
Security
Incident
Response
Methodology
III
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 161
Collection on Unix -Based Systems
CO4 11
Forensic Duplication
Forensic Image Formats, Traditional
Duplication, Live System Duplication,
Forensic Duplication tools
Disk and File System Analysis:
Media Analysis Concepts, File System
Abstraction Model
The Sleuth Kit : Installing the Sleuth
Kit , Sleuth Kit Tools
Partitioning and Disk Layouts :
Partition Identification and Recovery,
Redundant Array of Inexpensive Disks
Special Containers : Virtual Machine
Disk Images , Forensic Containers
Hashing, Carving : Foremost ,
Forensic Imaging : Deleted Data , File
Slack , dd , dcfldd , dc3dd
Data Analysis
Analysis Methodology Investigating
Windows systems , Investigating
UNIX systems , Investigating
Applications, Web Browsers, Email,
Malware Handling: Static and
Dynamic Analysis
Forensic
Duplication and
Disk An alysis,
and
Investigation IV
CO5 9
Technical Exploits and Password
Cracking ,
Introduction to Intrusion Detection
systems, Types of IDS
Understanding Network intrusion and
attacks , Analyzing Network Traffic,
Collecting Network based evidence,
Evidence Handling.
Investigating Routers, Handling
Router Table Manipulation Incidents,
Using Routers as Response Tools
Network
Forensics
V
Report :Goals of Report, Layout of an Forensic
Investigation VI
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 162
CO6
7 Investigative Report, Guidelines for
Writing a Report, sample for writing a
forensic report .
Computer Forensic Tools : need and
types of computer forensic tools, task
performed by computer forensic tools .
Study of open source Tools like SFIT,
Autopsy etc. to acquire, search,
analyze and store digital evid ence
Report and
Forensic Tools
Text Books:
1. Jason Luttgens, Matthew Pepe, Kevin Mandia, “Incident Response and computer forensics”,3rd
Edition Tata McGraw Hill, 2014.
2. Nilakshi Jain, Dhananjay Kalbande, ”Digital Forensic : The fascinating world of Digital
Evidences ” Wiley India Pvt Ltd 2017.
3. Cory Altheide, Harlan Carvey ”Digital forensics with open source tools “ Syngress Publishing,
Inc. 2011.
4. Chris McNab, Network Security Assessment, By O’Reily.
References:
1. Clint P Garrison “Digital Forensics for Network, Internet, and Cloud Computing A forensic
evidence guide for moving targets and data , Syngress Publishing, Inc. 2010
2. Bill Nelson,Amelia Phillips,Christopher Steuart, “Guide to Computer Forensics and
Investigations” . Cengage Learning, 2014
3. Debra Littlejohn Shinder Michael Cross “Scene of the Cybercrime: Computer Forensics
Handbook”, 2nd Edition Syngress Publishing, Inc.2008.
4. Marjie T. Britz, Computer Forensics and Cyber Crime, Pearson, Third Edition.
Assessment:
Internal Assessment for 20 marks:
Consisting of Two Compulsory Class Tests
Approximately 40% to 50% of syllabus content must be covered in First test and remaining 40% to
50% of syllabus contents must be covered in second test.
End Semester Examination: Some guid elines for setting the question papers are as:
Weightage of each module in end semester examination is
expected to be/will be proportional to number of respective lecture
hours mentioned in the syllabus.
Question paper will comprise of total six questions , each
carrying 20 marks.
Q.1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of
the syllabus .
Remaining question will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2
has part (a) from module 3 then part (b) will be from any other
module. (Randomly selected fr om all the modules.)
Total four questions need to be solved.
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 163
Course Code Course
Name Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical/Oral Tutorial Total
ITDLO6 024
Multimedia
Systems 04 -- --- 04 -- -- 04
Course
Code Course
Name Examination Scheme
Theory Marks
Term
Work Oral &
Practical
Total Internal assessment End
Sem.
Exam Test1 Test2 Avg. of
two Tests
ITDLO6 0
24
Multimedia
Systems 20 20 20 80 -- -- 100
Course Objectives: Students will try:
1. To learn and understand technical aspect of Multimedia Systems .
2. To understand the standards available for different audio , video and text applications .
3. To Design and develop various Multimedia Systems applicable in real time .
4. To learn various multimedia authoring systems .
5. To understand various networking aspects used for multimedia applications .
6. To develop multimedia application and analyze the performance of the same.
Course Outcomes: Students will be able to:
1. Developed understanding of technical aspect of Multimedia Systems .
2. Understa nd various file formats for audio, video and text media .
3. Develop various Multimedia Systems applicable in real time .
4. Design interactive multimedia software .
5. Apply various networking protocols for multimedia applications .
6. To evaluate multimedia application for its optimum performance.
Prerequisite: Knowledge of computer graphics, computer networking and database systems.
Detailed syllabus:
Sr.
No. Module Detailed Content Hours CO
Mapping
0 Prerequisite Basic of database, computer networks and
computer graphics. 2 --
I Multimedia
Systems Design:
An Introduction Multimedia Elements. Multimedia Systems
Architecture, Evolving Technologies for
Multimedia Systems, Defining Objects For 9 CO1
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 164
Multimedia Systems. Multimedia Data Interface
Standards. The Need for Data Compression.
Multimedia applications including digital
libraries, system software , streaming videos and
its applications.
II Compression and
Decompression
Data and File
Format Standards
Types of Compression. Image Compression
Schemes. Video Compression. Audio
Compression.
Rich-Text Format. TIFF File Format. Resource
Interchange File Format (RIFF), MIDI File
Format. JPEG DIB File Format for Still and
Motion Images. JPEG Still Image. AVI v ideo
File Format. MPEG Standards.
10 CO1
CO2
III Multimedia
Application
Design Multimedia Application Classes. Types of
Multimedia Systems. Virtual Reality Design.
Components of Multimedia Systems.
Multimedia database issues and solutions .
Organizing Multimedia Databases.
8 CO1
CO2
CO3
IV Multimedia
Authoring, User
Interface and
Multimedia Authoring Systems. Hypermedia
Application Design Considerations. User
Interface Design. Information Access. Object
Display/Playback Issues
7 CO4
V Distributed
Multimedia
Systems
Components of a Distributed Multimedia
System. Distributed Client -Server Operation.
Middleware in Distributed Workgroup
Computing. Multiserver Network Topologies.
Distributed Multimedia Databases. Managing
Distributed Objec ts. Application Workflow
Design Issues. Distributed Application Design
Issues
8
CO4
CO5
VI System Design:
Methodology and
Considerations.
Fundamental Design Issues. Determining
Enterprise Requirements. Examining Current
Architecture and Feasibility. Performance
Analysis. Designing for Performance
Multimedia System Design. System
Extensibility. Multimedia Systems Design
Example. 8 CO5
CO6
Text Books:
1. Prabhat K. Andleigh , Kiran Thakrar “Multimedia Systems Design” 1/e, Pearson , ISBN
978-93-325-4938 -8
2. Fundamentals of Multimedia by Ze -Nian Li& Mark.S.Drew
3. Introduction to Multimedia Communication, Application, Middleware, Networking by
K.R.Roa, Zoran S,Bojkovic & Dragorad A. Milovanovic.
References:
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 165
1. Organization of Multimedia Resources: Principles and Practice of Information
Retrieval by Mary A. Burke
2. Multimedia Systems Design by Prabhat K.Andleigh/ Kiran Thakrar
Assessment:
Internal Assessment for 20 marks:
Consisting of Two Compulsory Class Tests
Approximately 40% to 50% of syllabus content must be covered in First test and remaining 40% to
50% of syllabus contents must be covere d in second test.
End Semester Examination: Some guidelines for setting the question papers are as:
Weightage of each module in end semester examination is
expected to be/will be proportional to number of respective lecture
hours mentioned in the syllabus.
Question paper will comprise of total six questions , each
carrying 20 marks.
Q.1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of
the syllabus .
Remaining question will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2
has part (a) from module 3 then part (b) will be from any other
module. (Randomly selected from all the modules.)
Total four questions need to be solved.
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 166
Course Code Course
Name Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical
/Oral Tutorial Total
ITDLO 6025 Green IT
04 -- -- 04 -- -- 04
Course
Code Course Name Examination Scheme
Theory Marks
Term
Work Oral &
Practical
Total Internal assessment End
Sem.
Exam Test1 Test2 Avg. of
two Tests
ITDLO 6025 Green IT
20 20 20 80 -- -- 100
Course Objectives: Students will try:
1. To understand what Green IT is and How it can help improve environmental Sustainability
2. To understand the principles and practices of Green IT.
3. To understand how Green IT is adopted or deployed in enterprises.
4. To understand how data centres, cloud computing, storage systems, software and networks can
be made greener.
5. To measure the Maturity of Sustainable ICT world.
6. To implement the concept of Green IT in Information Assurance in Communication and
Social Media and all other commerci al field.
Course Outcomes: Students will be able to:
1. Describe awareness among stakeholders and promote green agenda and green initiatives in
their working environments leading to green movement
2. Identify IT Infrastructure Management and Green Data Centre M etrics for software
development
3. Recognize Objectives of Green Network Protocols for Data communication.
4. Use Green IT Strategies and metrics for ICT development.
5. Illustrate various green IT services and its roles.
6. Use new career opportunities available i n IT profession, audits and others with special skills
such as energy efficiency, ethical IT assets disposal, carbon footprint estimation, reporting and
development of green products, applications and services.
Prerequisite: Environmental Studies
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 167
Detailed syllabus:
Sr.
No. Module Detailed Content Hours CO
Mapping
0 Prerequisite Environmental Studies 2
I Introduction
Environmental Impacts of IT,
Holistic Approach to Greening IT,
Green IT Standards and Eco -
Labeling, Enterprise Green IT
Strategy , Green IT: Burden or
Opportunity?
Hardware: Life Cycle of a Device
or Hardware, Reuse, Recycle and
Dispose.
Software: Introduction, Energy -
Saving Software Techniques,
Evaluating and Measuring Software
Impact to Platform Power. 9 CO1
II Software
development and
data centers
Sustainable Software, Software
Sustainability Attributes, Software
Sustainability Metrics, Sustainable
Software Methodology, Data
Centres and Associated Energy
Challenges, Data Centre IT
Infrastructure, Data Centre Facility
Infrastructure: Implications for
Energy Efficiency, IT Infrastructure
Management, Green Data Centre
Metrics 9 CO1
CO2
III Data storage and
communication
Storage Media Power
Characteristics, Energy
Management Techniques for Hard
Disks, System -Level Energy
Management, Objectives of Green
Network Protocols, Green Network
Protocols and Standards. 9 CO1
CO3
IV Information
systems, green it
strategy and
metrics Approaching Green IT Strategies,
Business Drivers of Green IT
Strategy, Business Dimensions for
Green IT Transformation,
Multilevel Sustainable Information,
Sustainability Hierarchy Models,
Product Level Information,
Individual Level Information,
Functional Level Information,
Organizational Level Information,
Regional/City Level Information,
Measuring the Maturity of
Sustainable ICT. 8 CO1
CO4
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 168
V Green it services
and roles
Factors Driving the Development
of Sustainable IT, Sustainable IT
Services (SITS), SITS Strategic
Framework, Sustainable IT
Roadmap, Organizational and
Enterprise Greening, Information
Systems in Greening Enterprises,
Greening the Enterprise: IT Usage
and Hardware, Inter -organizational
Enterprise
Activities and Green Issues,
Enablers and Making the Case for
IT and the Green Enterprise.
9 CO1
CO4
CO5
VI Managing and
regulating green it
Strategizing Green Initiatives,
Implementation of Green IT,
Information Assurance,
Communication and Social Media,
The Regulatory Environment and
IT Manufacturers, Nonregulatory
Government Initiatives, Industry
Asso ciations and Standards Bodies,
Green Building Standards, Green
Data Centres, Social Movements
and Greenpeace.
6 CO1
CO5
CO6
Text Books:
1. San Murugesan, G. R. Gangadharan, Harnessing Green IT,WILEY 1st Edition -2013
2. Mohammad Dastbaz Colin Pattinson Babak Akhgar, Green Information Technology A Sustainable
Approach , Elsevier 2015
3. Reinhold, Carol Baroudi, and Jeffrey HillGreen IT for Dummies, Wiley 2009
References:
1. Mark O'Neil , Green IT for Sustainable Business Practice: An ISEB Foundation Guide, BCS
2.Jae H. Kim, Myung J. Lee Green IT: Technologies and Applications, Springer, ISBN: 978-3-642-
22178 -1
3. Elizabeth Rogers , Thomas M. Kostigen The Green Book: The Everyday Guide to Saving the Planet
One Simple Step at a Time, Springer
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 169
Assessment:
Internal Assessment for 20 marks:
Consisting of Two Compulsory Class Tests
Approximately 40% to 50% of syllabus content must be covered in First test and rema ining 40% to
50% of syllabus contents must be covered in second test.
End Semester Examination: Some guidelines for setting the question papers are as:
Weightage of each module in end semester examination is
expected to be/will be proportional to number of respective lecture
hours mentioned in the syllabus.
Question paper will comprise of total six questions , each
carrying 20 marks.
Q.1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of
the syllabus .
Remaining question will be mixed in nature (for e xample if Q.2
has part (a) from module 3 then part (b) will be from any other
module. (Randomly selected from all the modules.)
Total four questions need to be solved.
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 170
University of Mumbai
Program Structure B.E. Information Technology, (Rev. 2016)
B. E. Information Technology ( Semester -VII)
Course
Code Course
Name Teaching Scheme
(Contact Hours) Credits Assigned
Theory Pract Tut Theory TW/
Pract Tut Total
ITC701 Enterprise Network Design
4 - - 4 - - 4
ITC702 Infrastructure Security 4 - - 4 - - 4
ITC703 Artificial Intelligence 4 - - 4 - - 4
ITDLO -II Department Level
Optional Course -III 4 - - 4 - - 4
ILO-I Institute Level Optional
Course -I 3 - - 3 - - 3
ITL701 Network Design Lab - 2 - - 1 1
ITL702 Advanced Security Lab - 2 - - 1 1
ITL703 Intelligence System Lab - 2 - 1 1
ITL704 Android Apps Development
Lab - 2 1 1
ITM705 Project -I - 6/8 3 - 3
Total 19 14 - 19 7 - 26
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 171
Course
Code Course
Name Examination Scheme
Theory
TW
Oral
&
Pract Total Internal Assessment End
Sem.
Exam Exam
Duration
( in Hrs) Oral
Test 1 Test 2 Avg.
ITC701 Enterprise Network Design
20 20 20 80 3 - - 100
ITC702 Infrastructure Security 20 20 20 80 3 - - 100
ITC703 Artificial Intelligence 20 20 20 80 3 - - 100
ITDLO -II Department Level
Optional Course -III 20 20 20 80 3 - - 100
ILO-I Institute Level Optional
Course -I 20 20 20 80 3 -- - 100
ITL701 Network Design Lab - - - - - 25 25 -- 50
ITL702 Advanced Security Lab - - - - - 25 25 -- 50
ITL703 Intelligence System Lab -- - - - -- 25 25 -- 50
ITL704 Android Apps Development
Lab 25
25 -- 25
ITM705 Project -I - - - - - 50 25 -- 75
Total 100 100 100 400 150 125 -- 750
# Department Level Optional Course (DLO)
Every student is required to take one Department Elective Course for Semester VII. Different
sets of courses will run in both the semesters. Students can take these courses from the list of
department ele ctives, which are closely allied to their disciplines.
(DLO -I subjects will have no Labs only Theory)
# Institute Level Optional Course (ILO)
Every student is required to take one Institute Elective Course for Semester VII, which is
not closely allied to their disciplines. Different sets of courses will run in the both the
semesters.
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 172
Subject Code Department Level Optional
Course
(DLO) Subject Code Institute Level Optional Course
(ILO)
Semester VII
ITDLO 7031 Storage Area Networks
ILO7011
Product Lifecycle Management
ITDLO 7032 Mobile Application
Development
ILO7012 Reliability Engineering
ITDLO 7033 High Performance
Computing
ILO7013 Management Information System
ITDLO 7034 Software Testing and Quality
Assurance ILO7014 Design of Experiments
ITDLO 7035 Soft Computing ILO7015 Operation Research
ILO7016 Cyber Security and Laws
ILO7017 Disaster Management and
Mitigation
Measures
ILO7018 Energy Audit and Management
ILO7019 Development Engineering
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 173
Course Code Course
Name Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical
/Oral Tutorial Total
ITC701
Enterprise
Network
Design
04 -- 04 -- -- 04
Course
Code Course
Name Examination Scheme
Theory Marks
Term
Work Oral &
Practical
Total Internal assessment End
Sem.
Exam Test1 Test2 Avg. of
two Tests
ITC701
Enterprise
Network
Design
20 20 20 80 --
--
100
Course Objectives: Students will try:
1. To be familiarized with the methodologies and approaches of the network design for an
enterprise network.
2. To understand the network hierarchy and use modular approach to network design for an
enterprise network.
3. To understand the campus design and data center design considerations for designing an
enterprise campus.
4. To study Enterprise Edge WAN Technologies and design a WAN using them
5. Designing an IP addressing plan and selecting a Route protocol for an enterprise network.
6. To design enterprise network for given user requirements in an application.
Course Outcomes: S tudent should be able to:
1. Understand the customer requirements and Apply a Methodology to Network Design
2. Structure and Modularize the Network
3. Design Basic Campus and Data Center Network.
4. Design Remote Connectivity
5. Design IP Addressing and Select suitable Routing Protocols for the Network
6. Compare Openflow controllers and switches with other enterprise networks.
Pre-requisite: Computer Networks
Detailed syllabus:
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 174
Sr.
No. Module Detailed Content Hours CO
Mapping
0 Prerequisite
1. OSI Reference Model and
TCP/IP Protocol Suite
2. Routing IP Addresses
3. Internetworking Devices
02
I Applying a
Methodology to
Network Design:
The Cisco Service Oriented
Network Architecture, Network
Design Methodology, Identifying
Customer Requirements,
Characterizing the Existing
Network and Sites, Using the Top-
Down Approach to Network
Design, The Design
Implementation Process.
08 CO1, CO6
II Structuring and
Modularizing the
Network: Network Hierarchy, Using a
Modular Approach to Network
Design, Services Within Modular
Networks, Network Management
Protocols and Features
09 CO2, CO6
III Designing Basic
Campus and Data
Center Networks Campus Design Considerations,
Enterprise Campus Design,
Enterprise Data Center Design
Considerations
09 CO3, CO6
IV Designing Remote
Connectivity Enterprise Edge WAN
Technologies, WAN Design, Using
WAN Technologies, Enterprise
Edge WAN and MAN Architecture,
Selecting Enterprise Edge
Components, Enterprise Branch
and Teleworker Design.
09 CO4, CO6
V Designing IP
Addressing in the
Network &
Selecting Routing
Protocols Designing an IP Addressing Plan,
Introduction to IPv6, Routing
Protocol Features, Routing
Protocols for the Enterprise,
Routing Protocol Deployment,
Route Redistribution, Route
Filtering, Redistributing and
Filtering with BGP, Route
Summarization
10 CO5
VI Software Defined Understanding SDN and Open
Flow : SDN – SDN Building CO6
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 175
Network Blocks, OpenFlow messages –
Controller to Switch, Symmetric
and Asynchronous messages,
Implementing OpenFlow Switch,
OpenFlow controllers , POX and
NOX, Open Flow in Cloud
Computing, Case study: how SDN
changed Traditional Enterprise
network Design
05
Text Books:
1. Authorized Self -Study Guide, Designing for Cisco Internetwork Solutions (DESGN), Second
Edition, Cisco Press -Diane Teare.
2. Network Analysis, Architecture, and Design 3rd Edition, Morgan Kaufman, James D.
3. CCDA Cisco official Guide
4. Software Defined Networking with Open Flow : PACKT Publishing Siamak Azodolmolky
References:
1. Top-Down Network Design (Networking T echnology) 3rd Edition, Priscilla
Oppenheimer ,Cisco Press Book
2. Network Planning and Design Guide Paperback – 2000, Shaun Hummel
Assessment:
Internal Assessment for 20 marks:
Consisting of Two Compulsory Class Tests
Approximately 40% to 50% of syllabus content must be covered in First test and remaining 40% to
50% of syllabus contents must be covered in second test.
End Semester Examination: Some guidelines for setting the question papers are as:
Weightage of each m odule in end semester examination is
expected to be/will be proportional to number of respective lecture
hours mentioned in the syllabus.
Question paper will comprise of total six questions , each
carrying 20 marks.
Q.1 will be compulsory and should cover m aximum contents of
the syllabus .
Remaining question will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2
has part (a) from module 3 then part (b) will be from any other
module. (Randomly selected from all the modules.)
Total four questions need to be solved.
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 176
Course Code Course Name Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical/Oral Tutorial Total
ITC702
Infrastructure
Security
04 -- - 04 -- - 04
Course Code Course
Name Examination Scheme
Theory Marks
Term
Work Oral &
Practical Total Internal assessment End Sem.
Exam Test1 Test2 Avg. of
two Tests
ITC702
Infrastructure
Security
20 20 20 80 -- --
100
Course Objectives: Students will try :
1. To understand underlying principles of infrastructure security
2. To explore software vulnerabilities, attacks and protection mechanisms
To learn security aspects of wireless network infrastructure and protocols
3. To investigate web server vulnerabilities and their countermeasures
4. To develop policies for security management and mitigate secur ity related risks in the
organization
5. To Learn the different attacks on Open Web Applications and Web services.
6. To Learn the different security policies.
Course Outcomes: Students will be able to:
1. Understand the concept of vulnerabilities, attacks and p rotection mechanisms
2. Analyze and evaluate software vulnerabilities and attacks on databases and operating systems
3. Explain the need for security protocols in the context of wireless communication
4. Understand and explain various security solutions for Web and Cloud infrastructure
5. Understand, and evaluate different attacks on Open Web Applications and Web services
6. Design appropriate security policies to protect infrastructure components
Prerequisite: Computer Networks, Cryptography and Network Security
Detail Syllabus:
Sr.
No. Module Detailed Content Hours CO
Mapping
I Introduction Cyber -attacks, Vulnerabilities, Defense
Strategies and Techniques, Authentication
Methods - Password, Token and Biometric,
Access Control Policies and Models
(DAC,MAC, RBAC, ABAC, BIBA, Bell La
Padula), Authentication and Access Control
Services - RADIUS, TACACS, and
TACACS+ 6 CO1
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 177
II Software
Security Software Vulnerabilities:
Buffer overflow, Format String, Cross -Site
Scripting, SQL Injection, Malware: Viruses,
Worms, Trojans, Logic Bomb, Bots,
Rootkits
Operating System Security:
Memory and Address Protection, File
Protection Mechanism, User Authentication.
Linux and Windows: Vulnerabilities, File
System Security
Database Security:
Database Security Requirements, Reliability
and Integrity, Sensitive Data, Inference
Attacks, Multilevel Database Security 12 CO2
III Wireless
Security Mobile Device Security - Security Threats,
Device Security, GSM, UMTS and 4G
Security, IEEE 802.11x Wireless LAN
Security, VPN Security, Wireless Intrusion
Detection System (WIDS) 9 CO3
IV Cloud
Security Cloud Security Risks and Countermeasures,
Data Protection in Cloud, Cloud Application
Security, Cloud Identity and Access
Management, Cloud Security as a Service,
SAML, OAuth 8 CO4
V Web Security Web Security Considerations, User
Authentication and Session Management,
Cookies, SSL, HTTPS, SSH, Privacy on
Web, Web Browser Attacks, Account
Harvesting, Web Bugs, Clickjacking, Cross -
Site Request Forgery, Session Hijacking and
Management, Phishing and Pharming
Techniques, DNS Attacks , Web Service
Security, Secure Electronic Transaction,
Email Attacks, Web Server Security as per
OWASP , Firewalls, Penetration Testing 12 CO4,
CO5
VI Information
Security and
Risk
Management Security Policies, Business Continuity Plan,
Risk Analysis, Incident Management, Legal
System and Cybercrime, Ethical Issues in
Security Management . 5 CO6
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 178
Text Books:
1. Computer Security Principles and Practice, William Stallings, Sixth Edition, Pearson Education
2. Security in Computing, Charles P. Pfleeger, Fifth Edition, Pearson Education
3. Network Security and Cryptography, Bernard Menezes, Cengage Learning
4. Network Security Bible, Eric Cole, Second Edition, Wiley
Reference Books:
1. Web Application Hackers Handbook by Wiley.
2. Computer Security, Dieter Gollman, Third Edition, Wiley
3. CCNA Security Study Guide, Tim Boyle, Wiley
4. Introduction to Computer Security, Matt Bishop, Pearson.
5. Cloud Security and Privacy, Tim Mather, Subra Kumaraswamy, Shahed Latif , O’Riely
Assessment:
Internal Assessment for 20 marks:
Consisting of Two Compulsory Class Tests
Approximately 40% to 50% of syllabus content must be covered in First test and remaining 40% to
50% of syllabus contents must be covered in second test.
End Semester Examination: Some guidelines for setting the question papers are as:
Weightage of each module in end semester examination is
expected to be/will be proportional to number of respective lecture
hours mentioned in the syllabus.
Question paper will comprise of total six q uestions , each
carrying 20 marks.
Q.1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of
the syllabus .
Remaining question will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2
has part (a) from module 3 then part (b) will be from any other
module. (Randomly se lected from all the modules.)
Total four questions need to be solved.
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 179
Course Code Course Name Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical
/Oral Tutorial Total
ITC703 Artificial
Intelligence 04
Hr/Week -- 04 -- -- 04
Course
Code Course
Name Examination Scheme
Theory Marks
Term
Work Oral &
Practical
Total Internal assessment End
Sem.
Exam Test1 Test2 Avg. of
two Tests
ITC703 Artificial
Intelligence 20 20 20 80 --
-- 100
Course Objectives: Students will try:
1. To create appreciation and understanding of both the achievements of AI and the theory
underlying those achievements.
2. To introduce the concepts of a Rational Intelligent Agent and the different types of Agents that
can be designed to solve problems
3. To review the dif ferent stages of development of the AI field from human like behavior to
Rational Agents.
4. To impart basic proficiency in representing difficult real life problems in a state space
representation so as to solve them using AI techniques like searching and g ame playing.
5. To create an understanding of the basic issues of knowledge representation and Logic and
blind and heuristic search, as well as an understanding of other topics such as minimal ,
resolution, etc. that play an important role in AI programs.
6. To introduce advanced topics of AI such as planning, Bayes networks, natural language
processing and Cognitive Computing.
Course Outcomes: Students will be able to:
1. Demonstrate knowledge of the building blocks of AI as presented in terms of intelligent agents.
2. Analyze and formalize the problem as a state space, graph, design heuristics and select amongst
different search or game based techniques to solve them.
3. Develop intelligent algorithms for constraint satisfaction problems and also design intelligen t
systems for Game Playing
4. Attain the capability to represent various real life problem domains using logic based techniques
and use this to perform inference or planning.
5. Formulate and solve problems with uncertain information using Bayesian approaches.
6. Apply concept Natural Language processing to problems leading to understanding of cognitive
computing. .
Prerequisite: Programming, Data Structures.
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 180
Detailed syllabus:
Sr.
No. Module Detailed Content Hours CO
Mapping
0 Prerequisites Knowledge of any programming
language, D ata structures. 2 --
I Introduction to
Intelligent Systems
and Intelligent
Agents Introduction to AI, AI Problems
and AI techniques, Solving
problems by searching, Problem
Formulation. State Space
Representation
Structure of Intelligent agents,
Types of Agents, Agent
Environments PEAS representation
for an Agent.
07 CO 1
CO 2
II Search Techniques Uninformed Search : DFS, BFS,
Uniform cost search, Depth Limited
Search, Iterative Deepening.
Informed Search: Heuristic
functions, Hill Climbing, Simulated
Annealing, Best First Search, A*,
Constraint Satisfaction
Programming : Crypto Arithmetic,
Map Coloring, N -Queens.
Adversarial Search: Game
Playing, Min -Max Search, Alpha
Beta Pruning
11 CO 2
CO 3
III Knowledge and
Reasoning A Knowledge Based Agent,
Overview of Propositional Logic,
First Order Predicate Logic,
Inference in First Order Predicate
Logic: Forward and Backward
Chaining, Resolution.
10 CO 4
IV Planning Introduction to Planning, Planning
with State Space Search, Partial
Ordered planning, Hierarchical
Planning, Conditional Planning. 06 CO 4
V Uncertain
Knowledge and
Reasoning Uncertainly, Representing
Knowledge in an Uncertain
Domain, Conditional Probability,
Joint Probability, Bayes’ theorem,
Belief Networks, Simple Inference
in Belief Networks. 06 CO 5
VI Natural Language Language Models, Natural
Language for Communication: 10 CO 6
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 181
Processing Syntactic Analysis, Augmented
Grammars and Semantic
Interpretation, Machine
Translation.
Overview of Cognitive
Computing: Foundation of
Cognitive Computing, List of
Design Principles for Cognitive
Systems, Natural Language
Processing in Support of a
Cognitive System (First three
chapters from Text book 3)
Text Books:
1. Stuart Russell and Peter Norvig, Artificial Intelligence: A Modern Approach, 2nd Edition, Pearson
Education.
2. Elaine Rich, Kevin Knight, Shivshankar B Nair, Artificial Intelligence, McGraw Hill, 3rd Edition
3. Judith S. Hurwitz, Marcia Kaufman, Adrian Bowles, Cognitive Computing and Big Data
Analytics, Wiley India
References:
1. George Lugar, .AI -Structures and Strategies for Complex Problem Solving., 4/e, 2002, Pearson
Education.
2. Nils J. Nilsson, Principles of Artificial Intelligence, Narosa Publication.
3. Patrick H. Winston, Artificial Intelligence, 3rd edition, Pearson Education.
4. Deepak Khemani, A First Course in Artificial Intelligence, McGraw Hill Publication
5. John Kelly , Steve Hamm, Smart Machines - IBM ′s Watson and the Era of Cognitive Computing,
Colu mbia Business School Publishing
Assessment:
Internal Assessment for 20 marks:
Consisting of Two Compulsory Class Tests
Approximately 40% to 50% of syllabus content must be covered in First test and remaining 40% to
50% of syllabus contents must be cover ed in second test.
End Semester Examination: Some guidelines for setting the question papers are as:
Weightage of each module in end semester examination is
expected to be/will be proportional to number of respective lecture
hours mentioned in the syllab us.
Question paper will comprise of total six questions , each
carrying 20 marks.
Q.1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of
the syllabus .
Remaining question will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2
has part (a) from module 3 then part (b) will be from any other
module. (Randomly selected from all the modules.)
Total four questions need to be solved.
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 182
Course Code Course
Name Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical
& Oral Tutorial Tota
l
ITL701 Network
Design Lab -- 2 -- -- 2 -- 02
Course
Code Course Name Examination Scheme
Theory Marks
Term
Work Oral Practi
cal &
Oral Total Internal assessment End
Sem.
Exam Test1 Test2 Avg. of
two Tests
ITL701 Network
Design Lab -- -- -- -- 25 25 -- 50
Lab Objectives: Students will try:
1. To be familiarized with the requirements of an enterprise and address its major design areas
2. To recognize the hierarchical network model for the enterprise
3. Identify the networking devices and their configurations required for the design and also
prepare a bill of materials
4. Propose a design for the Server Farm of an enterprise network and discuss up gradations if
needed.
5. Provide suitable IP addressing plan and best possible routing protocol for an enterprise
network.
6. Construct a suitable design fo r an enterprise network and test it using a tool.
Lab Outcomes: Students will be able to:
1. Understand the requirements of an enterprise and outline its major design areas
2. Identify functional areas to construct high level modules for enterprise architectur e and analyze
them.
3. Identify the networking devices, prepare a bill of materials and configure the devices as per the
Core, Acess and Distribution layers
4. Design the Server Farm for an enterprise network and discuss up gradations if needed.
5. Identify and sel ect the technology for Remote site Connectivity , suitable IP addressing plan and
routing protocol for an enterprise network.
6. Test and monitor the enterprise network using a tool
Prerequisite: Computer Networks.
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 183
Guidelines
1. The case study of College Campus Network must be designed as a mini project work which is to
be conducted by a group of three students
2. Each group will be associated with a subject Incharge/ mini project mentor. The group should meet
with the concerned faculty during Laboratory h ours and the progress of work discussed must be
documented.
3. The students must understand the requirements of a College campus enterprise network.
4. The students must outline the major design areas of a College campus enterprise network.
5. The students must ide ntify the functional areas and construct high level modules for the College
campus enterprise architecture.
6. The students must analyze the existing College campus enterprise network and propose up
gradations to existing infrastructure.
7. The students must ide ntify the network devices required and their locations to design a College
campus enterprise network.
8. The students must configure the network devices required as per the Core Layer, Access Layer and
Distribution Layer.
9. The students must Design the Server Farm for enterprise network using a configuration tool and
also discuss if any other improvement is required.
10. The students must Prepare a bill of materials of all the networking devices. Develop a Request for
Proposal -RFP for the enterprise network
11. The s tudents must identify the technology for Remote Site connectivity and evaluate it as per the
application requirements of the college campus enterprise network.
12. Propose a suitable IP addressing plan for the enterprise network.
13. Determine a suitable routing protocol for the enterprise network.
14. Create and Test the designed college campus enterprise network using a tool.
15. Use Nagios tool for enterprise infrastructure monitoring tool
16. Each group may present their work in various project competitions and paper pres entations.
17. A detailed report is to be prepared as per guidelines given by the concerned faculty.
Text Books:
1. Authorized Self -Study Guide, Designing for Cisco Internetwork Solutions (DESGN), Second
Edition, Cisco Press -Diane Teare.
2. Designing and Supporting Computer Networks, CCNA Discovery Learning Guide (Cisco
Systems Networking Academy Program) Paperback – 2008, Kenneth Stewart , Aubrey Adams ,
Allan Reid , Jim Lorenz .
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 184
References:
1. 1. Top-Down Network Design (Networking Technology) 3rd Edition, Priscilla
Oppenheimer ,Cisco Press Book
2. Network Planning and Design Guide Paperback – 2000, Shaun Hummel
Term Work:
Term Work shall consist of full Mini Project on above guidelines/syllabus. Also Term work Journal
must include at least 2 assignments.
Term Work Marks: 25 Marks (Total marks) = 15 Marks (Mini Project) + 5 Marks (Assignments) + 5
Marks (Attendance)
Oral Exam: An Oral exam will be held based on the Mini Project and Presentation.
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 185
Course
Code Course Name Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical/Oral Tutorial Total
ITL702
Advance
Security
Lab -- 02 - -- 01 - 01
Course
Code Course
Name Examination Scheme
Theory Marks
Term
Work Oral &
Practical Oral Total Internal assessment End
Sem.
Exam Test1 Test2 Avg. of
two Tests
ITL702
Advance
Security
Lab -- -- -- -- 25 -- 25 50
Lab Objective : Students will try to:
1. Implement and analyze program and database vulnerabilities Buffer overflow and SQL
Injection.
2. Explore and analyze different security tools to secure mobile devices, web browser, wireless
network and router
3. Explore reconnaissance, attack and forensics tools in Kali Linux
4. Learn security of system using personal firewall installation
5. Understand AAA using RADUIS
6. Understand AAA usi ng TACACS
Lab Outcome: Students will able to:
1. Implement and analyze program and database vulnerabilities Buffer overflow and SQL
Injection .
2. Explore and analyze different security tools to secure mobile devices, web browser, wireless
network and router
3. Explore reconnaissance, attack and forensics tools in Kali Linux
4. Learn security of system using personal firewall installation
5. Understand AAA using RADUIS
6. Understand AAA using TACACS
Prerequisite: Computer Networks, Cryptography and Network Security .
Hardware Software
PC i3 or above configuration. Kali Linux, Java, Snort, Kismet, Metasploit,
Wireshark, Droidcrypt
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 186
Detail Syllabus:
Sr. No Description Hours CO mapping
1 Exploring Kali Linux and the inbuilt tools for
reconnaissance and ethical hacking.
2
LO3
2 Implementation and analysis of SQL injection Attack
4
LO1
3
Implementation of Buffer overflow attack and its
analysis using Splint, Cppcheck etc.
2
LO1
4
Setting up personal Firewall using Iptables
2
LO4
5 Exploring wireless security tools like Kismet,
NetStumbler etc.
2
LO2
6 Performing a penetration testing using Metasploit
2
LO3
7 Exploring Router security, access lists using packet
tracer
2
LO2
8 Exploring VPN security using Packet tracer
2
LO2
9 Exploring Authentication and access control using
RADIUS, TACACS and TACACS+ 2
LO5
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 187
10 Install and use a security app on an Android mobile
(e.g. Droidcrypt)
2
LO2
11 Explore forensics tools in Kali Linux for acquiring,
analyzing and duplicating data
2
LO3
12 Configuration of mod
Security, core rule set on apache server. 2
LO2
Text Books:
1. Build your own Security Lab, Michael Gregg, Wiley India
2. CCNA Security, Study Guide, TIm Boyles, Sybex
Reference Books:
1. Network Security Bible, Eric Cole, Wiley India
Term Work:
Term Work shall consist of at least 10 to 12 practical’s based on the above list. Also Term work
Journal must include at least 2 assignments.
Term Work Marks: 25 Marks (Total marks) = 15 Marks (Experiment) + 5 Marks (Assignments) + 5
Marks (Attenda nce)
Oral Exam: An Oral exam will be held based on the above syllabus.
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 188
Course Code Course
Name Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical
/Oral Tutorial Total
ITL703 Intelligence
System Lab -- 2 -- -- 1 -- 01
Course
Code Course Name Examination Scheme
Theory Marks
Term
Work Oral &
Practical Oral Total Internal assessment End
Sem.
Exam Test1 Test2 Avg. of
two Tests
ITL703 Intelligence
System Lab -- -- -- -- 25 -- 25 50
Course Objectives: Students will try:
1. To introduce the concepts of a Rational Intelligent Agent and the different types of Agents that
can be designed to solve problems
2. To impart basic proficiency in representing difficult real life problems in a state space
representation so as to solve them us ing AI techniques.
3. To make students understand various AI methods like searching and game playing and how to
apply them to solve real applications
4. To explain to students the basic issues of knowledge representation and Logic so as to build
inference engi nes
5. To impart a basic understanding of some of the more advanced topics of AI such as planning .
6. To understand Bayes networks, natural language processing and introduce concept of cognitive
computing.
Course Outcomes: Students will be able to:
1. Design the building blocks of an Intelligent Agent using PEAS representation .
2. Analyze and formalize the problem as a state space, graph, design heuristics and select amongst
different search or game based techniques to solve them.
3. Develop intelligent algorithms for constraint satisfaction problems and also design intelligent
systems for Game Playing
4. Attain the capability to represent various real life problem domains using logic based techniques
and use this to perform inference or planning.
5. Formulate and solve problems with uncertain information using Bayesian approaches.
6. Apply concept Natural Language processing and cognitive computing for creation of domain
specific ChatBots.
Hardware Software
PC i3 or above configuration. Java
Python
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 189
Detailed syllabus :
Module
No. Detailed Content Hours LO Mapping
1 Tutorial exercise for
a) Design of Intelligent System using
PEAS.
b) Problem Definition with State Space
Representation 2 LO 1,
LO 2
11 Implementation of Uninformed and
Informed Search Algorithms. 6 LO 2
111 Implementation of CSP and Game
playing algorithms . 4 LO 3
1V a) Assignment on Predicate Logic, for
forward and backward reasoning and
resolution.
b) Design of a Planning system using
STRIPS. 4 LO 4
V Implementation of Bayes' Belief Network. 2 LO 5
VI Mini project
Construction of a domain specific
ChatBot using Natural Language
Processing techniques.
( Applications can include : Medical
Diagnosis, Personal Shopping Assistant,
Travel Agent , Trouble shooting etc.) 8 LO6
Text Books:
1. Stuart Russell and Peter Norvig, Artificial Intelligence: A Modern Approach, 2nd Edition, Pearson
Education.
2. Judith S. Hurwitz, Marcia Kaufman, Adrian Bowles, Cognitive Computing and Big Data
Analytics, Wiley India
References:
1. George Lugar, .AI -Structures and Strategies for Complex Problem Solving., 4/e, 2002, Pearson
Education.
2. John Kelly , Steve Hamm, Smart Machines - IBM ′s Watson and the Era of Cognitive Computing,
Columbia Business School Publishing
Term Work:
Term Work shall consist of at least 10 to 12 practical’s based on the above list. Also Term work
Journal must include at least 2 assignments.
Term Work Marks: 25 Marks (Total marks) = 20 Marks (Experiment + Mini -Project) + 5 Marks
(Attendance) Oral Exam: An Oral exam will be held based on the above syllabus.
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 190
Course
Code Course Name Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical
& Oral Tutorial Total
ITL704 Android Apps
Development Lab 2 1 1
Course
Code Course Name Examination Scheme
Theory Marks
Term
Work Practical
& Oral Oral Total Internal assessment End
Sem.
Exam Test1 Test2 Avg. of
twoTests
ITL704 Android Apps
Development
Lab -- -- -- -- 25 -- 25 50
Hardware Software
PC i3 or above configuration. Java
Android SDK
Lab Objectives: Students will try:
1. To gain knowledge of installing Android Studio and Cross Platform Integrated Development
Environment.
2. To learn designing of User Interface and Layouts for Android App.
3. To learn how to use intents to broadcast data within and between Applications.
4. To use Content providers and Handle Databases using SQLite.
5. To introduce Android APIs for Camera and Location Based Service.
6. To discuss various security issues with Android Platform.
Lab Outcomes: Students will be able to :
1. Experiment on Integrated Development Environment for Android Application Development.
2. Design and Implement User Interfaces and Layouts of Android App.
3. Use Intents for activity and broadcasting data in Android App.
4. Design and Implement Database Application and Content Providers.
5. Experiment with Camera and Location Based service.
6. Develop Android App with Security features.
Prerequisite: Java Programming, Internet Programming .
Guidelines
1. The mini project work is to be conducted by a group of three students
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 191
2. Each group will be associated with a subject Incharge/ mini project mentor. The group should meet
with the concerned faculty during Laboratory hours and the progress of work discussed must be
documented.
3. The students may do survey for different application which they can create Apps using Android.
4. Students will do Installation, configuration of Android Studio & to create AVD and also try for
Cross platform Integrated Development Environment (Any Open Sou rce Tool).
5. Students will try to Design and implement following points in their Mini Project (Android Apps)
a. Widget box for Android phone.
b. Use Layouts
c. Use Intents
d. Use Activity
e. Use SQLite
f. Use Camera
g. Use Location API
h. Generate APK file
6. Each group along with the concerned faculty shall identify a potential problem statement for Apps
development , on which the study and implementation is to be conducted.
7. Each group may present their work in various project competitions and paper presentations.
8. A detailed report is to be prepared as per guidelines given by the concerned faculty.
Text Books:
1.Professional Android 4 Application Development by wrox publication
2.Android Cookbook by o’reilly
3. Beginning Android Development Wrox Press
References:
1. Android Application Development For Dummies, 2nd Edition by MichaelBurton, DonnFelker
2. Android Security –attack and defenses, AbhishekDubey and AnmolMisra by CRC Press
Term Work:
Term Work shall consist of full Mini Project on above guidelines/syllabus. Also Term work
Journal must include at least 2 assignments.
Term Work Marks: 25 Marks (Total marks) = 15 Marks (Mini Project) + 5 Marks
(Assignments) + 5 Marks (Attendance)
Oral Exam: An Oral exam will be held based on the Mini Project and Presentation.
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 192
Course Code Course
Name Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical
/ Oral Tutorial Total
ITM705
Project -I
-- 06 -- -- 3 -- 3
Course
Code Course Name Examination Scheme
Theory Marks
Term
Work Practic
al &
Oral Oral Total Internal assessment End
Sem.
Exam Test1 Test2 Avg. of
two Tests
ITM705
Project -I
-- -- -- -- 50 -- 25 75
Lab Objectives: Students will try:
1. To offer students a glimpse into real world problems and challenges that need IT based
solutions
2. To enable students to create very precise specifications of the IT solution to be designed.
3. To introduce students to the vast array of literature available of the various research challenges
in the field of IT
4. To create awareness among the students of the characteristics of several domain areas where IT
can be effectively used.
5. To enable students to use all concepts of IT in creating a solution for a problem
6. To improve the team building, communicat ion and management skills of the students.
Lab Outcomes: Student will be able to:
1. Discover potential research areas in the field of IT
2. Conduct a survey of several available literature in the preferred field of study
3. Compare and contrast the several exis ting solutions for research challenge
4. Demonstrate an ability to work in teams and manage the conduct of the research study.
5. Formulate and propose a plan for creating a solution for the research plan identified
6. To report and present the findings of the st udy conducted in the preferred domain
Guidelines
1. The project work is to be conducted by a group of three students
2. Each group will be associated with a project mentor/guide. The group should meet with the project
mentor/guide periodically and record of t he meetings and work discussed must be documented.
3. Department has to allocate 1 day in VII semester and 2 day in VIII semester every week.
4. Students will do literature survey in Sem VI or Sem VII.
5. Students will do design, implementation and coding in Sem VII.
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 193
6. Each group along with its guide/mentor shall identify a potential research area/problem domain, on
which the study is to be conducted.
7. Each team will do a rigorous literature survey of the problem domain by reading and understanding
at least 3 -5 rese arch papers from current good quality national/international journals/conferences.
(Papers selected must be indexed by Scopus/IEEE/Springer/ACM etc.). The list of papers surveyed
must be clearly documented.
8. The project assessment for term work will be done at least two times at department level by giving
presentation to panel members which consist of at least three (3) members as Internal examiners
(including the project guide/mentor) appointed by the Head of the department of respective
Programme.
9. A report is to be prepared summarizing the findings of the literature survey. A comparative
evaluation of the different techniques surveyed is also to be done.
10. Students will do testing and analyze in Sem VIII
11. Teams must analyze all the results obtained by compari ng with other standard techniques.
12. Every team must publish their work in national / international conference/journals (if possible
publish in Scopus indexed journals).
Evaluation
1. Each team has to give presentation/demo to the Internal Panel and External e xaminer.
2. Each team will prepare a report that will summarize the result s of the literature survey and
implementation and coding as project proposal in SEM VII. The list of papers surveyed must
be clearly documented.
3. Each group will be jointly evaluated by a team of Internal and External Examiners approved by
the University of Mumbai.
4. Oral exam will be conduct on the project done by the students.
Term Work:
Term Work shall consist of full Project -I on above guidelines/syllabus.
Term Work Marks: 50 Marks (Total marks) = 45 Marks (Project -I) + 5 Marks (Attendance)
Oral Exam: An Oral exam will be held based on the Project -I and Presentation.
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 194
Course Code Course
Name Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical
/Oral Tutorial Total
ITDLO 7031 Storage
Area
Network
04 -- -- 04 -- 01 05
Course Code Course
Name Examination Scheme
Theory Marks
Term
Work Practical
& Oral Oral Total Internal assessment End
Sem.
Exam Test1 Test2 Avg. of
two Tests
ITDLO 7031 Storage
Area
Network
20 20 20 80 -- -- -- 100
Course Objectives: Students will try to:
1. Understand the need for Storage Area Network and Data protection to satisfy the information
explosion requirements
2. Study storage technologies: SAN, NAS, IP storage etc., which will bridge the gap between the
emerging trends in industry and academics.
3. To get an insight of Storage area network architecture, protocols and its infrastructure.
4. To study and discuss the appl ications of SAN to fulfill the needs of the storage management in
the heterogeneous environment..
5. Study and understand the management of Storage area Networks.
6. To understand and analyze case studies on the storage area network technology
Course Outcomes : Students will able to:
1. Students will analyze the limitations of the client -server architecture and evaluate the need for
data protection and storage centric architectures such as Intelligent storage system..
2. Students will understand, interpret and examin e various SAN technologies.
3. Students will describe and sketch the SAN architecture and its uses.
4. Students will classify the applications as per their requirements and select relevant SAN
solutions.
5. Students will understand and evaluate different SAN manag ement strategies to fulfill business
continuity requirements.
6. Students will design case studies on NAS, SAN and SAN/ NAS
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 195
Prerequisite: Computer Networks, Operating System
Detailed syllabus:
Sr.
No. Module Detailed Content Hours CO
Mapping
0 Prerequisite Networking Protocols, File system
and Memory management 02
I Introduction to
Storage System Introduction: Storage oriented
architecture, Storage Systems, Data
center Infrastructure, Challenges in
managing information, Information
life cycle; Basics of Storage
System: Components of Storage
System, Disk Drive components
and Performance, Components of
Host; Data Protection: Raid
Components and types, RAID
technologies and RAID levels,
RAID impact on disk performance;
Intelligent Storage System”
Components of ISS, Storage
Provisioning and types of ISS 09 CO1
II Network Attached
Storage Storage on Network: NAS
hardware and software architecture,
NAS connectivity, NAS as a
Storage System; NAS Hardware
devices; NAS software
components; NAS connectivity
options: NAS connectivity
hardware and Software
Architecture. 07 CO2
III Storage Area
Networks Architecture Overview: Creating
Network for storage; Hardware
devices: Fibre Channel Switch,
Host Bus Adaptors, Putting the
Storage in SANs, Fabric Operation
from a hardware perspective, SAN
hardware considerations ; Software
Components: The switch’s
operating system, device drivers,
the supporting components,
considerations for SAN software ;
Configuration options for SANs:
Connecting into the data center, the
evolving network and device
connections, SAN configuration
guidelines 10 CO3
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 196
IV Applications -
Putting it together Defining the I/O workload: Storage
planning and capacity planning, the
definition and characterization of
workloads, the business application,
I/O content and workloads,
Considerations for I/O workloads in
storage networking ; Applying
SAN solution: SAN workload
characterization, applying SAN to
OLTP workloads, transactional
workloads; Applying NAS solution:
NAS workload characteriz ation,
applying NAS to departmental
workloads, enterprise web
workloads and specialized
workloads; Considerations when
integrating SN and NAS:
Differences and similarities, the
need to integrate, future storage
connectivity and integration 10 CO4
V Management Planning business continuity:
Defining the environment, the role
of storage networking in business
continuity, storage design and
implementation of the business
continuity planning ; Managing
availability: Availability Metrics,
Implementing the plan ;
Maintaining Serviceability:
Tracking the configurations,
Investigating the changes and
closing the loop on serviceability;
Capacity Planning: Storage
Analysis, developing and
implementing plan for storage,
Modelling performance and
capacity requirem ents ; Security
considerations: Overview of
Information security, Security
methods, Storage Security
challenges, FC SAN security, NAS
security 09 CO5
VI Case studies Case studies on NAS, SAN,
SAN/NAS 05 CO6
Text Books :
1. Storage Networks: The Complete Reference. Spalding, Robert , Tata McGraw -Hill
Education, 2003
2. “Storage Network Management and Retrieval”, Vaishali Khairnar, Nilima Dongre. Wiley
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 197
References:
1. Richard Barker, Paul Massiglia, “Storage Area Network Essentials: A Complete Guide to
Understanding and Implementing SANs”, Wiley India
2. Ulf Troppens,Wolfgang Muller -Friedt,Rainer Wolafka, “Storage Networks Explained”
Wiley Publication
3. G. Somasundaram, Alok Shrivastava, “Information Storag e and Management”, EMC
Education services”, Wiley Publication
Assessment:
Internal Assessment for 20 marks:
Consisting of Two Compulsory Class Tests
Approximately 40% to 50% of syllabus content must be covered in First test and remaining 40% to
50% of syllabus contents must be covered in second test.
End Semester Examination: Some guidelines for setting the question papers are as:
Weightage of each module in end semester examination is
expected to be/will be proportional to number of respective lecture
hours mentioned in the syllabus.
Question paper will comprise of total six questions , each
carrying 20 marks.
Q.1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of
the syllabus .
Remaining question will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2
has part (a) from module 3 then part (b) will be from any other
module. (Randomly selected from all the modules.)
Total four questions need to be solved.
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 198
Course Code Course Name Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical
& Oral Tutorial Total
ITDLO 7032 Mobile
Application
Development 04 - - 04 - - 04
Course Code Course Name Examination Scheme
Theory Marks
Term
Work Practical
& Oral Oral Total Internal assessment
End
Sem.
Exam Test1 Test2 Avg. of
two
Tests
ITDLO 7032 Mobile
Application
Development 20 20 20 80 - - -- 100
Course Objectives: Students will try:
1. To introduce Android platform and its architecture.
2. To learn activity creation and Android UI designing.
3. To be familiarized with Intent, Broadcast receivers and Internet services.
4. To work with SQLite Database and content providers.
5. To integrate multimedia, camera and Location based services in Android Application.
6. To explore Mobile security issues.
Course Outcomes: Students will be able to :
1. Describe Android platform, Architecture and features.
2. Design User Interface and develop activity for Android App.
3. Use Intent , Broadcast receivers and I nternet services in Android App.
4. Design and implement Database Application and Content providers .
5. Use multimedia, camera and Location based services in Android App.
6. Discuss various security issues in Android platform.
Prerequisite: Internet Programming , Database Management System.
Detailed syllabus:
Sr.
No. Module Detailed Content Hours CO
Mapping
0 Prerequisite Basics of HTML5,CSS3 & XML 02 -
I Introduction to
Android and
Architecture of Introduction of Android platform,
Android features ,Android Marketplace,
Evolution of Android OS, Android 07 CO1
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 199
Android Application Architecture, Developing
for Android, Developing for Mobile and
Embedded Devices, Android
Development Tools
II Applications,
Activities and
Building User
Interface Application: Application Manifest
File,Externalizing Resources,Android
Application Lifecycle and Android
Application Class.
Android Activity: Creating activities,
Activity lifecycle and Android Activity
classes.
User Interface:Fundamental Android UI
Design, Layouts, Fragments, Designing
UI with views, Creating new views,
widget toolbox, Adapters. 09 CO2
III Intents, Broad cast
receiver and
Internet Resources Introducing Intents, Linking Activities
Using intents , Calling Built -in
Applications Using intents , Displaying
notifications, Creating Intent Filters and
Broadcast Receivers,Downloading and
Parsing Internet Resources,Using the
Download Manager,Internet Services,
Connecting to Google App Engine,
Downloading Data Without Draining
the Battery 09 CO3
IV Data Persistence
and Content
Providers Introducing Android
Databases,Introducing SQLite, Content
Values and Cursors,Working with
SQLite Databases,Parsing an
XMLdocument ,Parsing JSON data .
Creating Content Providers,
Using Content Providers,Adding Search
to Your Application,Native Android
Content Providers 09 CO4
V Audio, Video
,Camera, Maps,
Geocoding and
Location Based
services Playing Audio and Video,Manipulating
Raw Audio,Using Audio , Using the
Camera for Taking Pictures,Recording
Video,Using Media Effects ,Adding
Media to the Media Store.
Using Location -Based Services ,Using
the Emulator with Location -Based
Services,Selecting a Location
Provider,Finding Your Current
Location, Location Updates,Proximity
Alerts,Geocoder, Map -Based
Activities,Displaying Maps 08 CO5
VI Securing and
Publishing
Android
Application Android Security Model,Android’s
Manifest Permissions,Mobile Security
Issues,Recent Android Attacks,Pen
Testing Android.
Preparing for Publishing, Deploying 08 CO6
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 200
APK Files
Text Books:
1. Professional Android 4 Application Development,Retomeier, by wrox publication,
2. Android Security –attack and defenses, AbhishekDubey and AnmolMisra by CRC Press
3. Beginning Android Application Development, Wei -meng lee, by wrox publication
References:
1. Android Application Development For Dummies, 2nd Edition by Michael Burton, DonnFe lker
2. Android Cookbook by o’reilly
Assessment:
Internal Assessment for 20 marks:
Consisting of Two Compulsory Class Tests
Approximately 40% to 50% of syllabus content must be covered in First test and remaining 40% to
50% of syllabus contents must be covered in second test.
End Semester Examination: Some guidelines for setting the question papers are as:
Weightage of each module in end semester examination is
expected to be/will be proportional to number of respective lecture
hours mentioned in the s yllabus.
Question paper will comprise of total six questions , each
carrying 20 marks.
Q.1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of
the syllabus .
Remaining question will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2
has part (a) from module 3 then part (b) will be from any other
module. (Randomly selected from all the modules.)
Total four questions need to be solved.
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 201
Course Code Course Name Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical/
Oral Tutorial Total
ITDLO 7033
High Performance
Computing
04 -- - 04 -- - 04
Course
Code Course
Name Examination Scheme
Theory Marks
Term
Work Practical &
oral Oral Total Internal assessment
End
Sem.
Exam Test1 Test2 Avg. of
two
Tests
ITDLO 7033
High
Performance
Computing
20 20 20 80 -- -- -- 100
Course Objectives: Students will try to:
1. Learn the concepts of parallel processing as it pertains to high -performance computing.
2. Learn to design parallel programs on high performance computing.
3. Discuss issues of parallel programming.
4. Learn the concepts of message passing paradigm using open source APIs.
5. Learn different open source tools.
6. Learn the concepts of Multi -core processor.
Course Outcomes: Students will be able to:
1. Memorize parallel processing approaches
2. Describe different parallel processing platforms involved in achieving High Performance
Computing.
3. Discuss different design issues in parallel programming
4. Develop efficient and high performance parallel programming
5. Learn parallel programming using message passing paradigm u sing open source APIs.
6. Design algorithms suited for Multicore processor and GPU systems using OpenMP and
CUDA
Prerequisite: Computer Organization
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 202
Detail Syllabus:
Sr.
No. Module Detailed Content Hours CO
mapping
1 Introduction Introduction to Parallel Computing: Motivating
Parallelism, Scope of Parallel Computing, Levels
of parallelism (instruction, transaction, task,
thread, memory, function), Models (SIMD,
MIMD, SIMT, SPMD, Dataflow Models,
Demand -driven Computation), Parallel
Architectures: Interconnection network, Processor
Array, Multiprocessor
7 CO1
2 Parallel
Programming
Platforms Parallel Programming Platforms: Implicit
Parallelism: Trends in Microprocessor &
Architectures, Limitations of Memory System
Performance, Dichotomy of Parallel Computing
Platforms, Physical Organization of Parallel
Platforms, Communication Costs in Parallel
Machines 7 CO2
3 Parallel
Algorithm
Design Principles of Parallel Algorithm Design:
Preliminaries, Decomposition Techniques,
Characteristics of Tasks and Interactions, Mapping
Techniques for Load Balancing, Methods for
Containing Interaction Overheads, Parallel
Algorithm Models, Basic Communication
operations: Broadcast and Reduction
Communication types 12 CO3
4 Performance
Measures Performance Measures : Speedup, execution time,
efficiency, cost, scalability, Effect of granularity
on performance, Scalability of Parallel Systems,
Amdahl’s Law, Gustavson’s Law, Performance
Bottlenecks 5 CO4
5 Fundamental
Design Issues in
HPC Programming Using the Message -Passing
Paradigm: Principles of Message Passing
Programming, The Building Blocks: Send and
Receive Operations, MPI: the Message Passing
Interface, Topology and Embedding, Overlapping
Communication with Computation, Collective
Communication and Co mputation Operations, 12 CO5
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 203
One-Dimensional Matrix -Vector Multiplication,
Single -Source Shortest -Path, Sample Sort, Groups
and Communicators, Two -Dimensional Matrix -
Vector Multiplication, Introduction to OpenMP,
6 General Purpose
Graphics
Processing
Unit(GPGPU) CUDA enabled GPGPU, GPGPU architecture,
GPGPU programming using CUDA, Introduction
to CUDA Programming 9 CO6
Text Books:
1. AnanthGrama, Anshul Gupta, George Karypis, Vipin Kumar , “Introduction to Parallel
Computing”, Pearson Education, Second Edition, 2007.
2. Kai Hwang, Naresh Jotwani, “Advanced Computer Architecture: Parallelism, Scalability,
Programmability”, McGraw Hill, Second Edition, 2010.
3. Edward Kandrot and Jason Sanders, “CUDA by Example – An Introduction to General
Purpose GPU Programming”, Addison -Wesley Professional ©, 2010.
4. Georg Hager, Gerhard Wellein, “Introduction to High Performance Computing for Scientists
and Engineers", Chapman & Hall / CRC Computational Science series, 2011.
Reference Books:
1. Michael J. Quinn, “Parall el Programming in C with MPI and OpenMP”, McGraw -Hill
International Editions, Computer Science Series, 2008.
2. Kai Hwang, Zhiwei Xu, “Scalable Parallel Computing: Technology, Architecture,
Programming”, McGraw Hill, 1998.
3. Laurence T. Yang, MinyiGuo, “High - Performance Computing: Paradigm and Infrastructure”
Wiley, 2006.
Assessment:
Internal Assessment for 20 marks:
Consisting of Two Compulsory Class Tests
Approximately 40% to 50% of syllabus content must be covered in First test and remaining 40% to
50% of syllabus contents must be covered in second test.
End Semester Examination: Some guidelines for setting the question papers are as:
Weightage of each module in end semester examination is
expected to be/will be proportional to number of respective lectur e
hours mentioned in the syllabus.
Question paper will comprise of total six questions , each
carrying 20 marks.
Q.1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of
the syllabus .
Remaining question will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2
has pa rt (a) from module 3 then part (b) will be from any other
module. (Randomly selected from all the modules.)
Total four questions need to be solved.
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 204
Course Code Course
Name Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical
/Oral Tutorial Total
ITDLO 7034 Software
Testing and
Quality
Assurance 04 -- -- 04 -- -- 04
Course Code Course
Name Examination Scheme
Theory Marks
Term
Work Practical
& Oral Oral Total Internal assessment End
Sem.
Exam Test1 Test2 Avg. of
two Tests
ITDLO 7034 Software
Testing
and
Quality
Assurance
20 20 20 80 -- -- -- 100
Course Objectives: Students will try to learn:
1 Basic software debugging methods.
2 White box testing methods and techniques.
3 Black Box testing methods and techniques.
4 Designing test plans.
5 Different testing tools ( familiar with open source tools )
6 Quality Assurance models.
Course Outcomes: Students will be able to:
1. Investigate the reason for bugs and analyze the principles in software testing to prevent and
remove bugs.
2. Implement variou s test processes for quality improvement
3. Design test planning.
4. Manage the test process
5. Apply the software testing techniques in commercial environment
6. Use practical knowledge of a variety of ways to test software and an und erstanding of some of
the trade -offs between testing techniques.
Prerequisite: Software Engineering.
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 205
Detailed syllabus:
Sr.
No. Module Detailed Content Hours CO
Mapping
0 Prerequisite Software Engineering Concepts 02 --
I Testing
Methodology Introduction, Goals of Software
Testing, Software Testing Definitions,
Model for Software Testing, Effective
Software Testing vs Exhaustive
Software Testing, Software Failure
Case Studies, Software Testing
Terminology, Software Testing Life
Cycle (STLC), S oftware Testing
methodology, Verification and
Validation, Verification requirements,
Verification of high level design,
Verification of low level design,
validation. 09 CO1
II Testing
Techniques Dynamic Testing: Black Box testing:
boundary value analysis, equivalence
class testing, state table based testing,
cause -effect graphing based testing,
error guessing.
White box Testing Techniques: need,
logic coverage criteria, basis path
testing, graph matrices, loop testing,
data flow testing, mutation testing.
Static Testing.
Validation Activities: Unit validation,
Integration, Function, System,
Acceptance Testing.
Regression Testing: Progressive vs.
Regressive, regression testing produces
quality software, regression testability,
objectives of regression testing,
regression testing types, define
problem, regression testing techniques. 08 CO2
CO3
III Managing the Test
Process Test Management: test organization,
structure and of testing group, test
planning, detailed test design and test
specification.
Software Metrics: need, definition and
classification of software matrices.
Testing Metrics for Monitoring and
Controlling the Testing Process:
attributes and corresponding metrics,
estimation model for testing effort,
architectural design, information flow 08 CO4
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 206
matrix used for testing, function point
and test point analysis.
Efficient Test Suite Management:
minimizing the test suite and its
benefits, test suite minimization
problem, test suite prioritization its
type , techniques and measuring
effectiveness.
IV Test Automation Automation and Testing Tools: need,
categorization, selection and cost in
testing tool, guidelines for testing tools.
Study of testing tools: JIRA, Bugzilla,
TestDirector and IBM Rational
Functional Tester, Selenium etc. 09 CO1
CO5
V Testing for
specialized
environment Agile Testing, Agile Testing Life
Cycle, Testing in Scrum phases,
Challenges in Agile Testing
Testing Web based Systems: Web
based system, web technology
evaluation, traditional software and
web based software, challenges in
testing for web based software, testing
web based testing 08 CO2
CO3
VI Quality
Management Software Quality Management,
McCall’s quality factors and Criteria,
ISO 9126 quality characteristics,
ISO9000:2000, Software quality
management 06 CO6
Text Books :
1. Software Testing Principles and Practices Naresh Chauhan Oxford Higher Education
2. Software Testing and quality assurance theory and practice by Kshirasagar Naik, Priyadarshi
Tripathy , Wiley Publication
References :
1. Effective Methods for Software Testing , third edition by Willam E. Perry, Wiley
Publication
2. Software Testing Concepts and Tools by Nageswara Rao Pusuluri , Dreamtech press
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 207
Assessment:
Internal Assessment for 20 marks:
Consisting of Two Compulsory Class Tests
Approximately 40% to 50% of syllabus content must be covered in First test and remaining 40% to
50% of syllabus contents must be covered in second test.
End Semester Examination: Some guidelines for setting the question papers are as:
Weightage of each module in end semester examination is
expected to be/will be proportional to number of respective lecture
hours mentioned in the syllabus.
Question paper will comprise of total six questions , each
carrying 20 marks.
Q.1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of
the syllabus .
Remaining question will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2
has part (a) from module 3 then part (b) will be from any other
module. (Randomly selected from all the modules.)
Total four quest ions need to be solved.
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 208
Course
Code Course
Name Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical
/Oral Tutorial Total
ITDLO 7035 Soft
Computing 04 -- 01 04 -- -- 04
Subject
Code Subject
Name Examination Scheme
Theory Marks
Term
Work Practical
& Oral Oral Total Internal assessment End
Sem.
Exam Test1 Test2 Avg. of
two Tests
ITDLO 7035 Soft
Computing 20 20 20 80 -- -- -- 100
Course Objectives: Students will try:
1. To familiarize with soft computing concepts.
2. To introduce the fuzzy logic concepts, fuzzy principles and relations.
3. To Basics of ANN and Learning Algorithms.
4. Ann as function approximation.
5. Genetic Algorithm and its applications to soft computing.
6. Hybrid system usage, application and opti mization.
Course Outcomes: Students will be able to:
1. List the facts and outline the different process carried out in fuzzy logic, ANN and Genetic
Algorithms.
2. Explain the concepts and meta -cognitive of soft computing.
3. Apply Soft computing tech niques the solve character recognition, pattern classification, regression
and similar problems.
4. Outline facts to identify process/procedures to handle real world problems using soft computing.
5. Evaluate various techniques of soft computing to defend the best working solutions.
6. Design hybrid system to revise the principles of soft computing in various applications.
Prerequisite: NIL
Detailed syllabus:
Sr.
No. Module Detailed Content Hours CO
Mapping
0 Prerequisite Probability and Statistics, C++/Java/ Matlab 02
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 209
programming.
I Fuzzy Set
Theory Fuzzy Sets:
Basic definition and terminology, Basic concepts of
fuzzy sets, Fuzzy set operations,
Fuzzy relations:
Cardinality of fuzzy relations, operations on fuzzy
relations, properties of fuzzy relations, Fuzzy
composition
Fuzzification and Defuzzification:
Features of the membership Functions, Fuzzification,
Lambda -Cuts for Fuzzy Sets, Lambda -Cuts for Fuzzy
Relations, Defuzzification methods 06 CO1
CO2
II Fuzzy Rules,
Reasoning,
and Inference
System Fuzzy Rules: Fuzzy If -Then Rules, Fuzzy Reasoning
Fuzzy Inference System ( FIS): Mamdani FIS, Sugeno
FIS, Comparison between , Mamdani and Sugeno FIS . 06 CO1
CO2
III Neural
Network -I Introduction:
What is a Neural network? Fundamental Concepts, Basic
Models of Artificial Neural Networks, Arificial
Intelligence and Neural Networks, McCulloch -Pitts
Neuron
Learning:
Error -Correction Learning, Memory based Learning,
Hebbian learning, Competitive Learning, Boltzmann
Learning
Perceprton:
Perceprton Learning Rule, Perceptron Learning
Algorithm, Perceprton Convergence Theorem,
Perceptron learning and Non -separable sets. 09 CO1
CO2
IV Neural
Networks -II Back propaggation:
Multilayered Network Architecture, Back porpagation
Algorithm, Practical Consideration in impin
Implementing the Back propagation Algorithm. Back
propagation and XOR problem.
Adaptive resonance Theory:
Noise -Saturation Dilemma, Solving the Noise -Saturation
Dilemma, Recurrent On -center -Off-surround Networks,
Building blocks of Adaptive Resonance, Substrate of
resonance, Structural details of the resonance Model,
Adaptive Resonance Theory I (ART I),
Neurophysiological Evidence for ART Mechanism
Character Recognition:
Introduction,
General Algorithm Architecture for Character
Recognition: Binarization, Preprocessing, Filters,
Smoothing, Skew Detection and Correction, Slant
Correction, Character Normalization, Thinning,
Segmentation,
Multilingual OCR by Rule -Based Approach and ANN 10 CO3
CO6
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 210
Rule-Based Approach: Classification, Tests, Rules
Artificial Neural Network: Inputs, Outputs, Identification
Results of Multilingual OCR
V Genetic
Algorithm An Introduction to genetic Algorithms:
What Are Genetic Algorithms? Robustness of Traditional
Optimization and Search Methods, The Goals of
Optimization, How Are Genetic Algorithms Different from
Traditional Methods?, A Simple Genetic Algorithm
Genetic Algorithms at Work —a Simulation by hand, Grist
for the Search Mill —Important Similarities, Similarity
Template s (Schemata), Learning the Lingo.
Genetic Algorithms: Mathematical Foundations
Who Shall Live and Who Shall Die? The Fundamental
Theorem, Schema Processing at Work: An Example by
Hand Revisited, The Two -armed and й -armed Bandit
Problem, How Many Schemata Are Processed Usefully?
The Building Block Hypothesis, Another Perspective: The
Minimal Deceptive Problem, Schemata Revisited:
Similarity Templates as Hyperplanes,
Implementation of a Genetic Algorithm:
Data Structures, Reproduction, Crossover, and Mutati on, A
Time to Reproduce, a Time to Cross, Get with the Main
Program, How Well Does it Work? Mapping Objective
Functions to Fitness Form, Fitness Scaling, Codings, A
Multiparameter, Mapped, Fixed -Point Coding,
Discretization, Constraints.
Algorithm for Ha ndwriting Recognition Using GA
Generation of Graph,
Fitness Function of GA: Deviation between Two Edges,
Deviation of a Graph,
Crossover: Matching of Points, Generate Adjacency
Matrix, Find Paths, Removing and Adding Edges,
Generation of Graph
Results o f Handwriting Recognition: Effect of Genetic
Algorithms, Distance Optimization, Style Optimization
10 CO1
CO3
CO6
VI Hybrid
Computing Introduction, Neuro -Fuzzy Hybrid Systems,
Adaptive Neuro -Fuzzy Inference System (ANIFS):
Introduction, ANFS Architecture, Hybrid Learning
Algorithm, ANFIS as a Universal Approximator,
Simulation Examples: Two -input Sinc Function and Three
Input Nonlinear Function
Genetic Neuro -Hybrid Systems:
Properties of Genetic Neuro -Hybrid Systems, genetic
Algorithm based B ack-propagation Network, Advantages
of Neuro -Genetic Hybrids,
Genetic Fuzzy Hybrid and Fuzzy Genetic Hybrid Systems
Genetic Fuzzy Rule based Systems, Advantages of Genetic
Fuzzy Hybrids
09 CO4
CO6
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 211
Text Books:
1. . S.N. Sivanandan and S.N. Deepa, Principles of Soft Computing, Wiley India, 2007, ISBN: 10: 81 -
265-1075 -7.
2. J. -S. R. Jang, C. –T. Sun, E. Mizutani, Neuro -Fuzzy and Soft Computing, A Computational
Approach to Learning and Machine Intelligence, PHI Learning Private Limited -2014
3. Neural Networks: A Classroom Approach, Satish Kumar, Tata McGraw -Hill Education, 2004/ 2007
4. Simon Haykin, Neural Networks A Comprehensive Foundation, Second Edition, Pearson
Education -2004
5. David E. Goldberg, Genetic Algorithms, in search, optimization and M achine Learning, Pearson
References:
1. Anupam Shukla, Ritu Tiwari, Rahul Kala, Real Life Applications of Soft Computing, CRC Press,
Taylor & Francis Group, 2010.
2. Genetic Algorithms and Genetic Programming Modern Concepts and Practical Applications © 2009
Michael Affenzeller, Stephan Winkler, Stefan Wagner, and Andreas Beham, CRC Press
3. Laurene V. Fausett, Fundamentals of Neural Networks: Architectures, Algorithms And
Applications, Pearson
Assessment:
Internal Assessment for 20 marks:
Consisting of Two Compulsory Class Tests
Approximately 40% to 50% of syllabus content must be covered in First test and remaining 40% to
50% of syllabus contents must be covered in second test.
End Semester Examination: Some guidelines for setting the qu estion papers are as:
Weightage of each module in end semester examination is
expected to be/will be proportional to number of respective lecture
hours mentioned in the syllabus.
Question paper will comprise of total six questions , each
carrying 20 marks.
Q.1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of
the syllabus .
Remaining question will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2
has part (a) from module 3 then part (b) will be from any other
module. (Randomly selected from all the modules.)
Total four questions need to be solved.
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 212
Course Code Course Name Credits
ILO7 011 Product Life Cycle Management 03
Course Objectives: Students will try :
1. To familiarize the students with the need, benefits and components of PLM
2. To acquaint students with Product Data Management & PLM strategies
3. To give insights into new product development program and guidelines for designing and
developing a product
4. To familiarize the students with Virtual Product Development
Course Outcomes: Students will be able to :
1. Gain knowledge about phases of PLM, PLM strategies and methodology for PLM feasibility
study and PDM implementation.
2. Illustrate various approaches and techniques for designing and developing products.
3. Apply product engineering guidelines / thumb rules in designing products for moulding,
machining, sheet metal working etc.
4. Acquire knowledge in applying virtual product development tools for components, machining
and manufacturing plant
Module Detailed Contents Hrs
01 Introduction to Product Lifecycle Management (PLM): Product Lifecycle
Management (PLM), Need for PLM, Product Lifecycle Phases, Opportunities of
Globalization, Pre -PLM Environment, PLM Paradigm, Importance & Benefits
of PLM, Widespread Impact of PLM, Focus and Application, A PLM Project,
Starting the PLM Initiative, PLM Applications
PLM Strategies: Industrial strategies, Strategy elements, its identification,
selection and implementation, Developing PLM Vision and PLM Strategy ,
Change management for PLM 10
02 ProductDesign: Product Design and Development Process, Engineering Design,
Organization and Decomposition in Product Design, Typologies of Design
Process Models, Reference Model, Product Design in the Context of the Product
Development Process, Relation with the Development Process Planning Phase,
Relation with the Post design Planning Phase, Methodological Evolution in
Product Design, Concurrent Engineering, Characteristic Features of Concurrent
Engineering, Concurrent Engineering and Life Cycle Approac h, New Product
Development (NPD) and Strategies, Product Configuration and Variant
Management, The Design for X System, Objective Properties and Design for X
Tools, Choice of Design for X Tools and Their Use in the Design Process 09
03 Product Data Manage ment (PDM): Product and Product Data, PDM systems
and importance, Components of PDM, Reason for implementing a PDM system,
financial justification of PDM, barriers to PDM implementation 05
04 Virtual Product Development Tools: For components, machines, and
manufacturing plants, 3D CAD systems and realistic rendering techniques, 05
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 213
Digital mock -up, Model building, Model analysis, Modeling and simulations in
Product Design, Examples/Case studies
05 Integration of Environmental As pects in Product Design: Sustainable
Development, Design for Environment,Need for Life Cycle Environmental
Strategies, Useful Life Extension Strategies, End -of-Life Strategies, Introduction
of Environmental Strategies into the Design Process, Life Cycle Env ironmental
Strategies and Considerations for Product Design 05
06 Life Cycle Assessment and Life Cycle Cost Analysis: Properties, and
Framework of Life Cycle Assessment, Phases of LCA in ISO Standards, Fields
of Application and Limitations of Life Cycle As sessment, Cost Analysis and the
Life Cycle Approach, General Framework for LCCA, Evolution of Models for
Product Life Cycle Cost Analysis 05
Assessment :
Internal:
Assessment consists of two tests out of which; one should be compulsory class test and the other is
either a class test or assignment on live problems or course project.
End Semester Theory Examination:
Some guidelines for setting up the question paper.Minimum 80% syllabus should be covered in
question papers of end semester examination. In question paper weightage of each module will be
proportional to number of respective lecture hours as mention in the syllabus.
1. Question paper will comprise of total six question
2. All question carry equal marks
3. Questions will be mixed in nature (for examp le supposed Q.2 has part (a) from module 3 then
part (b) will be from any module other than module 3)
4. Only Four question need to be solved.
REFERENCES:
1. John Stark, “Product Lifecycle Management: Paradigm for 21st Century Product Realisation”,
Springer -Verlag, 2004. ISBN: 1852338105
2. Fabio Giudice, Guido La Rosa, AntoninoRisitano, “Product Design for the environment -A life
cycle approach”, Taylor & Francis 2006, ISBN: 0849327229
3. SaaksvuoriAntti, ImmonenAnselmie, “Product Life Cycle Management”, Springer, Dreamtech,
ISBN: 3540257314
4. Michael Grieve, “Product Lifecycle Management: Driving the next generation of lean
thinking”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2006, ISBN: 0070636265
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 214
Course Code Course Name Credits
ILO7012 Reliability Engineering 03
Objectives:
1. To familiarize the students with various aspects of probability theory
2. To acquaint the students with reliability and its concepts
3. To introduce the students to methods of estimating the system reliability of simple and
complex systems
4. To understand the various aspects of Maintainability, Availability and FMEA procedure
Outcomes: Learner will be able to…
1. Understand and apply the concept of Probability to engineering problems
2. Apply various reliability concepts to calculate different reliability parameters
3. Estimate the system reliability of simple and complex systems
4. Carry out a Failure Mode Effect and Criticality Analysis
Module Detailed Contents Hrs
01 Probability theory: Probability: Standard definitions and concepts; Conditional
Probability, Baye’s Theorem.
Probability Distributions: Central tendency and Dispersion; Binomial, Normal,
Poisson, Weibull, Exponential, relations between them and their significance.
Measures of Dispersion: Mean, Median, Mode, Range, Mean Deviation,
Standard Deviation, Vari ance, Skewness and Kurtosis. 08
02 Reliability Concepts: Reliability definitions, Importance of Reliability, Quality
Assurance and Reliability, Bath Tub Curve.
Failure Data Analysis: Hazard rate, failure density, Failure Rate, Mean Time
To Failure (MTTF), MTBF, Reliability Functions.
Reliability Hazard Models: Constant Failure Rate, Linearly increasing, Time
Dependent Failure Rate, Weibull Model. Distribution functions and reliability
analysis. 08
03 System Reliability: System Configurations: Series, parallel, mixed
configuration, k out of n structure, Complex systems. 05
04 Reliability Improvement: Redundancy Techniques: Element redundancy, Unit
redundancy, Standby redundancies. Markov analysis.
System Reliability Analysis – Enumeration method, Cut -set method, Success
Path method, Decomposition method. 08
05 Maintainability and Availability: System downtime, Design for
Maintainability: Maintenance requirements, Design methods: Fault Isolation and
self-diagnostics, Parts standardization and Interchangeability, Modularization
and Accessibility, Repair Vs Replacement.
Availability – qualitative aspects. 05
06 Failure Mode, Effects and Criticality Analysis: Failure mode effects analysis,
severity/criticality analysis, FMECA examples. Fault tree construction, basic
symbols, development of functional reliability block diagram, Fau1t tree
analysis and Event tree Analysis 05
Assessment :
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 215
Internal:
Assessment consists of two tests out of which; one should be compulsory class test and the other is
either a class test or assignment on live problems or course project.
End Semester Theory Examination:
Some guidelines for setting up the question paper. Minimum 80% syllabus should be covered in
question papers of end semester examination. In question paper weightage of each module will be
proportional to number of respective lecture hours as mention in the syllabus.
1. Question paper will comprise of total six question
2. All question carry equal marks
3. Questions will be mixed in nature (for example supposed Q.2 has part (a) from module 3 then
part (b) will be from any module other than module 3)
4. Only Four question need to be solved.
REFERENCES:
1. L.S. Srinath, “Reliability Engineering”, Aff iliated East -Wast Press (P) Ltd., 1985.
2. Charles E. Ebeling, “Reliability and Maintainability Engineering”, Tata McGraw Hill.
3. B.S. Dhillion, C. Singh, “Engineering Reliability”, John Wiley & Sons, 1980.
4. P.D.T. Conor, “Practical Reliability Engg.”, John Wile y & Sons, 1985.
5. K.C. Kapur, L.R. Lamberson, “Reliability in Engineering Design”, John Wiley & Sons.
6. Murray R. Spiegel, “Probability and Statistics”, Tata McGraw -Hill Publishing Co. Ltd.
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 216
Course Code Course Name Credits
ILO7013 Management Information System 03
Objectives:
1. The course is blend of Management and Technical field.
2. Discuss the roles played by information technology in today’s business and define various
technology architectures on which information systems are built
3. Define and analyze typi cal functional information systems and identify how they meet the
needs of the firm to deliver efficiency and competitive advantage
4. Identify the basic steps in systems development
Outcomes: Learner will be able to…
1. Explain how information systems Transform Business
2. Identify the impact information systems have on an organization
3. Describe IT infrastructure and its components and its current trends
4. Understand the principal tools and technologies for accessing information from databases to
improve business per formance and decision making
5. Identify the types of systems used for enterprise -wide knowledge management and how they
provide value for businesses
Module Detailed Contents Hrs
01 Introduction To Information Systems (IS): Computer Based Information
Systems, Impact of IT on organizations, Imporance of IS to Society.
Organizational Strategy, Competitive Advantages and IS. 4
02 Data and Knowledge Management: Database Approach, Big Data, Data
warehouse and Data Marts, Knowledge Management.
Business intelligence (BI): Managers and Decision Making, BI for Data analysis
and Presenting Results 7
03 Ethical issues and Privacy: Information Security. Threat to IS, and Security
Controls 7
04 Social Computing (SC): Web 2.0 and 3.0, SC in business -shopping, Marketing,
Operational and Analytic CRM, E -business and E -commerce – B2B B2C.
Mobile commerce. 7
05 Computer Networks Wired and Wireless technology, Pervasive computing,
Cloud computing model. 6
06 Information System within Organization: Transaction Processing Systems,
Functional Area Information System, ERP and ERP support of Business Process.
Acquiring Information Systems and Applications: Various System development
life cycl e models. 8
Assessment :
Internal:
Assessment consists of two tests out of which; one should be compulsory class test and the other is
either a class test or assignment on live problems or course project.
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 217
End Semester Theory Examination:
Some guidelines for setting up the question paper. Minimum 80% syllabus should be covered in
question papers of end semester examination. In question paper weightage of each module will be
proportional to number of respective lecture hours as mention in th e syllabus.
1. Question paper will comprise of total six question
2. All question carry equal marks
3. Questions will be mixed in nature (for example supposed Q.2 has part (a) from module 3 then
part (b) will be from any module other than module 3)
4. Only Four quest ion need to be solved.
REFERENCES:
1. Kelly Rainer, Brad Prince,Management Information Systems, Wiley
2. K.C. Laudon and J.P. Laudon, Management Information Systems: Managing the Digital Firm,
10th Ed., Prentice Hall, 2007.
3. D. Boddy, A. Boonstra, Managing Information Systems: Strategy and Organization, Prentice
Hall, 2008
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 218
Course Code Course Name Credits
ILO7014 Design of Experiments 03
Objectives:
1. To understand the issues and principles of Design of Experiments (DOE)
2. To list the guidelines for designing experiments
3. To become familiar with methodologies that can be used in conjunction with experimental
designs for robustness and optimization
Outcomes: Learner will be able to…
1. Plan data collection, to turn data into information and to make decisi ons that lead to appropriate
action
2. Apply the methods taught to real life situations
3. Plan, analyze, and interpret the results of experiments
Module Detailed Contents Hrs
01 Introduction
1.1 Strategy of Experimentation
1.2 Typical Applications of Experimental Design
1.3 Guidelines for Designing Experiments
1.4 Response Surface Methodology 06
02 Fitting Regression Models
2.1 Linear Regression Models
2.2 Estimation of the Parameters in Linear Regression Models
2.3 Hypothesis Testing in Multiple Regression
2.4 Confidence Intervals in Multiple Regression
2.5 Prediction of new response observation
2.6 Regression model diagnostics
2.7 Testing for lack of fit 08
03 Two -Level Factorial Designs
3.1 The 22 Design
3.2 The 23 Design
3.3 The General2k Design
3.4 A Single Replicate of the 2k Design
3.5 The Addition of Center Points to the 2k Design,
3.6 Blocking in the 2k Factorial Design
3.7 Split -Plot Designs 07
04 Two -Level Fractional Factorial Designs
4.1 The One -Half Fraction of the 2k Design
4.2 The One -Quarter Fraction of the 2k Design
4.3 The General 2k-p Fractional Factorial Design
4.4 Resolution III Designs
4.5 Resolution IV and V Designs
4.6 Fractional Factorial Split -Plot Designs 07
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 219
05 Response Surface Methods and Designs
5.1 Introduction to Response Surface Methodology
5.2 The Method of Steepest Ascent
5.3 Analysis of a Second -Order Response Surface
5.4 Experimental Designs for Fitting Response Surfaces 07
06 Taguchi Approach
6.1 Crossed Array Designs and Signal -to-Noise Ratios
6.2 Analysis Methods
6.3 Robust design examples 04
Assessment :
Internal:
Assessment consists of two tests out of which; one should be compulsory class test and the other is
either a class test or assignment on live problems or course project.
End Semester Theory Examination:
Some guidelines for setting up the question paper. Minimum 80% syllabus should be covered in
question papers of end semester examination. In question paper weightage of each module will be
proportional to number of respec tive lecture hours as mention in the syllabus.
1. Question paper will comprise of total six question
2. All question carry equal marks
3. Questions will be mixed in nature (for example supposed Q.2 has part (a) from module 3 then
part (b) will be from any module o ther than module 3)
4. Only Four question need to be solved.
REFERENCES:
1. Raymond H. Mayers, Douglas C. Montgomery, Christine M. Anderson -Cook, Response
Surface Methodology: Process and Product Optimization using Designed Experiment, 3rd
edition, John Wile y & Sons, New York, 2001
2. D.C. Montgomery, Design and Analysis of Experiments, 5th edition, John Wiley & Sons, New
York, 2001
3. George E P Box, J Stuart Hunter, William G Hunter, Statics for Experimenters: Design,
Innovation and Discovery, 2nd Ed. Wiley
4. W J D imond, Peactical Experiment Designs for Engineers and Scintists, John Wiley and Sons
Inc. ISBN: 0 -471-39054 -2
5. Design and Analysis of Experiments (Springer text in Statistics), Springer by A.M. Dean, and
D. T.Voss
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 220
Course Code Course Name Credits
ILO7015 Operations Research 03
Objectives:
1. Formulate a real -world problem as a mathematical programming model.
2. Understand the mathematical tools that are needed to solve optimization problems.
3. Use mathematical software to solve the proposed models.
Outcomes: Learner will be able to…
1. Understand the theoretical workings of the simplex method, the relationship between a linear
program and its dual, including strong duality and complementary slackness.
2. Perform sensitivity analysis to determine the direction and magnitude of change of a model’s
optimal solution as the data change.
3. Solve specialized linear programming problems like the transportation and assignment
problems, solve network models like the shortest path, minimum spanning tree, and maximum
flow problems.
4. Understand the applications of integer programming and a queuing model and compute
important performance measures
Module Detailed Contents Hrs
01 Introduction to Operations Research : Introduction, , Structure of the
Mathematical Model, Limitations of Operations Research
Linear Programming : Introduction, Linear Programming Problem,
Requirements of LPP, Mathematical Formulation of LPP, Graphical method,
Simplex Method Penalty Cost Met hod or Big M -method, Two Phase Method,
Revised simplex method, Duality , Primal – Dual construction, Symmetric and
Asymmetric Dual, Weak Duality Theorem, Complimentary Slackness Theorem,
Main Duality Theorem, Dual Simplex Method, Sensitivity Analysis
Transportation Problem : Formulation, solution, unbalanced Transportation
problem. Finding basic feasible solutions – Northwest corner rule, least cost
method and Vogel’s approximation method. Optimality test: the stepping stone
method and MODI method.
Assignment Problem : Introduction, Mathematical Formulation of the Problem,
Hungarian Method Algorithm, Processing of n Jobs Through Two Machines
and m Machines, Graphical Method of Two Jobs m Machines Problem Routing
Problem, Travelling Salesman Problem
Integer Programming Problem : Introduction, Types of Integer Programming
Problems, Gomory’s cutting plane Algorithm, Branch and Bound Technique .
Introduction to Decomposition algorithms. 14
02 Queuing models : queuing systems and structures, single server and multi -server
models, Poisson input, exponential service, constant rate service, finite and
infinite population 05
03 Simulation : Introduction, Methodology of Simulation, Basic Concepts, 05
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 221
Simulation Procedure, Application of Simulation Monte -Carlo Method:
Introduction, Monte -Carlo Simulation, Applications of Simulation, Advantages
of Simulation, Limitations of Simulation
04 Dynamic programming . Characteristics of dynamic programming. Dynamic
programming approach for Priority Management employment smooth ening,
capital budgeting, Stage Coach/Shortest Path, cargo loading and Reliability
problems. 05
05 Game Theory . Competitive games, rectangular game, saddle point, minimax
(maximin) method of optimal strategies, value of the game. Solution of games
with saddle points, dominance principle. Rectangular games without saddle
point – mixed strategy for 2 X 2 games. 05
06 Inventory Models : Classical EOQ Models, EOQ Model with Price Breaks,
EOQ with Shortage, Probabilistic EOQ Model, 05
Assessment :
Internal:
Assessment consists of two tests out of which; one should be compulsory class test and the other is
either a class test or assignment on live problems or course project.
End Semester Theory Examination:
Some guidelines for setting up the que stion paper. Minimum 80% syllabus should be covered in
question papers of end semester examination. In question paper weightage of each module will be
proportional to number of respective lecture hours as mention in the syllabus.
1. Question paper will compri se of total six question
2. All question carry equal marks
3. Questions will be mixed in nature (for example supposed Q.2 has part (a) from module 3 then
part (b) will be from any module other than module 3)
4. Only Four question need to be solved.
REFERENCES:
1. Taha, H.A. "Operations Research - An Introduction", Prentice Hall, (7th Edition), 2002.
2. Ravindran, A, Phillips, D. T and Solberg, J. J. "Operations Research: Principles and Practice",
John Willey and Sons, 2nd Edition, 2009.
3. Hiller, F. S. and Liebermann, G . J. "Introduction to Operations Research", Tata McGraw Hill,
2002.
4. Operations Research, S. D. Sharma, KedarNath Ram Nath -Meerut.
5. Operations Research, KantiSwarup, P. K. Gupta and Man Mohan, Sultan Chand & Sons.
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 222
Course Code Course Name Credits
ILO7 016 Cyber Security and Laws 03
Objectives:
1. To understand and identify different types cybercrime and cyber law
2. To recognized Indian IT Act 2008 and its latest amendments
3. To learn various types of security standards compliances
Outcomes: Learner will be able to…
1. Understand the concept of cybercrime and its effect on outside world
2. Interpret and apply IT law in various legal issues
3. Distinguish different aspects of cyber law
4. Apply Information Security Standards compliance during software design and development
Module Detailed Contents Hrs
01 Introduction to Cybercrime: Cybercrime definition and origins of the world,
Cybercrime and information security, Classifications of cybercrime, Cybercrime
and the
Indian ITA 2000, A global Perspective on cybercrimes. 4
02 Cyber offenses & Cybercrime: How criminal plan the attacks, Social Engg,
Cyber stalking, Cyber café and Cybercrimes, Bot nets, Attack vector, Cloud
computing, Proliferation of Mobile and Wireless Devices, Trends in Mobilit y,
Credit Card Frauds in
Mobile and Wireless Computing Era, Security Challenges Posed by Mobile
Devices, Registry Settings for Mobile Devices, Authentication Service Security,
Attacks on Mobile/Cell Phones, Mobile Devices: Security Implications for
Organiz ations, Organizational Measures for Handling Mobile, Devices -Related
Security Issues, Organizational Security Policies and Measures in Mobile
Computing Era, Laptops 9
03 Tools and Methods Used in Cyber line
Phishing, Password Cracking, Key loggers and Spywares, Virus and Worms,
Steganography, DoS and DDoS Attacks, SQL Injection, Buffer Over Flow,
Attacks on Wireless Networks, Phishing, Identity Theft (ID Theft) 6
04 The Concept of Cyberspace
E-Commerce , The Contract Aspects in Cyber Law ,The Securit y Aspect of
Cyber Law ,The Intellectual Property Aspect in Cyber Law
, The Evidence Aspect in Cyber Law , The Criminal Aspect in Cyber Law,
Global Trends in Cyber Law , Legal Framework for Electronic Data
Interchange Law Relating to Electronic Banking , The Need for an Indian Cyber
Law 8
05 Indian IT Act.
Cyber Crime and Criminal Justice : Penalties, Adjudication and Appeals Under
the IT Act, 2000, IT Act. 2008 and its Amendments 6
06 Information Security Standard compliances
SOX, GLBA, HIPAA, ISO, FISMA, NERC, PCI. 6
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 223
Assessment :
Internal:
Assessment consists of two tests out of which; one should be compulsory class test and the other is
either a class test or assignment on live problems or course project.
End Semester Theory Examination:
Some guidelines for setting up the question paper. Minimum 80% syllabus should be covered in
question papers of end semester examination.
In question paper weightage of each module will be proportional to number of respe ctive lecture
hours as mention in the syllabus.
1. Question paper will comprise of total six question
2. All question carry equal marks
3. Questions will be mixed in nature (for example supposed Q.2 has part (a) from module 3 then
part (b) will be from any module other than module 3)
4. Only Four question need to be solved.
REFERENCES:
1. Nina Godbole, Sunit Belapure, Cyber Security , Wiley India, New Delhi
2. The Indian Cyber Law by Suresh T. Vishwanathan; Bharat Law House New Delhi
3. The Information technology Act, 2000; Bare Act - Professional Book Publishers, New Delhi.
4. Cyber Law & Cyber Crimes By Advocate Prashant Mali; Snow White Publications, Mumbai
5. Nina Godbole, Information Systems Security, Wiley India, New Delhi
6. Kennetch J. Knapp, Cyber Security &Global Information Assurance Information Science
Publishing.
7. William Stallings , Cryptography and Network Security, Pearson Publication
8. Websites for more information is available on : The Information Technology ACT, 2008 -
TIFR : https://www.tifrh.res.in
9. Website for more information , A Compliance Primer for IT professional :
https://www.sans.org/reading -room/whitepapers/compliance/compliance -primer -professionals -
33538
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 224
Course Code Course Name Credits
ILO7017 Disaster Management and Mitigation Measures 03
Objectives:
1. To understand physics and various types of disaster occurring around the world
2. To identify extent and damaging capacity of a disaster
3. To study and understand the means of losses and methods to overcome /minimize it.
4. To understand role of individual and various organization during and after disaster
5. To understand application of GIS in the field of disaster management
6. To understand the emergency government response structures before, during and after
disaster
Outcomes: Le arner will be able to…
1. Get to know natural as well as manmade disaster and their extent and possible effects on
the economy.
2. Plan of national importance structures based upon the previous history.
3. Get acquainted with government policies, acts and various organizational structure
associated with an emergency.
4. Get to know the simple do’s and don’ts in such extreme events and act accordingly.
Module Detailed Contents Hrs
01 Introduction
1.1 Definition of Disaster, hazard, global and Indian scenario, general
perspective, importance of study in human life, Direct and indirect effects of
disasters, long term effects of disasters. Introduction to global warming and
climate change. 03
02 Natural Disaster and Manmade disasters:
2.1 Natural Disaster: Meaning and nature of natural disaster, Flood, Flash flood,
drought, cloud burst, Earthquake, Landslides, Avalanches, Volcanic
eruptions, Mudflow, Cyclone, Storm, Storm Surge, climate change, globa l
warming, sea level rise, ozone depletion
2.2 Manmade Disasters: Chemical, Industrial, Nuclear and Fire Hazards. Role of
growing population and subsequent industrialization, urbanization and
changing lifestyle of human beings in frequent occurrences of manma de
disasters. 09
03 Disaster Management, Policy and Administration
3.1 Disaster management: meaning, concept, importance, objective of disaster
management policy, disaster risks in India, Paradigm shift in disaster
management.
3.2 Policy and administration:
Importance and principles of disaster management policies, command and
co-ordination of in disaster management, rescue operations -how to start with
and how to proceed in due course of time, study of flowchart showing the
entire process. 06
04 Institutional Framework for Disaster Management in India:
4.1 Importance of public awareness, Preparation and execution of emergency
management programme.Scope and responsibilities of National Institute of
Disaster Management (NIDM) and National disaster management authority
(NDMA) in India.Methods and measures to avoid disasters, Management of 06
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 225
casualties, set up of emergency facilities, importance of effective
communication amongst different agencies in such situations.
4.2 Use of Internet and softwares for effective disaster management.
Applications of GIS, Re mote sensing and GPS in this regard.
05 Financing Relief Measures:
5.1 Ways to raise finance for relief expenditure, role of government agencies and
NGO’s in this process, Legal aspects related to finance raising as well as
overall management of disa sters. Various NGO’s and the works they have
carried out in the past on the occurrence of various disasters, Ways to
approach these teams.
5.2 International relief aid agencies and their role in extreme events. 09
06 Preventive and Mitigation Measures:
6.1 Pre -disaster, during disaster and post -disaster measures in some events in
general
6.2 Structural mapping: Risk mapping, assessment and analysis, sea walls and
embankments, Bio shield, shelters, early warning and communication
6.3 Non Structural Mitig ation: Community based disaster preparedness, risk
transfer and risk financing, capacity development and training, awareness
and education, contingency plans.
6.4 Do’s and don’ts in case of disasters and effective implementation of relief
aids. 06
Assessment :
Internal:
Assessment consists of two tests out of which; one should be compulsory class test and the other is
either a class test or assignment on live problems or course project.
End Semester Theory Examination:
Some guidelines for setti ng up the question paper. Minimum 80% syllabus should be covered in
question papers of end semester examination. In question paper weightage of each module will be
proportional to number of respective lecture hours as mention in the syllabus.
1. Question pape r will comprise of total six question
2. All question carry equal marks
3. Questions will be mixed in nature (for example supposed Q.2 has part (a) from module 3 then
part (b) will be from any module other than module 3)
4. Only Four question need to be solved.
REFERENCES:
1. ‘Disaster Management’ by Harsh K.Gupta, Universities Press Publications.
2. ‘Disaster Management: An Appraisal of Institutional Mechanisms in India’ by O.S.Dagur,
published by Centre for land warfare studies, New Delhi, 2011.
3. ‘Introduction to International Disaster Management’ by Damon Copolla, Butterworth
Heinemann Elseveir Publications.
4. ‘Disaster Management Handbook’ by Jack Pinkowski, CRC Press Taylor and Francis group.
5. ‘Disaster management & rehabilitation’ by Rajdeep Dasgupta, Mittal Publi cations, New Delhi.
6. ‘Natural Hazards and Disaster Management, Vulnerability and Mitigation – R B Singh, Rawat
Publications
7. Concepts and Techniques of GIS –C.P.Lo Albert, K.W. Yonng – Prentice Hall (India)
Publications. (Learners are expected to refer reports published at national and International
level and updated information available on authentic web sites)
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 226
Course Code Course Name Credits
ILO7018 Energy Audit and Management 03
Objectives:
1. To understand the importance energy security for sustainable development and the
fundamentals of energy conservation.
2. To introduce performance evaluation criteria of various electrical and thermal installations to
facilitate the energy management
3. To rel ate the data collected during performance evaluation of systems for identification of
energy saving opportunities.
Outcomes: Learner will be able to…
1. To identify and describe present state of energy security and its importance.
2. To identify and describe the basic principles and methodologies adopted in energy audit of an
utility.
3. To describe the energy performance evaluation of some common electrical installations and
identify the energy saving opportunities.
4. To describe the energy performance evaluation of some common thermal installations and
identify the energy saving opportunities
5. To analyze the data collected during performance evaluation and recommend energy saving
measures
Module Detailed Contents Hrs
01 Energy Scenario:
Present Energy Scenario, Energy Pricing, Energy Sector Reforms, Energy
Security, Energy Conservation and its Importance, Energy Conservation Act -
2001 and its Features. Basics of Energy and its various forms, Material and
Energy balance 04
02 Energy Audit Principles:
Definition, Energy audit - need, Types of energy audit, Energy management
(audit) approach -understanding energy costs, Bench marking, Energy
performance, Matching energy use to requirement, Maximizing system
efficiencies, Optimizin g the input energy requirements, Fuel and energy
substitution. Elements of monitoring& targeting; Energy audit Instruments; Data
and information -analysis.
Financial analysis techniques: Simple payback period, NPV, Return on
investment (ROI), Internal rate of return (IRR) 08
03 Energy Management and Energy Conservation in Electrical System:
Electricity billing, Electrical load management and maximum demand Control;
Power factor improvement, Energy efficient equipments and appliances, star
ratings.
Energ y efficiency measures in lighting system, Lighting control: Occupancy
sensors, daylight integration, and use of intelligent controllers.
Energy conservation opportunities in: water pumps, industrial drives, induction
motors, motor retrofitting, soft starters, variable speed drives. 10
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 227
04 Energy Management and Energy Conservation in Thermal Systems:
Review of different thermal loads; Energy conservation opportunities in: Steam
distribution system, Assessment of steam distribution losses, Steam leakag es,
Steam trapping, Condensate and flash steam recovery system.
General fuel economy measures in Boilers and furnaces, Waste heat recovery,
use of insulation - types and application. HVAC system: Coefficient of
performance, Capacity, factors affecting Refr igeration and Air Conditioning
system performance and savings opportunities. 10
05 Energy Performance Assessment:
On site Performance evaluation techniques, Case studies based on: Motors and
variable speed drive, pumps, HVAC system calculations; Lighting System:
Installed Load Efficacy Ratio (ILER) method, Financial Analysis. 04
06 Energy conservation in Buildings:
Energy Conservation Building Codes (ECBC): Green Building, LEED rating,
Application of Non -Conventional and Renewable Energy Sources 03
Assessment :
Internal:
Assessment consists of two tests out of which; one should be compulsory class test and the other is
either a class test or assignment on live problems or course project.
End Semester Theory Examination:
Some guidelines for setting up the question paper. Minimum 80% syllabus should be covered in
question papers of end semester examination. In question paper weightage of each module will be
proportional to number of respective lecture hours as mention in the syllabus.
1. Question paper will comprise of total six question
2. All question carry equal marks
3. Questions will be mixed in nature (for example supposed Q.2 has part (a) from module 3 then
part (b) will be from any module other than module 3)
4. Only Four question need to be solved.
REFERENCES:
1. Handbook of Electrical Installation Practice, Geofry Stokes, Blackwell Science
2. Designing with light: Lig hting Handbook, By Anil Valia, Lighting System
3. Energy Management Handbook, By W.C. Turner, John Wiley and Sons
4. Handbook on Energy Audits and Management, edited by A. K. Tyagi, Tata Energy
Research Institute (TERI).
5. Energy Management Principles, C.B.Smith , Pergamon Press
6. Energy Conservation Guidebook, Dale R. Patrick, S. Fardo, Ray E. Richardson, Fairmont
Press
7. Handbook of Energy Audits, Albert Thumann, W. J. Younger, T. Niehus, CRC Press
8. www.energymanagertraining.com
9. www.bee -india.nic.in
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 228
Course Code Course Name Credits
ILO7019 Development Engineering 03
Objectives:
1. To familiarise the characteristics of rural Society and the Scope, Nature and Constraints of
rural Development
2. To provide an exposure toimplications of 73rdCAA on Planning, Development and Governance
of Rural Areas
3. An exploration of human values, which go into making a ‘good’ human being, a ‘good’
professional, a ‘good’ society and a ‘good life’ in the context of work life and the personal life
of modern Indian prof essionals
4. To familiarise the Nature and Type of Human Values relevant to Planning Institutions
Outcomes: Learner will be able to…
1. Demonstrateunderstanding of knowledge for Rural Development.
2. Prepare solutions for Management Issues.
3. Take up Initiatives a nd design Strategies to complete the task
4. Develop acumen for higher education and research.
5. Demonstrate the art of working in group of different nature
6. Develop confidence to take up rural project activities independently
Module Contents Hrs
1 Introduction to Rural Development Meaning, nature and scope of development;
Nature of rural society in India; Hierarchy of settlements; Social, economic and
ecological constraints for rural development
Roots of Rural Development in India Rural reconstructi on and Sarvodaya
programme before independence; Impact of voluntary effort and Sarvodaya
Movement on rural development; Constitutional direction, directive principles;
Panchayati Raj - beginning of planning and community development; National
extension ser vices. 08
2 Post-Independence rural Development Balwant Rai Mehta Committee - three tier
system of rural local Government; Need and scope for people’s participation and
Panchayati Raj; Ashok Mehta Committee - linkage between Panchayati Raj,
participation and rural development. 06
3 Rural Development Initiatives in Five Year Plans Five Year Plans and Rural
Development; Planning process at National, State, Regional and District levels;
Planning, development, implementing and monitoring organizations and agencies;
Urban and rural interface - integrated approach and local plans; Development
initiatives and their convergence; Special component plan and sub -plan for the
weaker section; Micro -eco zones; Data base for local planning; Need for
decentralized plan ning; Sustainable rural development 07
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 229
4 Post 73rd Amendment Scenario 73rd Constitution Amendment Act, including - XI
schedule, devolution of powers, functions and finance; Panchayati Raj institutions
- organizational linkages; Recent changes in rural loc al planning; Gram Sabha -
revitalized Panchayati Raj; Institutionalization; resource mapping, resource
mobilization including social mobilization; Information Technology and rural
planning; Need for further amendments. 04
5 Values and Science and Technolo gy Material development and its values; the
challenge of science and technology; Values in planning profession, research and
education
Types of Values Psychological values — integrated personality; mental health;
Societal values — the modern search for a g ood society; justice, democracy, rule
of law, values in the Indian constitution; Aesthetic values — perception and
enjoyment of beauty; Moral and ethical values; nature of moral judgment;
Spiritual values; different concepts; secular spirituality; Relative and absolute
values; Human values — humanism and human values; human rights; human
values as freedom, creativity, love and wisdom 10
6 Ethics Canons of ethics; ethics of virtue; ethics of duty; ethics of responsibility;
Work ethics; Professional ethics; Ethics in planning profession, research and
education 04
Assessment :
Internal Assessment for 20 marks:
Consisting Two Compulsory Class Tests
First test based onapproximately 40% of contents and second test based on remainingcontents
(approximately 40% but excluding contents covered in Test I)
End Semester Examination:
Weightage of each module in end semester examination will be proportional to number of respective
lecture hours mentioned in the curriculum.
1. Question paper will comprise of total six qu estions , each carrying 20 marks
2. Question 1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of the curriculum
3. Remaining questions will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2 has part (a) from module 3
then part (b) will be from any module other than m odule 3)
4. Only Four questions need to be solved
Reference
1. ITPI, Village Planning and Rural Development, ITPI, New Delhi
2. Thooyavan, K.R. Human Settlements: A 2005 MA Publication, Chennai
3. GoI, Constitution (73rdGoI, New Delhi Amendment) Act, GoI, New Delhi
4. Planning Commission, Five Year Plans, Planning Commission
5. Planning Commission, Manual of Integrated District Planning, 2006, Planning Commission New
Delhi
6. Planning Guide to Beginners
7. Weaver, R.C., The Urban Complex, Doubleday
8. Farmer, W.P. et al, Ethics i n Planning, American Planning Association, Washington
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 230
9. How, E., Normative Ethics in Planning, Journal of Planning Literature, Vol.5, No.2, pp. 123 -150
10. Watson, V. Conflicting Rationalities: -- Implications for Planning Theory and Ethics, Planning
Theory and Practice, Vol. 4, No.4, pp.395 – 407
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 231
University of Mumbai
Program Structure B.E. Information Technology, (Rev. 2016)
B. E. Information Technology ( Semester -VIII)
Course
Code Course
Name Teaching Scheme
(Contact Hours) Credits Assigned
Theory Pract Tut Theory TW/
Pract Tut Total
ITC801 Big Data Analytics 4 - - 4 - - 4
ITC802 Internet of Everything 4 - - 4 - - 4
ITDLO -IV Department Level
Optional Course -IV 4 - - 4 - - 4
ILO-II Institute Level Optional
Course -II 3 - - 3 - - 3
ITL801 Big Data Lab - 2 - - 1 1
ITL802 Internet of Everything Lab 2 1 1
ITL803 DevOps Lab - 2 - - 1 1
ITL804 R Programming Lab - 2 - 1 1
ITM805 Project -II - 16 8 - 8
Total 15 24 - 15 12 - 27
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 232
Course
Code Course
Name Examination Scheme
Theory
TW Oral
&
Pract Total Internal Assessment End
Sem.
Exam Exam
Duratio
n ( in
Hrs) Oral
Test 1 Test 2 Avg.
ITC801 Big Data Analytics 20 20 20 80 3 - - - 100
ITC802 Internet of Everything 20 20 20 80 3 - - - 100
ITDLO -IV Department Level
Optional Course -IV 20 20 20 80 3 - - - 100
ILO-II Institute Level Optional
Course -II 20 20 20 80 3 - - - 100
ITL801 Big Data Lab 25 25
- 50
ITL802 Internet of Everything Lab - - - - - 25 25 50
ITL803 DevOps Lab
- - - - - 25 -- 25 50
ITL804 R Programming Lab
- - - - - 25 -- 25 50
ITM805 Project -II 100 50 -- 150
Total 80 80 80 320 -- 200 100 50 750
# Department Level Optional Course (DLO)
Every student is required to take one Department Elective Course for Semester VIII. Different
sets of courses will run in both the semesters. Students can take these courses from the list of
department ele ctives, which are closely allied to their disciplines.
(DLO -I subjects will have no Labs only Theory)
# Institute Level Optional Course (ILO)
Every student is required to take one Institute Elective Course for Semester VIII, which is
not closely allied to their disciplines. Different sets of courses will run in the both the
semesters.
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 233
Subject Code Department Level Optional
Course
(DLO) Subject Code Institute Level Optional Course
(ILO)
Semester VIII
ITDLO 8041 User Interaction Design
ILO8021 Project Management
ITDLO 8042 Information Retrieval Systems
ILO8 022 Finance Management
ITDLO 8043 Knowledge Management
ILO8023 Entrepreneurship Development
and
Management
ITDLO 8044 Robotics
ILO8024 Human Resource Management
ITDLO 8045 Enterprise Resource Planning
ILO8025 Professional Ethics and CSR
ILO8026 Research Methodology
ILO8027 IPR and Patenting
ILO8028 Digital Business Management
ILO8029 Environmental Management
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 234
Course Code Course
Name Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical
/Oral Tutorial Total
ITC801 Big Data
Analytics 04 -- -- 04 -- -- 04
Course
Code Course
Name Examination Scheme
Theory Marks
Term
Work Practical
& Oral Oral Total Internal assessment End
Sem.
Exam Test1 Test2 Avg. of
two Tests
ITC801 Big Data
Analytics 20 20 20 80 -- -- -- 100
Course Objectives: Students will try:
1. To provide an overview of an exciting growing field of Big Data analytics.
2. To discuss the challenges traditional data mining algorithms face when analyzing Big Data.
3. To introduce the tools required to manage and analyze big data like Hadoop, NoSql Map -
Reduce.
4. To teach the fundamental techniques and principles in achieving big data analytics with
scalability and streaming capability.
5. To int roduce to the students several types of big data like social media, web graphs and data
streams.
6. To enable students to have skills that will help them to solve complex real -world problems in
for decision support.
Course Outcomes: Student will be able to :
1. Explain the motivation for big data systems and identify the main sources of Big Data in the
real world.
2. Demonstrate an ability to use frameworks like Hadoop, NOSQL to efficiently store retrieve and
process Big Data for Analytics.
3. Implement several Dat a Intensive tasks using the Map Reduce Paradigm
4. Apply several newer algorithms for Clustering Classifying and finding associations in Big
Data
5. Design algorithms to analyze Big data like streams, Web Graphs and Social Media data.
6. Design and implement successful Recommendation engines for enterprises.
Prerequisites: Database Management System.
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 235
Detailed syllabus :
Sr.
No. Module Detailed Content Hours CO
Mapping
0 Prerequisites Data Mining, database Systems,
Algorithms 02 --
I Introduction to Big
Data Introduction to Big Data, Big Data
characteristics, types of Big Data,
Traditional vs. Big Data business
approach, Big Data Challenges,
Examples of Big Data in Real Life,
Big Data Applications 03 CO 1
II Introduction to Big
Data Frameworks:
Hadoop, NOSQL What is Hadoop? Core Hadoop
Components; Hadoop Ecosystem;
Overview of : Apache Spark, Pig,
Hive, Hbase, Sqoop
What is NoSQL?
NoSQL data architecture patterns:
Key-value stores, Graph stores,
Column family (Bigtable) stor es,
Document stores,
Mongo DB 10 CO 2
III MapReduce
Paradigm MapReduce: The Map Tasks,
Grouping by Key, The Reduce
Tasks, Combiners, Details of
MapReduce Execution, Coping
With Node Failures.
Algorithms Using MapReduce:
Matrix -Vector Multiplication by
MapReduce , Relational -Algebra
Operations, Computing Selections
by MapReduce, Computing
Projections by MapReduce, Union,
Intersection, and Difference by
MapReduce, Computing Natural
Join by MapReduce, Grouping and
Aggregati on by MapReduce,
Matrix Multiplication, Matrix
Multiplication with One
MapReduce Step .
Illustrating use of MapReduce
with use of real life databases and
applications. 09 CO 3
IV Mining Big Data
Streams The Stream Data Model: A Data -
Stream -Management System,
Examples of Stream Sources,
Stream Queries, Issues in Stream
Processing. Sampling Data in a
Stream : Sampling Techniques.
Filtering Streams: The Bloom
Filter 07 CO 5
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 236
Counting Distinct Elements in a
Stream :
The Count -Distinct Prob lem, The
Flajolet -Martin Algorithm,
Combining Estimates, Space
Requirements . Counting Ones in
a Window: The Cost of Exact
Counts, The Datar -Gionis -Indyk -
Motwani Algorithm, Query
Answering in the DGIM Algorithm.
V Big Data Mining
Algorithms Frequent Pattern Mining :
Handling Larger Datasets in Main
Memory Basic Algorithm of Park,
Chen, and Yu. The SON Algorithm
and MapReduce.
Clustering Algorithms: CURE
Algorithm. Canopy Clustering,
Clustering with MapReduce
Classification Algorithms:
Parallel Decision trees, Overview
SVM classifiers, Parallel SVM, K -
Nearest Neighbor classifications for
Big Data, One Nearest Neighbour. 10 CO 4
VI Big Data Analytics
Applications Link Analysis : PageRank
Definition, Structure of the web,
dead ends, Using Page rank in a
search engine, Efficient
computation of Page Rank:
PageRank Iteration Using
MapReduce, Topic sensitive Page
Rank, link Spam, Hubs and
Authorities, HITS Algorithm.
Mining Social - Network Graphs :
Social Networks as Graphs, Types ,
Clustering of Social Network
Graphs, Direct Discovery of
Communities, Counting triangles
using Map -Reduce.
Recommendation Engine s: A
Model for Recommendation
Systems, Content -Based
Recommendations, Colla borative
Filtering. 11 CO 4
CO 6
Text Books:
1. Radha Shankarmani, M Vijayalakshmi, ”Big Data Analytics”, Wiley Publications,
2. Anand Rajaraman and Jeff Ullman “Mining of Massive Datasets”, Cambridge University
Press.
3. Alex Holmes “Hadoop in Practice”, Manning Press, Dreamtech Press.
4. Professional NoSQL Paperback, by Shashank Tiwari, Dreamtech Press
5. MongoDB: The Definitive Guide Paperback, Kristina Chodorow (Author), Michael Dirolf,
O'Reilly Publications
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 237
References:
1. Analytics in a Big Data World: The Essential Guide to Data Science and its Applications, Bart
Baesens , WILEY Big Data Series.
2. Big Data Analytics with R and Hadoop by Vignesh Prajapati Paperback, Packt Publishing Limited
3. Hadoop: The Definitive Guide by Tom White, O'Reilly Publications
Asse ssment:
Internal Assessment for 20 marks:
Consisting of Two Compulsory Class Tests
Approximately 40% to 50% of syllabus content must be covered in First test and remaining 40% to
50% of syllabus contents must be covered in second test.
End Semester Exami nation: Some guidelines for setting the question papers are as:
Weightage of each module in end semester examination is
expected to be/will be proportional to number of respective lecture
hours mentioned in the syllabus.
Question paper will comprise of to tal six questions , each
carrying 20 marks.
Q.1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of
the syllabus .
Remaining question will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2
has part (a) from module 3 then part (b) will be from any other
module. (Randomly selected from all the modules.)
Total four questions need to be solved.
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 238
Course Code Course
Name Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical
/Oral Tutorial Total
ITC802 Internet of
Everything 04 -- -- 04 -- -- 04
Course
Code Course
Name Examination Scheme
Theory Marks
Term
Work Practical
& Oral Oral Total Internal assessment End
Sem.
Exam Test1 Test2 Avg. of
two Tests
ITC802 Internet of
Everything 20 20 20 80 -- -- -- 100
Course Objectives: Students will try:
1. To learn the concepts of IOT .
2. To identify the different technology.
3. To learn different applications in IOT.
4. To learn different protocols used in IOT.
5. To learn the concepts of smart city development in IOT.
6. To learn how to analysis the data in IOT.
Course Outcomes: Student will be able to:
1. Apply the concepts of IOT.
2. Identify the different technology.
3. Apply IOT to different applications.
4. Analysis and evaluate protocols used in IOT.
5. Design and develop smart city in IOT.
6. Analysis and evaluate the data received through sensors in IOT.
Prerequisites: IOT Lab, Sensor Lab, Wireless Network.
Detailed syllabus:
Sr.
No. Module Detailed Content Hours CO
Mapping
0 Prerequisites What are sensors , Sensor family,
Architecture of single node sensor? 02 --
I Introduction Introduction, History of IOT,
Objects in IOT, Identifier in the
IOT, Technologies in IOT 03 CO 1
II RFID Technology Introduction, principle of RFID,
components of RFID system: RFID
tag, Reader, RFID middleware, 8 CO 2
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 239
Issues etc.
III RFID Applications Introduction, concepts and
technology: RFID, transponder,
RFID architecture, RFID
applications i.e. logistics and
supply chain, production,
monitoring and maintenance,
product safety, quality and
information, access control and
tracking and tracing of indi viduals,
payment, loyalty, household etc.
Hardware, Hardware issues,
protocols: pure aloha, slotted aloha,
frame slotted aloha, tree protocols,
tree splitting algorithms, binary
search algorithms, bitwise
arbitration protocols. Main query
tree protocols. 09 CO2
CO 3
IV Wireless Sensor
Networks History and context, Node,
connecting nodes, networking
nodes, securing communication,
standards and
Fora. Networking and the Internet -
IP Addressing, Protocols - MQTT,
CoAP, REST Transferring data 09 CO2
CO3
CO4
V Mobility and
Settings. Introduction, localization, mobility
management, localization and
handover management, technology
considerations, performance
evaluation, simulation setup,
performance results. Identification
of IOT (data formats. IPV6,
identifiers and locators, tag etc.) 10 CO4
CO5
VI Data Analytics for
IoE Introduction, Apache Hadoop,
Using Hadoop MapReduce for
Batch Data Analysis, Apache
Oozie, Apache Spark, Apache
Storm, Using Apache Storm for
Real-time Data Analysis, Structural
Health Monitoring Case Study,
Tools for IoT: - Chef, Chef Case
Studies, Puppet, Puppet Case Study
- Multi -tier Deployment,
NETCONF -YANG Case Studies,
IoT Code Generator. 11 CO5
CO6
Text Books:
1 Internet of Things connecting objects to the web, by Hakima Chaouchi, Wiley.
2. Internet of Things ( A Hands -on-Approach) by Arshdeep Bhaga and Vijay Madisetti.
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 240
Reference Books:
1 The Internet of Things (MIT Press) by Samuel Greengard.
2 The Internet of Things (Connecting objects to the web) by Hakima Chaouchi (Wiley
Publications ).
3 RFID and the Internet of Things, by Herve chabanne, Wiley
Assessment:
Internal Assessment for 20 marks:
Consisting of Two Compulsory Class Tests
Approximately 40% to 50% of syllabus content must be covered in First test and remaining 40% to
50% of syllabus contents must be covered in second test.
End Semester Examination: Some guidelines for setting the question papers are as:
Weightage of each module in end semester examination is
expected to be/will be proportional to number of respectiv e lecture
hours mentioned in the syllabus.
Question paper will comprise of total six questions , each
carrying 20 marks.
Q.1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of
the syllabus .
Remaining question will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2
has part (a) from module 3 then part (b) will be from any other
module. (Randomly selected from all the modules.)
Total four questions need to be solved.
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 241
Course Code Course
Name Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical
& Oral Tutorial Total
ITL801 Big Data
Lab
-- 02 -- -- 01 -- 01
Course
Code Course
Name Examination Scheme
Theory Marks
Term
Work Oral
&
Practical Oral Total Internal assessment End
Sem.
Exam Test1 Test2 Avg. of
two Tests
ITL801 Big Data
Lab
-- -- -- -- 25 -- 25 50
Lab Objectives: Students will try:
1. To introduce the tools required to manage and analyze big data like Hadoop, NoSql
2. To impart knowledge of Map reduce paradigm to solve complex problems Map -Reduce.
3. To introduce several new algorithms for big data mining like classification, clustering and
finding frequent patterns.
4. To introduce to the students several types of big data like social media, web graphs and data
streams.
5. To identify various sources of Big data
6. To enable stu dents to have skills that will help them to solve complex real -world problems in
for decision support.
Lab Outcomes: Students will be able to:
1. Demonstrate capability to use Big Data Frameworks like Hadoop
2. Program applications using tools like Hive, pig, , NO SQL and MongoDB for Big data
Applications
3. Construct scalable algorithms for large Datasets using Map Reduce techniques
4. Implement algorithms for Clustering, Classifying and finding associations in Big Data
5. Design and implement algorithms to analyze B ig data like streams, Web Graphs and Social
Media data and construct recommendation systems.
6. Apply the knowledge of Big Data gained to fully develop a BDA applications for real life
applications.
Prerequisite: Java, Python
Requirement
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 242
Hardware Software
PC i3 or above, 8 GB RAM Virtual Machine,
Hadoop Frame work,
NOSQL and MongoDb Compilers
Detailed syllabus :
Module Detailed Content Hours
2hrs LO
Mapping
1 Assignment on Study of Hadoop ecosystem 02 LO 1
2 Programming exercises on Hadoop Using
Hive, Pig, Hbase Sqoop
NOSQL, MongoDB 04 LO 2
3 Implementing simple algorithms in Map -
Reduce Matrix multiplication, Aggregates,
joins, sorting, searching etc. 04 LO3
4 Implementing Algorithms using MapReduce
(Any 2)
Implementing Frequent Item set Mining
Implementing Clustering algorithms
Implementing Classification Algorithms
06 LO 4
5 Big Data Applications (Any 2)
Implementing Analytics on data streams
Implementing Social Network Analysis
Algorithms
Implementing Web Graph Algorithms
Implementing recommendation Engines 05 LO 5
6 Mini Project : One real life large data
application to be implemented (Use standard
Datasets available on the web) a) Twitter
data analysis b) Fraud Detection c) Text
Mining d) Recommendation Engines
(list of datsets also given in the text book) 05 LO 5
LO 6
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 243
Text Books:
1. Radha Shankarmani, M Vijayalakshmi, ”Big Data Analytics”, Wiley Publications,
2. Alex Holmes “Hadoop in Practice”, Manning Press, Dreamtech Press.
3. Professional NoSQL Paperback, by Shashank Tiwari, Dreamtech Press
4. MongoDB: The Definitive Guide Paperback, Kristina Chodorow (Author), Michael Dirolf,
O'Reilly Publications
References:
1. Analytics in a Big Data World: The Essential Guide to Data Science and its Applications, Bart
Baesens , WILEY Big Data Series.
2. Hadoop: The Definitive Guide by Tom White, O'Reilly Publications
3. Data Science and Big Data Analytics: Discovering, Analyzing, Visualizing and Presenting
Data by EMC Education Services
4. NoSQL Distilled: A Brief Guide to the Emerging World of Polyglot Persistence by Pramod J.
Sadalage, Addison Wesley
Term Work:
Term Work shall consist of at least 10 to 12 practical’s based on the above list. Also Term work
Journal must include at least 2 assignments.
Term Work Marks: 25 Marks (Total marks) = 15 Marks (Experiment) + 5 Marks (Assignments) + 5
Marks (Attendance)
Oral Exam: An Oral exam will be held based on the above syllabus.
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 244
Course Code Course
Name Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical
& Oral Tutorial Total
ITL802 Internet of
Everything
Lab -- 02 -- -- 1 -- 1
Course
Code Course Name Examination Scheme
Theory Marks
Term
Work Practical
&
Oral Oral Total Internal assessment End
Sem.
Exam Test1 Test2 Avg. of
two Tests
ITL802 Internet of
Everything
Lab -- -- -- -- 25 -- 25 50
Hardware and Software requirements:
Hardware Requirements Software Requirements Other Requirements
PC With following
Configuration
1. Intel Core i3/i5/i7
Processor
2. 4 GB RAM
3. 500 GB Hard disk 1. Ubuntu or Linux Desktop OS
2. VMware
3. Cooja contiki or any open
source software
4. Cupcarbon 1. Internet Connection
Lab Objectives: Students will try:
1. To learn different types of sensors from Motes families.
2. To design the problem solution as per the requirement analysis done using Motes sensors.
3. To study the basic concepts of programming/sensors/ emulator like cooja etc.
4. To design and implement the mini project intended solution for project based learning.
5. To build and test the mini project successfully.
6. To improve the team building, communication and management skills of the students.
Lab Outcomes: S tudent will be able to:
1. Identify the requirements for the real world problems.
2. Conduct a survey of several available literatures in the preferr ed field of study.
3. Study and enhance software/ hardware skills.
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 245
4. Demonstrate and build the project successfully by hardware/sensor requirements, coding,
emulating and testing.
5. To report and present the findings of the study conducted in the preferred domain
6. Demonstrate an ability to work in teams and manage the conduct of the research study.
Prerequisite: Basics of Java and Python Programming
Guidelines
1. The mini project work is to be conducted by a group of three students
2. Each group will be associated with a subject Incharge/ mini project mentor. The group should meet
with the concerned faculty during Laboratory hours and the progress of work discussed must be
documented.
3. The students must understand the
a. Concept
b. Importance
c. Interdisciplinary
d. Challenges
e. Various applications/smart objects
f. Major Players/Industry, Standards.
4. The students must understand the IoT Architecture:
a. Node Structure: Sensing, Processing, Communication, Powering
b. Networking: Topologies, Layer/Stack architecture
c. Communication Technol ogies: Introduction to ZigBee, BLE, WiFi, LTE, IEEE
802.11ah, Discuss data rate, range, power, computations/bandwidth, QoS
d. Smartness - Signal Processing/Analytics: Impact on Power/Energy savings, dynamic
networks, simple case studies
e. IoT Fabricator: Intr oduction to Embedded electronics, fabricating electronics,
Communication Network requirements, Data processing challenges – recreation,
IP/security, Challenges
f. Hands -on in IoT: Projects based on some Hardware (Raspberry pi, Arduino, Intel, IITH
Mote, Smar tphones), Software (Contiki, TinyOS, Android), IoT Fabricator etc. can be
used.
5. The students may do will visit different websites to identify their IOT topic for the mini project.
6. The students may do survey for different application using different types of sensors for their mini
project.
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 246
7. Each group will identify the Hardware (Motes from different Motes families) & sensor
configuration and software requirement for their mini project problem statement.
8. Design your own circuit board using multiple sensor s etc.
9. Installation, configure and manage your sensors in such away so that they can communicate with
each other.
10. Work with operating system, emulator like contiki cooja and do coding to for input devices on
sensors.
11. Each group will identify the Hardware a nd software requirement for their mini project problem
statement.
12. Create and interface using Mobile/Web to publish or remotely access the data on Internet.
13. Each group along with the concerned faculty shall identify a potential problem statement, on which
the study and implementation is to be conducted.
14. Each group may present their work in various project competitions and paper presentations.
15. A detailed report is to be prepared as per guidelines given by the concerned faculty.
Text Books:
1. Interconnecting Smart Objects with IP: The Next Internet, Jean -Philippe Vasseur, Adam Dunkels,
Morgan Kuffmann
2. Designing the Internet of Things , Adrian McEwen (Author), Hakim Cassimally
3. Internet of Things: Converging Technologies for Smart Environments and Integrated Ecosystems,
Dr. Ovidiu Vermesan, Dr. Peter Friess, River Publishers
4. Internet of Things (A Hands -on-Approach) , Vijay Madisetti , Arshdeep Bahga
References:
1. 6LoWPAN: The Wireless Embedded Internet, Zach Shelby, Carsten Bormann, Wiley
2. Building the internet of things with ipv6 and mipv6, The Evolving World of M2M
Communications, Daniel Minoli John Wiley & Sons
3. Contiki Cooja User Guide.
4. Fundamentals of Sensor Network Programming: Applications and Technology, By S. Sitharama
Iyengar, Nandan P arameshwaran, Vir V. Phoha, N. Balakrishnan, Chuka D. Okoye, Wiley
publication.
5. Recent research/white papers
Term Work:
Term Work shall consist of full Mini Project on above guidelines/syllabus. Also Term work Journal
must include at least 2 assignments.
Term Work Marks: 25 Marks (Total marks) = 15 Marks (Mini Project) + 5 Marks (Assignments) + 5
Marks (Attendance)
Oral Exam: An Oral exam will be held based on the Mini Project and Presentation.
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 247
Course Code Course
Name Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical
& Oral Tutorial Total
ITL803
DevOps Lab -- 2 -- -- -- -- 01
Course
Code Course Name Examination Scheme
Theory Marks
Term
Work Practical
&
Oral Oral Total Internal assessment End
Sem.
Exam Test1 Test2 Avg. of
two Tests
ITL803
DevOps Lab -- -- -- -- 25 25 -- 50
Lab Objectives: Students will try:
1. To understand the concept of DevOps with associated technologies and methodologies.
2. To be familiarized with Jenkins, which is used to build & test software Applications & Continuous
integration in Devops environment.
3. To understand different Version Control tools like GIT, CVS or Mercurial
4. To understand Docker to build, ship and run containerized images
5. To use Docker to deploy and manage Software applications running on Container.
6. To be familiarized with co ncept of Software Configuration Management & provisioning using tools
like Puppet,Chef, Ansible or Saltstack.
Lab Outcomes: Students will be able to:
1. Remember the importance of DevOps tools used in software development life cycle
2. Understand the imp ortance of Jenkins to Build, Deploy and Test Software Applications
3. Examine the different Version Control strategies
4. Analyze & Illustrate the Containerization of OS images and deployment of applications over
Docker
5. Summarize the importance of Software Configuration Management in DevOps
6. Synthesize the provisioning using Chef/Puppet/Ansible or Saltstack.
Hardware & Software Requirements:
Hardware Requirements Software Requirements Other Requirements
PC With following
Configuration 1. Windows or Linux Desktop OS
for Client machines 1. Internet Connection for
each PC with at least 2 MBPS
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 248
1. Intel Core i3/i5/i7
Processor with Intel VT -X
support
2. 4 GB RAM
3. 500 GB Harddisk
4. Gigabit Ethernet (GbE)
network interface card
(NIC) 2. CentOS/Fedora/Ubuntu/Redhat
Server OS for One Server
3. JDK 1.8 or higher
4. Netbeans or Eclipse
5. OpenSSH bandwidth.
Prerequisite Subjects: Operating System, Virtualization, Cloud Computing, Java and Web
Programming, and Software Engineering.
Sr.
No. Module Detailed Content Hours LO
Mapping
0 Prerequisite To Understand the Concept of DevOps with
related technologies which are used to Code,
Build, Test, Configure & Monitor the Software
Applications. 02
--
I Build & Test
Applications
with
Continuous
Integration To Install and Configure Jenkins to test, and
deploy Java or Web Applications using
Netbeans or eclipse. 04 LO 1
LO2
II Version
Control To Perform Version Control on websites/
Softwares using different Version control tools
like RCS/ CVS/GIT/Mercurial (Any two) 04 LO 1
LO 3
III Virtualization
&
Containerizatio
n To Install and Configure Docker for creating
Containers of different Operating System
Images 04 LO 1
LO 4
IV Virtualization
&
Containerizatio
n To Build, deploy and manage web or
Java application on Docker 04 LO 1
LO 4
V
Software
Configuration
Management To install and configure Software Configuration
Management using Chef/Puppet/Ansible or
Saltstack. 04 LO 1
LO 5
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 249
VI Provisioning To Perform Software Configuration
Management and provisioning using
Chef/Puppet/Ansible or Saltstack. 04 LO 1
LO 6
Text Books:
1. Karl Matthias & Sean P. Kane, Docker: Up and Running, O'Reilly Publication.
2. Len Bass,Ingo Weber,Liming Zhu,”DevOps, A Software Architects Perspective”, Addison -
Wesley -Pearson Publication.
3. John Ferguson Smart,”Jenkins, The Definitive Guide”, O'Reilly Publication.
4. Learn to Master DevOps by Star EduSolutions.
References:
1. Sanjeev Sharma and Bernie Coyne,”DevOps for Dummies”, Wiley Publication
2. Httermann, Michael, “DevOps for Developers”,Apress Publication.
3. Joakim Verona, “Practical DevOps”, Pack publication
Term Work:
Term Work shall consist of experiment on above guidelines/syllabus. Also Term work Journal must
include at least 2 a ssignments.
Term Work Marks: 25 Marks (Total marks) = 15 Marks (Experiment) + 5 Marks (Assignments) + 5
Marks (Attendance)
Practical & Oral Exam: An Oral exam will be held based on the above syllabus.
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 250
Course Code Course Name Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical
& Oral Tutorial Total
ITL804 R Programming
Lab
-- 02 -- -- 01 -- 01
Course
Code Course Name Examination Scheme
Theory Marks
Term
Work Practi
cal &
oral Oral Total Internal assessment
End
Sem.
Exam Test1 Test 2 Avg. of
two
Tests
ITL804 R Programming
Lab
-- -- -- -- 25 25 -- 50
Lab Objectives: Students will try:
1. To provide an overview of a new language R used for data science.
2. To introduce students to the R programming environment and related eco -system and thus
provide them with an in -demand skill -set, in both the research and business environments
3. To introduce the extended R ecosystem of libraries and packages
4. To demonstrate usage of as standard Programming Language.
5. To familiarize students with how various statistics like mean median etc. can be collected for
data exploration in R
6. To enable students to use R to conduct analytics on large real life datasets.
Lab Outcomes: students will be able to:
1. Install and use R for simple pro gramming tasks.
2. Extend the functionality of R by using add -on packages
3. Extract data from files and other sources and perform various data manipulation tasks on them.
4. Code statistical functions in R.
5. Use R Graphics and Tables to visualize results of variou s statistical operations on data .
6. Apply the knowledge of R gained to data Analytics for real life applications.
SOFTWARE requirements:
1. The R statistical software program. Available from: https://www.r -project.org/
2. RStudio an Integrated Development Environment (IDE) for R. Available from:
https://www.rstudio.com/
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 251
Detailed syllabus:
Module Detailed Content Hours
LO
Mapping
0 Prerequisites - Any programming
Language like Java Python. Basic statistics.
Data Mining Algorithms -- --
I Introduction: Installing R on personal
machines. installing R and RStudio.
The basic functionality of R will be
demonstrated, Variable types in R.
Numeric variables, strings and factors.
Accessing the help system. Retrieving R
packages.
Basic data types and operations:
numbers, characters and composites.
Data entry and exporting data 02 LO 1, LO
2, LO 3
II Data structures : vectors, matrices, lists and
data frames. 04 LO1, LO 3
III R as a programming language :
Grouping, loops and conditional
execution, Functions
Exploratory data analysis
Range, summary, mean, variance,
median, standard deviation, histogram,
box plot, scatterplot
04 LO 1, LO
4
IV Graphics in R
Graphics and tables
Working with larger datasets
Building tables with aggregate
Introduction to ggplot2 graphics 06 LO 3
V Regression and correlation
Simple regression and correlation,
Multiple regression
Tabular data and analysis of Categorical
data 02 LO 4
VI R for Data Science (Mini Project)
Implementing a mini project using any data
mining or big data analytics algorithm in R
Extracting data from a large Dataset
Exploratory analysis
Using Mining algorithm
Visualizations and interpretation of
results 06 LO 5, LO
6
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 252
Text Books:
1. URL: https://cran.r -project.org/doc/manuals/r -release/R -intro.pdf ( Online Resources)
2. R Cookbook Paperback – 2011 by Teetor Paul O Reilly Publications
3. Beginning R: The Statistical Programming Language by Dr. Mark Gardener, Wiley
Publications
4. R Programming For Dummies by Joris Meys Andrie de Vries, Wiley Publications
References:
1. Hands -On Programming with R by Grolemund , O Reilly Publications
2. R for Everyone: Advanced Analytics and Graphics, 1e by Lande r, Pearson Ltd.
3. R for Data Science Learning Dan Toomey December 2014 Packt Publishing Limited
Term Work:
Term Work shall consist of experiment on above guidelines/syllabus. Also Term work Journal must
include at least 2 assignments.
Term Work Marks: 25 Marks (Total marks) = 15 Marks (Experiment) + 5 Marks (Assignments) + 5
Marks (Attendance)
Practical & Oral Exam: An Oral exam will be held based on the above syllabus.
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 253
Course Code Course
Name Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical
/ Oral Tutorial Total
ITM805
Project -II
-- 16 -- -- 8 -- 8
Course
Code Course Name Examination Scheme
Theory Marks
Term
Work Practic
al &
Oral Oral Total Internal assessment End
Sem.
Exam Test1 Test2 Avg. of
two Tests
ITM805
Project -II
-- -- -- -- 100 -- 50 150
Lab Objectives: Students will try:
1. To offer students a glimpse into real world problems and challenges that need IT based
solutions
2. To enable students to create very precise specifications of the IT solution to be designed.
3. To introduce students to the vast array of literature available of the various research challenges
in the field of IT
4. To create awareness among the students of the characteristics of several domain areas where IT
can be effectively used.
5. To enable students to use all concepts of IT in creating a solution for a problem
6. To improve the team building, communication and management skills of the students.
Lab Outcomes: Student will be able to:
1. Discover potential research areas in the field of IT
2. Conduct a survey of several available literature in the preferred field of study
3. Compare and contrast the several existing solutions for research challenge
4. Demonstrate an ability to work in teams and manage the conduct of the research study.
5. Formulate an d propose a plan for creating a solution for the research plan identified
6. To report and present the findings of the study conducted in the preferred domain
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 254
Guidelines
1. The project work is to be conducted by a group of three students
2. Each group will be associated with a project mentor/guide. The group should meet with the project
mentor/guide periodically and record of the meetings and work discussed must be documented.
3. Department has to allocate 1 day in VII semester and 2 day in VIII semester every week.
4. Students will do literature survey in Sem VI or Sem VII.
5. Students will do design, implementation and coding in Sem VII.
6. Each group along with its guide/mentor shall identify a potential research area/problem domain, on
which the study is to be condu cted.
7. Each team will do a rigorous literature survey of the problem domain by reading and understanding
at least 3 -5 research papers from current good quality national/international journals/conferences.
(Papers selected must be indexed by Scopus/IEEE/Spr inger/ACM etc.). The list of papers surveyed
must be clearly documented.
8. The project assessment for term work will be done at least two times at department level by giving
presentation to panel members which consist of at least three (3) embers as Internal examiners
(including the project guide/mentor) appointed by the Head of the department of respective
Programme.
9. A report is to be prepared summarizing the findings of the literature survey. A comparative
evaluation of the different techniques surveyed is also to be done.
10. Students will do testing and analyze in Sem VIII
11. Teams must analyze all the results obtained by comparing with other standard techniques.
12. Every team must publish their work in national / international conference/journals (if possible
publish in Scopus indexed journals).
Evaluation
1. Each team has to give presentation/demo to the Internal Panel and External examiner.
2. Each team will prepare a report that will summarize the results of the literature survey and
implementation and coding as p roject proposal in SEM VII. The list of papers surveyed must
be clearly documented.
3. Each group will be jointly evaluated by a team of Internal and External Examiners approved by
the University of Mumbai.
4. Oral exam will be conduct on the project done by the students.
Term Work:
Term Work shall consist of full Project -I on above guidelines/syllabus.
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 255
Term Work Marks: 100 Marks (Total marks) = 95 Marks (Project -II) + 5 Marks (Attendance)
Oral Exam: An Oral exam will be held based on the Project -II and Presentation.
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 256
Course code Course
Name Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical
/Oral Tutorial Total
ITDLO 8041 User
Interaction
Design
04 -- -- 04 -- -- 04
Course code Course
Name Examination Scheme
Theory Marks
Term
Work Practical Oral Total Internal assessment
End
Sem.
Exam Test1 Test2 Avg. of
two
Tests
ITDLO 8041 User
Interaction
Design
20 20 20 80 -- -- -- 100
Course Objectives: Students will try to:
1 To stress the importance of good interface design.
2 To understand the importance of human psychology as well as social and emotional aspect in
designing good interfaces.
3 To learn the techniques of data gathering, establishing requirements, analysis and data
interpretation.
4 To learn the techniques for prototyping and evaluating user experiences.
5 To understand interaction design process.
6 To bring out the creativity in each student – build innovative applications that are usable,
effecti ve and efficient for intended users.
Course Outcomes:
1. Students will be able to identify and criticize bad features of interface designs.
2. Students will be able to predict good features of interface designs.
3. Students will be able to illustrate and analyze user needs and formulate user design
specifications.
4. Students will be able to interpret and evaluate the data collected during the process.
5. Students will be able to evaluate designs based on theoretical frameworks and methodological
approaches.
6. Students will be able to produce/show better techniques to improve the user interaction design
interfaces.
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 257
Prerequisite: Web technologies, Software Engineering, Experiences in designing interfaces
for applications and web sites. Basic Knowledge of designing tool s and languages like HTML ,
Java etc.
Detailed syllabus:
Sr.
No. Module Detailed Content Hours CO
Mapping
0 Prerequisite Software Engineering concepts and
any programming Language 02 --
I Introduction to
Interaction Design Good and Poor Design, What is
Interaction Design, The User
Experience, The Process Of
Interaction Design, Interaction
Design and the User Experience 09 CO1,CO
2
II Understanding and
Conceptualizing
Interaction
Cognitive aspects
and Social,
Emotional
Interaction Understanding the Problem Space
and Conceptualizing Design,
Conceptual Model, Interface Types
Cognitive aspects, Social
Interaction and the Emerging Social
Phenomena,
Emotions and the User Experience,
Expressive and Frustrating
Interfaces, Persuasive Technologies 09 CO2,CO
3
III Data Gathering,
Establishing
Requirements,
Analysis,
Interpretation and
Presentation Establishing Requirements, Five
Key Issues, Techniques for Data
Gathering, Data Analysis
Interpretation and Presentation,
Task Description and Task
Analysis 09 CO4
IV Process of
Interaction Design,
Prototyping,
Construction, Interaction Design Process,
Prototyping and Conceptual
Design, Interface Metaphors and
Analogies
09 CO4
V Design rules and
Industry standards Design principles, Principles to
support Usability, Standards and
Guidelines, Golden rules and
Heuristics, ISO/IEC standards 08 CO5
VI Evaluation
Techniques and
Framework The Why, What, Where and When
of Evaluation, Types of Evaluation,
case studies, DECIDE Framework,
Usability Testing, conducting 06 CO5,CO
6
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 258
experiments, Field studies,
Heuristic Evaluation and
walkthroughs, Predictive models.
Text Books:
1. Interaction Design , by J. Preece, Y. Rogers and H. Sharp. ISBN 0 -471-49278 -7.
2. Human Computer Interaction, by Alan Dix, Janet Finlay, Gregory D Abowd, Russell Beale
3. Alan Cooper, Robert Reimann, David Cronin, “About Face3: Essentials of Interaction design”,
Wiley public ation.
4. Wilbert O. Galitz, “The Essential Guide to User Interface Design”, Wiley publication.
References:
1. The UX Book, by Rex Hartson and Pardha S Pyla.
2. Donald A. Norman, “The design of everyday things”, Basic books.
3. Jeff Johnson, “Designing with the min d in mind”, Morgan Kaufmann Publication.
Assessment:
Internal Assessment for 20 marks:
Consisting of Two Compulsory Class Tests
Approximately 40% to 50% of syllabus content must be covered in First test and remaining 40% to
50% of syllabus contents must be covered in second test.
End Semester Examination: Some guidelines for setting the question papers are as:
Weightage of each module in end semester examination is
expected to be/will be proportional to number of respective lecture
hours mentioned in t he syllabus.
Question paper will comprise of total six questions , each
carrying 20 marks.
Q.1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of
the syllabus .
Remaining question will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2
has part (a) from module 3 t hen part (b) will be from any other
module. (Randomly selected from all the modules.)
Total four questions need to be solved.
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 259
Course code Course
Name Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical
/Oral Tutorial Total
ITDLO8 042 Information
Retrieval
System
04 -- -- 04 -- -- 04
Course
Code Course Name Examination Scheme
Theory Marks
Term
Work Practical Oral Total Internal assessment End
Sem.
Exam Test1 Test2 Avg. of
twoTests
ITDL
O804
2 Information
Retrieval
System
20 20 20 80 -- -- -- 100
Course Objectives: students will try:
1. To learn the fundamentals of information retrieval system.
2. To classify various Information retrieval models.
3. To demonstrate the query processing techniques and operations
4. To compare the relevance of query languages for text and multimedia data
5. To evaluate the significance of various indexing and searching techniques for information
retrieval.
6. To develop a effective user interface for information retrieval.
Course Outcomes:
1. Students will define and describ e the objectives the basic concepts of Information retrieval
system.
2. Students will evaluate the taxonomy of different information retrieval models.
3. Students will solve and process text and multimedia retrieval queries and their operations
4. Students will ev aluate text processing techniques and operations in information retrieval
system.
5. Students will demonstrate and evaluate various indexing and searching techniques.
6. Student will design the user interface for an information retrieval system.
Prerequisite : Data structures and algorithms
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 260
Detailed syllabus :
Sr.
No. Module Detailed Content Hours CO
Mapping
0 Prerequisite Comment (Prerequisite syllabus
should not be considered for paper
setting) Indexing and searching
Algorithms 02
I Introduction Motivation, Basic Concepts, The
retrieval Process, Information
System: Components, parts and
types on information system;
Definition and objectives on
information retrieval system 05 CO1
II IR Models Modeling: Taxonomy of
Information Retrieval Models,
Retrieval: Adhoc and filtering,
Formal Characteristics of IR
models, Classic Information
Retrieval, Alternative Set Theoretic
models, Probabilistic Models,
Structured text retrieval Models,
models for Browsing; Multimedia
IR models: Data Modeling 09 CO2
III Query Processing
and Operations Query Languages: Keyword based
Querying, Pattern Matching,
Structural Queries, Query
Protocols; Query Operations: User
relevance feedback, Automatic
local analysis, Automatic global
analysis, Multimedia IR Query
Language s 10 CO3
IV Text Processing Text and Multimedia languages and
properties: Metadata, Markup
Languages, Multimedia; Text
Operations: Document
Preprocessing, Document
Clustering, Text Compression,
Comparing Text Comparison
Technique 10 CO4
V Indexing and
Searching Inverted files, Other indices for
text, Boolean Queries, Sequential
Searching, Pattern Matching,
Structural Queries, Compression;
Multimedia IR: Indexing and
Searching: - Spatial Access
Methods, A Generic Multimedia
indexing approach, One -11 CO5
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 261
dimensio nal time series, Two
dimensional color images,
Automatic Feature extraction;
Searching Web: Challenges,
Characterizing the web, Search
Engines. Browsing, Meta searches,
Searching needle in haystack,
Searching using Hyperlinks
VI User interface and
visualization Human Computer interaction, the
information access process, starting
points, query specifications,
context, using relevance judgments,
interface support for the search
process 05 CO6
Text Books:
1.Modern Information Retrieval, Ricardo Baeza -Yates,berthier Ribeiro - Neto, ACM Press - Addison
Wesley
2. Information Retrieval Systems: Theory and Implementation, Gerald Kowaski, Kluwer Academic
Publisher
3. Storage Network Management and Retrieval by Dr. Vaishali Khairnar, Nilima Dongre, Wiley India
References:
1. Introduction to Information Retrieval By Christopher D. Manning and Prabhakar Raghavan,
Cambridge University Press
2. Information Storage & Retieval By Robert Korfhage – John Wiley & Sons
3. Introduction to Modern Information Retrieval. G.G. Chowdhury. NealSchuman
Assessment:
Internal Assessment for 20 marks:
Consisting of Two Compulsory Class Tests
Approximately 40% to 50% of syllabus content must be covered in First test and remaining 40% to
50% of syllabus contents must be covered in second test.
End Semester Examination: Some guidelines for setting the question papers are as:
Weightage of each module in end semester examination is
expected to be/will be proportional to number of respectiv e lecture
hours mentioned in the syllabus.
Question paper will comprise of total six questions , each
carrying 20 marks.
Q.1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of
the syllabus .
Remaining question will be mixed in nature (for example if Q. 2
has part (a) from module 3 then part (b) will be from any other
module. (Randomly selected from all the modules.)
Total four questions need to be solved.
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 262
Course Code Course
Name Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical
/Oral Tutorial Total
ITDLO 8043 Knowledge
Managemen
t
04 -- -- 04 -- -- 04
Course
Code Course
Name Examination Scheme
Theory Marks
Term
Work Practical
& Oral Oral Total Internal assessment End
Sem.
Exam Test1 Test2 Avg. of
two Tests
ITDLO 80
43 Knowledge
Managemen
t
20 20 20 80 -- -- -- 100
Course Objectives:
1 Establish a foundation of key terms and concepts, historical events and contributions, organizationa l
benefits, and guiding principles on which to build greater understanding of knowledge management
2 Appreciate the role and use of knowledge for individuals, as well as organizations and institutions.
3 Increase information and understanding about knowledge transfer using low - and high technology
strategies
4 Explore the future of knowledge management a nd its influence on our jobs, communities, and society
Course Outcomes: After completion of the course the learner will be able to
1) Discuss KM, learning organizations, intellectual capital and related terminologies in clear terms
and understand the role of knowledge management in organizations.
2) Demonstrate an understanding of the history, concepts, and the antecedents of management of
knowledge and describe several successful knowledge management systems
3) Evaluate the impact of technology including telecommun ications, networks, and Internet/intranet
role in managing knowledge.
4) Discuss new jobs, roles and responsibilities resulting from the New or Knowledge Economy
Ponder KM’s current and future impact on individuals, organizations and society at large
Prerequi site: An introductory course in IT/ IS
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 263
DETAILED SYLLABUS:
Sr.
No. Module Detailed Content Hours
Prerequisite Meaning of data, information, knowledge and expertise
Meaning of epistemology, Types of Knowledge -
Subjective & Objective views of knowledge, procedural
Vs. Declarative, tacit Vs. explicit, general Vs. specific. 3
I Introduction to
Knowledge
Management What is Knowledge? Types of expertise – associational,
motor skill, theoretical Characteristics of knowledge –
explicitness, codifiability, teachability, specificity
Reservoirs of knowledge, Meaning of Knowledge
Management, Forces Driving Organizational issues in
KM, KM Systems & their role Relevance of KM in
today’s dynamic & complex environment Future of
Knowledge Management 5
II Knowledge
management
system life cycle Challenges in Building KM Systems – Conventional
versus KM System Life Cycle (KMSLS)
– Knowledge Creation and Knowledge Architecture –
Nonaka’s Model of Knowledge Creation and
Transformation. Knowledge Architecture. 8
III KM Solutions for
capture, sharing &
applications KM Processes, KM Systems, Mechanisms &
Technologies
Knowledge Capturing Techniques: Brain Storming –
Protocol Analysis – Consen sus Decision Making –
Repertory Grid - Concept Mapping –Blackboarding,
Nominal Group Technique, Delphi method, 9
IV Knowledge
codification
Modes of Knowledge Conversion – Codification Tools
and Procedures – Knowledge Developer’s Skill Sets –
System Testing and Deployment – Knowledge Testing –
Approaches to Logical Testing, User Acceptance
Testing – KM System Deployment
Issues – User Training – Post implementation.
9
V Knowledge
transfer and
sharing Transfer Methods – Role of the Internet – Knowledge
Transfer in e -world – KM System
Tools – Neural Network – Association Rules –
Classification Trees – Data Mining and
Business Intelligence – Decision Making Architecture –
Data Management – Knowledge
Management Protocols – Managing Knowledge
Worke rs. 9
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 264
VI KM Impact Dimensions of KM Impact – People, Processes,
Products & Organizational Performance Factors
influencing impact – universalistic & contingency views
Assessment of KM Impact – Qualitative & quantitative
measures Identification of appropriate KM solutions,
Ethical Legal and Managerial Issues 9
Text Books:
1. Irma Becerra -Fernandez, Avelino Gonzalez, Rajiv Sabherwal (2004). Knowledge Management
Challenges, Solutions, and Technologies . Prentice Hall. ISBN: 0 -13-109931 -0.
2. Elias M. Awad, Hassan M. Ghaziri (2004). Knowledge Management. Prentice Hall. ISBN: 0 -13-
034820 -1
3. Donald Hislop, Knowledge Management in Organizations, Oxford 2nd Edition. Ian Watson (2002).
4. Shelda Debowski, Knowledge Management, Wiley India Edition .
References:
1. Madanmohan Rao (2004). Knowledge Management Tools and Techniques: Practitioners and
Experts Evaluate KM Solutions. Butterworth -Heinemann. ISBN: 0750678186.
2. Stuart Barnes (Ed.) (2002). Knowledge Management Systems Theory and Practice. T homson
Learning.
3. Kimiz Dalkir, Knowledge Management in Theory and Practice, Elsevier, Butterworth Hinemann.
4. Applying Knowledge Management: Techniques for Building Corporate Memories. Morgan
Kaufmann. ISBN: 1558607609.
Assessment:
Internal Assessmen t for 20 marks:
Consisting of Two Compulsory Class Tests
Approximately 40% to 50% of syllabus content must be covered in First test and remaining 40% to
50% of syllabus contents must be covered in second test.
End Semester Examination: Some guidelines fo r setting the question papers are as:
Weightage of each module in end semester examination is
expected to be/will be proportional to number of respective lecture
hours mentioned in the syllabus.
Question paper will comprise of total six questions , each
carrying 20 marks.
Q.1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of
the syllabus .
Remaining question will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2
has part (a) from module 3 then part (b) will be from any other
module. (Randomly selected from all the modules.)
Total four questions need to be solved.
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 265
Course Code Course
Name Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical
/Oral Tutorial Total
ITDLO 8044 Robotics 04 -- -- 04 -- -- 04
Course
Code Course
Name Examination Scheme
Theory Marks
Term
Work Practical
& Oral Oral Total Internal assessment End
Sem.
Exam Test1 Test2 Avg. of
two Tests
ITDLO 80
44 Robotics 20 20 20 80 -- -- -- 100
Course Objectives: Students will try:
1. Learn the basic concepts of Robots.
2. Learn the concepts of Kinematics of Robotics.
3. Learn the concepts of Motions, velocities and dynamic analysis of force.
4. Learn the concepts of Motion planning.
5. Learn the concepts of Trajectory Planning
6. Learn the concepts of Potential Functions, Visibility Graphs and Coverage P lanning
Course Outcomes: Student will be able to:
1. Apply the basic concepts of Robots.
2. Apply and evaluate the concepts of Kinematics of Robotics.
3. Apply the Motions, velocities and dynamic analysis of force.
4. Apply and evaluate Motion planning.
5. Apply the co ncepts of Trajectory Planning
6. Apply the concepts of Potential Functions, Visibility Graphs and Coverage Planning
Prerequisites: Basic of Electrical Engineering.
Detailed syllabus:
Sr.
No. Module Detailed Content Hours CO
Mapping
0 Prerequisites Basics of Electrical Engineering 02 --
I Fundamentals Robot Classification, Robot
Components, Degrees of freedom,
Joints, Coordinates, Coordinate 04 CO1
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 266
frames, workspace, applications
II Kinematics of
Robotics Homogeneous transformation
matrices, Inverse transformation
matrices, Forward and inverse
kinematic equations – position and
orientation, Denavit -Hatenberg
representation of forward
kinematics, Inverse kinematic
solutions, Case studies 11 CO2
III Motions, velocities
and dynamic
analysis of force Differential relationship, Jacobian,
Differential motion of a frame and
robot, Inverse Jacobian.
Lagrangian mechanics, Moments of
Inertia, Dynamic equations of
robots, Transformation of forces
and moment between coordinate
frames 09 CO3
IV Trajectory
Planning Trajectory planning, Joint -space
trajectory planning, Cartesian -space
trajectories 08 CO5
V Motion Planning Concept of motion planning, Bug
Algorithms – Bug1, Bug2, Tangent
Bug 04 CO4
VI Potential
Functions,
Visibility Graphs
and Coverage
Planning Attractive/Repulsive potential,
Gradient descent, wave -front
planner, navigation potential
functions, Visibility map,
Generalized Voronoi diagrams and
graphs, Silhouette methods.
Cell Decomposition, Localization
and Mapping 14 CO6
Text Books:
1. Saeed Benjamin Niku, “Introduction to Robotics – Analysis, Control, Applications”, Wiley
India Pvt. Ltd., Second Edition, 2011
2. Howie Choset, Kevin M. Lynch, Seth Hutchinson, George Kantor, Wolfram Burgard,
Lydia E. Kavraki and Sebastian Thrun, “Prin ciples of Robot Motion –Theory, Algorithms
and Implementations”, Prentice -Hall of India
References:
1. Mark W. Spong & M. Vidyasagar, “Robot Dynamics & Control”, Wiley India Pvt. Ltd.,
Second Edition, 2004
2. John J. Craig, “Introduction to Robotics – Mechanics & Control”, Third Edition, Pearson
Education, India, 2009
3. Aaron Martinez & Enrique Fernandez, “Learning ROS for Robotics Programming”, Shroff
Publishers, First Edition, 2013.
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 267
Assessment:
Internal Assessment for 20 marks:
Consisting of Two Compulsory C lass Tests
Approximately 40% to 50% of syllabus content must be covered in First test and remaining 40% to
50% of syllabus contents must be covered in second test.
End Semester Examination: Some guidelines for setting the question papers are as:
Weightage of each module in end semester examination is
expected to be/will be proportional to number of respective lecture
hours mentioned in the syllabus.
Question paper will comprise of total six questions , each
carrying 20 marks.
Q.1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of
the syllabus .
Remaining question will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2
has part (a) from module 3 then part (b) will be from any other
module. (Randomly selected from all the modules.)
Total four questions need to be solved.
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 268
Course Code Course
Name Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical
/Oral Tutorial Total
ITDLO 8045 Enterprise
Resource
Planning 04 -- -- 04 -- -- 04
Course
Code Course
Name Examination Scheme
Theory Marks
Term
Work Practical
& Oral Oral Total Internal assessment End
Sem.
Exam Test1 Test2 Avg. of
two Tests
ITDLO8 0
45 Enterprise
Resource
Planning 20 20 20 80 -- -- -- 100
Course Objectives: Students will try:
1. To learn the basic concepts of ERP.
2. To learn different technologies used in ERP.
3. To learn the concepts of ERP Manufacturing Perspective and ERP Modules.
4. To learn what are the benefits of ERP
5. To study and understand the ERP life cycle.
6. To learn the different tools used in ERP.
Course Outcomes: Student will be able to:
1. Understand the basic concepts of ERP.
2. Identify different technologies used in ERP.
3. Understand and apply the concepts of ERP Manufacturing Perspective and ERP Modules.
4. Discuss the benefits of ERP
5. Understand and implement the ERP li fe cycle.
6. Apply different tools used in ERP.
Detailed syllabus:
Sr.
No. Module Detailed Content Hours CO
Mapping
0 Prerequisites Basics of software. 02 --
I Introduction to
ERP Enterprise – An Overview
Integrated Management
Information, Business Modeling,
Integrated Data Model 04 CO1
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 269
II ERP Technologies Business Processing
Reengineering(BPR), Data
Warehousing, Data Mining, On -line
Analytical Processing(OLAP),
Supply Chain Management (SCM),
Customer Relationship
Management(CRM), MIS -
Management Information System,
DSS - Decision Support System,
EIS - Executive Information
System 06 CO2
III ERP
Manufacturing
Perspective and
ERP Modules MRP - Material Requirement
Planning, BOM - Bill Of Material,
MRP - Manufacturing Resource
Planning, DRP – Distributed
Requirement Planning, PDM -
Product Data Management.
Finance, Plant Maintenance,
Quality Management, Materials
Management. 10 CO3
IV Benefits of ERP Reduction of Lead -Time, On -time
Shipment, Reduction in Cycle
Time, Improved Resource
Utilization, Better Customer
Satisfaction, Improved Supplier
Performance, Increased Flexibility,
Reduced Quality, Costs, Improved
Information Accuracy and Design -
making Capability 08 CO4
V ERP Life cycle Pre-evaluation Screening, Package
Evaluation, Project Planning Phase,
Gap Analysis, Reengineering,
Configuration, Implementation
Team Training, Testing, Going
Live, End -user Training, Post -
implementation (Maintenance
mode).
06 CO5
VI E-Commerce to E -
business E-Business structural
transformation, Flexible Business
Design, Customer Experience,
Create the new techo enterprise,
New generation e -business leaders,
memo to CEO, Empower your
customer, Integrate Sales and
Service, Integrated Enterprise
applications. En terprise resource
planning the E -business Backbone
Enterprise architecture, planning,
ERP usage in Real world, ERP
Implementation, Future of ERP
applications, memo to CEO ,E -
Procurement, E - Governance,
Developing the E -Business Design. 16 CO6
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 270
JD Edwards -Enterpris e One.
Microsoft Dynamics -CRM Module.
Text Books:
1. Enterprise Resource Planning - Alexis Leon, Tata McGraw Hill.
2. Enterprise Resource Planning – Diversified by Alexis Leon, TMH.
3. Enterprise Resource Planning - Ravi Shankar & S. Jaiswal , Galgotia.
References:
1. Guide to Planning ERP Application, Annetta Clewwto and Dane Franklin, McGRaw -Hill,
1997
2. The SAP R/3 Handbook, Jose Antonio, McGraw – Hill
3. E-Business Network Resource planning using SAP R/3 Baan and Peoplesoft : A Practical
Roadmap For Success B y Dr. Ravi Kalakota
Assessment:
Internal Assessment for 20 marks:
Consisting of Two Compulsory Class Tests
Approximately 40% to 50% of syllabus content must be covered in First test and remaining 40% to
50% of syllabus contents must be covered in second test.
End Semester Examination: Some guidelines for setting the question papers are as:
Weightage of each module in end semester examination is
expected to be/will be proportional to number of respective lecture
hours mentioned in the syllabus.
Question paper will comprise of total six questions , each
carrying 20 marks.
Q.1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of
the syllabus .
Remaining question will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2
has part (a) from module 3 then part (b) will be from any other
module. (Randomly selected from all the modules.)
Total four questions need to be solved.
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 271
Course Code Course Name Credits
ILO8021 Project Management 03
Objectives:
1. To familiarize the students with the use of a structured methodology/approach for each and
every unique project undertaken, including utilizing project management concepts, tools and
techniques.
2. To appraise the students with the project management life cycle and make them knowledgeable
about the vario us phases from project initiation through closure.
Outcomes: Learner will be able to…
1. Apply selection criteria and select an appropriate project from different options.
2. Write work break down structure for a project and develop a schedule based on it.
3. Identify opportunities and threats to the project and decide an approach to deal with them
strategically.
4. Use Earned value technique and determine & predict status of the project.
5. Capture lessons learned during project phases and document them for future r eference
Module Detailed Contents Hrs
01 Project Management Foundation:
Definition of a project, Project Vs Operations, Necessity of project management,
Triple constraints, Project life cycles (typical & atypical) Project phases and
stage gate process. Role of project manager. Negotiations and resolving
conflicts. Project management in various organization structures. PM knowledge
areas as per Project Management Institute (PMI). 5
02 Initiating Projects:
How to get a project started, Selecting project strategically, Project selection
models (Numeric /Scoring Models and Non -numeric models), Project portfolio
process, Project sponsor and creating charter; Project proposal. Effective project
team, Stages of team development & growth (forming, storming, no rming &
performing), team dynamics. 6
03 Project Planning and Scheduling:
Work Breakdown structure (WBS) and linear responsibility chart, Interface
Co-ordination and concurrent engineering, Project cost estimation and
budgeting, Top down and bottoms up budgeting, Networking and Scheduling
techniques. PERT, CPM, GANTT chart. Introduction to Project Management
Information System (PMIS). 8
04 Planning Projects:
Crashing project time, Resource loading and leveling, Goldratt's critical chain,
Project Stakeholders and Communication plan.
Risk Management in projects: Risk management planning, Risk identification
and risk register. Qualitative and quantitative risk assessment, Probability and
impact matrix. Risk response strategies for positive and negat ive risks 6
05 5.1 Executing Projects:
Planning monitoring and controlling cycle. Information needs and reporting, 8
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 272
engaging with all stakeholders of the projects.
Team management, communication and project meetings.
5.2 Monitoring and Controlling Project s:
Earned Value Management techniques for measuring value of work completed;
Using milestones for measurement; change requests and scope creep. Project
audit.
5.3 Project Contracting
Project procurement management, contracting and outsourcing,
06 6.1 Project Leadership and Ethics:
Introduction to project leadership, ethics in projects.
Multicultural and virtual projects.
6.2 Closing the Project:
Customer acceptance; Reasons of project termination, Various types of project
terminations (Extinction, A ddition, Integration, Starvation), Process of project
termination, completing a final report; doing a lessons learned analysis;
acknowledging successes and failures; Project management templates and other
resources; Managing without authority; Areas of f urther study. 6
REFERENCES:
1. Jack Meredith & Samuel Mantel, Project Management: A managerial approach, Wiley India,
7thEd.
2. A Guide to the Project Management Body of Knowledge (PMBOK ® Guide), 5th Ed, Project
Management Institute PA, USA
3. Gido Clements, Project Management, Cengage Learning.
4. Gopalan, Project Management, , Wiley India
5. Dennis Lock, Project Management, Gower Publishing England, 9 th Ed.
Assessment :
Internal:
Assessment consists of two tests out of which; one should be compulsory class test and the other is
either a class test or assignment on live problems or course project.
End Semester Theory Examination:
Some guidelines for setting up the question paper. Minimum 80% syllabus should be covered in
question papers of end semester exa mination. In question paper weightage of each module will be
proportional to number of respective lecture hours as mention in the syllabus.
1. Question paper will comprise of total six question
2. All question carry equal marks
3. Questions will be mixed in nature (for example supposed Q.2 has part (a) from module 3 then
part (b) will be from any module other than module 3)
4. Only Four question need to be solved.
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 273
Course Code Course Name Credits
ILO8022 Finance Management 03
Objectives:
1. Overview of Indian financial system, instruments and market
2. Basic concepts of value of money, returns and risks, corporate finance, working capital and its
management
3. Knowledge about sources of finance, capital structure, dividend policy
Outcomes: Learner will be able to…
1. Understand Indian finance system and corporate finance
2. Take investment, finance as well as dividend decisions
Module Detailed Contents Hrs
01 Overview of Indian Financial System: Characteristics, Components and
Functions of Financial System.
Financial Instruments: Meaning, Characteristics and Classification of Basic
Financial Instruments — Equity Shares, Preference Shares, Bonds -Debentures,
Certificates of Deposit, and Treasury Bills.
Financial Markets: Meaning, Characteristics and Classificat ion of Financial
Markets — Capital Market, Money Market and Foreign Currency Market
Financial Institutions: Meaning, Characteristics and Classification of Financial
Institutions — Commercial Banks, Investment -Merchant Banks and Stock
Exchanges 06
02 Conce pts of Returns and Risks: Measurement of Historical Returns and
Expected Returns of a Single Security and a Two -security Portfolio;
Measurement of Historical Risk and Expected Risk of a Single Security and a
Two-security Portfolio.
Time Value of Money: Future Value of a Lump Sum, Ordinary Annuity, and
Annuity Due; Present Value of a Lump Sum, Ordinary Annuity, and Annuity
Due; Continuous Compounding and Continuous Discounting. 06
03 Overview of Corporate Finance: Objectives of Corporate Finance; Functions
of Corporate Finance —Investment Decision, Financing Decision, and Dividend
Decision.
Financial Ratio Analysis: Overview of Financial Statements —Balance Sheet,
Profit and Loss Account, and Cash Flow Statement; Purpose of Financial Ratio
Analysis; Liquidity Ratios; Efficiency or Activity Ratios; Profitability Ratios;
Capital Structure Ratios; Stock Market Ratios; Limitations of Ratio Analysis. 09
04 Capital Budgeting: Meaning and Importance of Capital Budgeting; Inputs for
Capital Budgeting Decisions; Invest ment Appraisal Criterion —Accounting Rate
of Return, Payback Period, Discounted Payback Period, Net Present
Value(NPV), Profitability Index, Internal Rate of Return (IRR), and Modified
Internal Rate of Return (MIRR) 10
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 274
Working Capital Management: Concepts of M eaning Working Capital;
Importance of Working Capital Management; Factors Affecting an Entity’s
Working Capital Needs; Estimation of Working Capital Requirements;
Management of Inventories; Management of Receivables; and Management of
Cash and Marketable S ecurities.
05 Sources of Finance: Long Term Sources —Equity, Debt, and Hybrids;
Mezzanine Finance; Sources of Short Term Finance —Trade Credit, Bank
Finance, Commercial Paper; Project Finance.
Capital Structure: Factors Affecting an Entity’s Capital Structure; Overview of
Capital Structure Theories and Approaches — Net Income Approach, Net
Operating Income Approach; Traditional Approach, and Modigliani -Miller
Approach. Relation between Capital Structure and Corporate Value; Concept of
Optimal Capital S tructure 05
06 Dividend Policy: Meaning and Importance of Dividend Policy; Factors
Affecting an Entity’s Dividend Decision; Overview of Dividend Policy Theories
and Approaches —Gordon’s Approach, Walter’s Approach, and Modigliani -
Miller Approach 03
REFERENCES:
1. Fundamentals of Financial Management, 13th Edition (2015) by Eugene F. Brigham and Joel F.
Houston; Publisher: Cengage Publications, New Delhi.
2. Analysis for Financial Management, 10th Edition (2013) by Robert C. Higgins; Publishers:
McGraw Hill Education, New Delhi.
3. Indian Financial System, 9th Edition (2015) by M. Y. Khan; Publisher: McGraw Hill
Education, New Delhi.
4. Financial Management, 11th Edition (2015) by I. M. Pandey; Publisher: S. Chand (G/L) &
Company Limited, New Delhi.
Assessment :
Internal:
Assessment consists of two tests out of which; one should be compulsory class test and the other is
either a class test or assignment on live problems or course project.
End Semester Theory Examination:
Some guidelines for setting up the que stion paper. Minimum 80% syllabus should be covered in
question papers of end semester examination. In question paper weightage of each module will be
proportional to number of respective lecture hours as mention in the syllabus.
1. Question paper will comprise of total six question
2. All question carry equal marks
3. Questions will be mixed in nature (for example supposed Q.2 has part (a) from module 3 then
part (b) will be from any module other than module 3)
4. Only Four question need to be solved.
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 275
Course Code Course Name Credits
ILO8023 Enterpreneurship Development and Management 03
Objectives:
1. To acquaint with entrepreneurship and management of business
2. Understand Indian environment for entrepreneurship
3. Idea of EDP, MSME
Outcomes: Learner will be able to…
1. Understand the concept of business plan and ownerships
2. Interpret key regulations and legal aspects of entrepreneurship in India
3. Understand government policies for entrepreneurs
Module Detailed Contents Hrs
01 Overview Of Entrepreneurship: Definitions, Roles and Functions/Values of
Entrepreneurship, History of Entrepreneurship Development, Role of
Entrepreneurship in the National Economy, Functions of an Entrepreneur,
Entrepreneurship and Forms of Business Ownership
Role of Money and Capital Markets in Entrepreneurial Development:
Contribution of Government Agencies in Sourcing information for
Entrepreneurship 04
02 Business Plans And Importance Of Capital To Entrepreneurship:
Preliminary and Marketing Plans, Management and Personnel, Start -up Costs
and Financing as well as Projected Financial Statements, Legal Section,
Insurance, Suppliers and Risks, Assumptions and Conclusion, Capital and its
Importance to the Entrepreneur
Entrepreneurship And Business Development: Starting a New Business,
Buying an Existing Business, New Product Development, Business Growth and
the Entrepreneur Law and its Relevance to Business Operations 09
03 Women’s Entrepreneurship Development, Social e ntrepreneurship -role and
need, EDP cell, role of sustainability and sustainable development for SMEs,
case studies, exercises 05
04 Indian Environment for Entrepreneurship: key regulations and legal aspects ,
MSMED Act 2006 and its implications, schemes and policies of the Ministry of
MSME, role and responsibilities of various government organisations,
departments, banks etc., Role of State governments in terms of infrastruc ture
developments and support etc., Public private partnerships, National Skill
development Mission, Credit Guarantee Fund, PMEGP, discussions, group
exercises etc 08
05 Effective Management of Business: Issues and problems faced by micro and
small enterp rises and effective management of M and S enterprises (risk
management, credit availability, technology innovation, supply chain
management, linkage with large industries), exercises, e -Marketing 08
06 Achieving Success In The Small Business: Stages of the small business life
cycle, four types of firm -level growth strategies, Options – harvesting or closing
small business Critical Success factors of small business 05
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 276
REFERENCES:
1. Poornima Charantimath, Entrepreneurship development - Small Bus iness Enterprise, Pearson
2. Education Robert D Hisrich, Michael P Peters, Dean A Shapherd, Entrepreneurship, latest
edition, The McGrawHill Company
3. Dr TN Chhabra, Entrepreneurship Development, Sun India Publications, New Delhi
4. Dr CN Prasad, Small and Medium Enterprises in Global Perspective, New century
Publications, New Delhi
5. Vasant Desai, Entrepreneurial development and management, Himalaya Publishing House
6. Maddhurima Lall, Shikah Sahai, Entrepreneurship, Excel Books
7. Rashmi Bansal, STAY hungry STAY foolish, CIIE, IIM Ahmedabad
8. Law and Practice relating to Micro, Small and Medium enterprises, Taxmann Publication Ltd.
9. Kurakto, Entrepreneurship - Principles and Practices, Thomson Publication
10. Laghu Udyog Samachar
11. www.msme.gov. in
12. www.dcmesme.gov.in
13. www.msmetraining.gov.in
Assessment :
Internal:
Assessment consists of two tests out of which; one should be compulsory class test and the other is
either a class test or assignment on live problems or course project.
End Semester Theory Examination:
Some guidelines for setting up the question paper. Minimum 80% syllabus should be covered in
question papers of end semester examination. In question paper weightage of each module will be
proportional to number of respec tive lecture hours as mention in the syllabus.
1. Question paper will comprise of total six question
2. All question carry equal marks
3. Questions will be mixed in nature (for example supposed Q.2 has part (a) from module 3 then
part (b) will be from any module other than module 3)
4. Only Four question need to be solved.
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 277
Course Code Course Name Credits
ILO8024 Human Resource Management 03
Objectives:
1. To introduce the students with basic concepts, techniques and practices of the human resource
management.
2. To provide opportunity of learning Human resource management (HRM) processes, related
with the functions, and challenges in the emerging perspective of today’s organizations.
3. To familiarize the students about the latest developments, trends & different as pects of HRM.
4. To acquaint the student with the importance of inter -personal & inter -group behavioral skills in
an organizational setting required for future stable engineers, leaders and managers.
Outcomes: Learner will be able to…
1. Understand the concepts, aspects, techniques and practices of the human resource management.
2. Understand the Human resource management (HRM) processes, functions, changes and
challenges in today’s emerging organizational perspective.
3. Gain knowledge about the latest develo pments and trends in HRM.
4. Apply the knowledge of behavioral skills learnt and integrate it with in inter personal and
intergroup environment emerging as future stable engineers and managers.
Module Detailed Contents Hrs
01 Introduction to HR
Human Resource Management - Concept, Scope and Importance,
Interdisciplinary Approach Relationship with other Sciences,
Competencies of HR Manager, HRM functions.
Human resource development (HRD): changing role of HRM – Human
resource Planning, Technological chan ge, Restructuring and rightsizing,
Empowerment, TQM, Managing ethical issues. 5
02 Organizational Behavior (OB)
Introduction to OB Origin, Nature and Scope of Organizational
Behavior, Relevance to Organizational Effectiveness and Contemporary
issues
Personality: Meaning and Determinants of Personality, Personality
development, Personality Types, Assessment of Personality Traits for
Increasing Self Awareness
Perception: Attitude and Value, Effect of perception on Individual
Decision -making, Attitude an d Behavior.
Motivation: Theories of Motivation and their Applications for
Behavioral Change (Maslow, Herzberg, McGregor);
Group Behavior and Group Dynamics: Work groups formal and informal
groups and stages of group development. Team Effectiveness: High
performing teams, Team Roles, cross functional and self -directed team.
Case study 7
03 Organizational Structure &Design
Structure, size, technology, Environment of organization; Organizational
Roles & conflicts: Concept of roles; role dynamics; role conflicts and 6
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 278
stress.
Leadership: Concepts and skills of leadership, Leadership and
managerial roles, Leadership styles and contemporary issues in
leadership.
Power and Politics: Sources and uses of power; Politics at workplace,
Tactics and strategies.
04 Human resource Planning
Recruitment and Selection process, Job -enrichment, Empowerment -
Job-Satisfaction, employee morale.
Performance Appraisal Systems: Traditional & modern methods,
Performance Counseling, Career Planning.
Training & Development: Identification of Training Needs, Training
Methods 5
05 Emerging Trends in HR
Organizational development; Business Process Re -engineering (BPR),
BPR as a tool for organizational development , managing processes &
transformation in HR. Organizational Change, Culture, Environment
Cross Cultural Leadership and Decision Making : Cross C ultural
Communication and d iversity at work , Causes of diversity, managing
diversity with special reference to handicapped, women and ageing
people, intra company cultural difference in employee motivation. 6
06 HR & MIS
Need, purpose, objective and role of information system in HR, Applications in
HRD in various industries (e.g. manufacturing R&D, Public Transport,
Hospitals, Hotels and service industries
Strategic HRM
Role of Strategic HRM in the modern business world, Concept of Strategy,
Strategic Management Process, Approaches to Strategic Decision Making;
Strategic Intent – Corporate Mission, Vision, Objectives and Goals
Labor Laws & Industrial Relations
Evolution of IR, IR issues in organizations, Overview of Labor Laws in India;
Industrial Disp utes Act, Trade Unions Act, Shops and Establishments Act 10
REFERENCES:
1. Stephen Robbins, Organizational Behavior, 16th Ed, 2013
2. V S P Rao, Human Resource Management, 3rd Ed, 2010, Excel publishing
3. Aswathapa, Human resource management: Text & cases, 6th edition, 2011
4. C. B. Mamoria and S V Gankar, Dynamics of Industrial Relations in India, 15th Ed, 2015,
Himalaya Publishing, 15thedition, 2015
5. P. Subba Rao, Essentials of Human Resource management and Industrial relations, 5th Ed,
2013, Himalaya Publishing
6. Laurie Mullins, Management & Organizational Behavior, Latest Ed, 2016, Pearson
Publications
Assessment :
Internal:
Assessment consists of two tests out of which; one should be compulsory class test and the other is
either a class test or assignment on live problems or course project.
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 279
End Semester Theory Examination:
Some guidelines for setting up the question paper. Minimum 80% syllabus should be covered in
question papers of end semester examination. In question paper weightage of each module will b e
proportional to number of respective lecture hours as mention in the syllabus.
1. Question paper will comprise of total six question
2. All question carry equal marks
3. Questions will be mixed in nature (for example supposed Q.2 has part (a) from module 3 then
part (b) will be from any module other than module 3)
4. Only Four question need to be solved.
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 280
Course Code Course Name Credits
ILO8025 Professional Ethics and Corporat Social Responsibility (CSR) 03
Objectives:
1. To understand professional ethics in business
2. To recognized corporate social responsibility
Outcomes: Learner will be able to…
1. Understand rights and duties of business
2. Distinguish different aspects of corporate social responsibility
3. Demonstrate professional ethics
4. Understand legal aspects of corporate social responsibility
Module Detailed Contents Hrs
01 Professional Ethics and Business: The Nature of Business Ethics; Ethical
Issues in Business; Moral Responsibility and Blame; Utilitarianism: Weighing
Social Costs and Benefits; Rights and Duties of Business 04
02 Professional Ethics in the Marketplace: Perfect Competition; Monopoly
Competition; Oligopolistic Competition; Oligopolies and Public Policy
Professional Ethics and the Environment: Dimensions of Poll ution and
Resource Depletion; Ethics of Pollution Control; Ethics of Conserving
Depletable Resources 08
03 Professional Ethics of Consumer Protection: Markets and Consumer
Protection; Contract View of Business Firm’s Duties to Consumers; Due Care
Theory; Advertising Ethics; Consumer Privacy
Professional Ethics of Job Discrimination: Nature of Job Discrimination;
Extent of Discrimination; Reservation of Jobs. 06
04 Introduction to Corporate Social Responsibility: Potential Business
Benefits —Triple bottom l ine, Human resources, Risk management, Supplier
relations; Criticisms and concerns —Nature of business; Motives; Misdirection.
Trajectory of Corporate Social Responsibility in India 05
05 Corporate Social Responsibility: Articulation of Gandhian Trusteeship
Corporate Social Responsibility and Small and Medium Enterprises (SMEs) in
India, Corporate Social Responsibility and Public -Private Partnership (PPP) in
India 08
06 Corporate Social Responsibility in Globalizing Indi a: Corporate Social
Responsibility Voluntary Guidelines, 2009 issued by the Ministry of Corporate
Affairs, Government of India, Legal Aspects of Corporate Social
Responsibility —Companies Act, 2013. 08
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 281
REFERENCES:
1. Business Ethics: Texts and Cases from the Indian Perspective (2013) by Ananda Das Gupta;
Publisher: Springer.
2. Corporate Social Responsibility: Readings and Cases in a Global Context (2007) by Andrew
Crane, Dirk Matten, Laura Spence; Publisher: Routledge.
3. Business Ethics: Concepts and Cases, 7t h Edition (2011) by Manuel G. Velasquez; Publisher:
Pearson, New Delhi.
4. Corporate Social Responsibility in India (2015) by BidyutChakrabarty, Routledge, New Delhi.
Assessment :
Internal:
Assessment consists of two tests out of which; one should be compulsory class test and the other is
either a class test or assignment on live problems or course project.
End Semester Theory Examination:
Some guidelines for setting up the question paper. Minimum 80% syllabus should be covered in
question papers of end semester examination. In question paper weightage of each module will be
proportional to number of respective lecture hours as mention in the syllabus.
1. Question paper will comprise of total six question
2. All question carry equal marks
3. Questions will be mixed in nature (for example supposed Q.2 has part (a) from module 3 then
part (b) will be from any module other than module 3)
4. Only Four question need to be solved.
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 282
Course Code Course Name Credits
ILO8026 Research Methodology 03
Objectives:
1. To understand Research and Research Process
2. To acquaint students with identifying problems for research and develop research strategies
3. To familiarize students with the techniques of data collection, analysis of data and
interpretation
Outcomes: Learner will be able to…
1. Prepare a preliminary research design for projects in their subject matter areas
2. Accurately collect, analyze and report data
3. Present complex data or situations clearly
4. Review and analyze research findings
Module Detail ed Contents Hrs
01 Introduction and Basic Research Concepts
1.1 Research – Definition; Concept of Construct, Postulate, Proposition, Thesis,
Hypothesis, Law, Principle.Research methods vs Methodology
1.2 Need of Research in Business and Social Sciences
1.3 Objectives of Research
1.4 Issues and Problems in Research
1.5 Characteristics of Research:Systematic, Valid, Verifiable, Empirical and
Critical 09
02 Types of Research
2.1. Basic Research
2.2. Applied Research
2.3. Descriptive Research
2.4. Analytical Research
2.5. Empirical Research
2.6 Qualitative and Quantitative Approaches 07
03 Research Design and Sample Design
3.1 Research Design – Meaning, Types and Significance
3.2 Sample Design – Meaning and Significance Essentials of a good sampling
Stages in Sample Design Sampling methods/techniques Sampling Errors 07
04 Research Methodology
4.1 Meaning of Research Methodology
4.2. Stages in Scientific Research Process:
a. Identification and Selection of Research Problem
b. Formulation of Research Problem
c. Review of Literature
d. Formulation of Hypothesis
e. Formulation of research Design
f. Sample Design
g. Data Collection
h. Data Analysis
i. Hypothesis testing and Interpretation of Data 08
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 283
j. Preparation of Research Report
05 Formulating Research Problem
5.1 Considerations: Relevance, Interest, Data Availability, Choice of data,
Analysis of data, Generalization and Interpretation of analysis 04
06 Outcome of Research
6.1 Preparation of the report on conclusion reached
6.2 Validity Testing & Ethical Issues
6.3 Suggestions and Recommendation 04
REFERENCES:
1. Dawson, Catherine, 2002, Practical Research Methods, New Delhi, UBS Publishers
Distributors.
2. Kothari, C.R.,1985, Research Methodology -Methods and Techniques, New Delhi, Wiley
Eastern Limited.
3. Kumar, Ranjit, 2005, Research Methodology -A Step -by-Step Guide for Beginners, (2nded),
Singapore, Pearson Education
Assessment :
Internal:
Assessment consists of two tests out of which; one should be compulsory class test and the other is
either a class test or at least 6 assignment on complete syllabus or course project.
End Semester Theory Examination:
Some guidelines for setting up the question paper. Minimum 80% syllabus should be covered in
question papers of end se mester examination. In question paper weightage of each module will be
proportional to number of respective lecture hours as mention in the syllabus.
1. Question paper will comprise of total six question
2. All question carry equal marks
3. Questions will be mixed in nature (for example supposed Q.2 has part (a) from module 3 then
part (b) will be from any module other than module 3)
4. Only Four question need to be solved.
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 284
Course Code Course Name Credits
ILO8027 IPR and Patenting 03
Objectives:
1. To understand intellectual property rights protection system
2. To promote the knowledge of Intellectual Property Laws of India as well as International treaty
procedures
3. To get acquaintance with Patent search and patent filing procedure and applications
Outcomes: Learner will be able to…
1. understand Intellectual Property assets
2. assist individuals and organizations in capacity building
3. work for development, promotion, protection, compliance, and enforcement of Intellectual
Property and Patenting
Module Detailed Contents Hr
01 Introduction to Intellectual Property Rights (IPR) : Meaning of IPR,
Different category of IPR instruments - Patents, Trademarks,Copyrights,
Industrial Designs, Plant variety protection, Geographical indications,Transfer of
technol ogy etc.
Importance of IPR in Modern Global Economic Environment: Theories of
IPR, Philosophical aspects of IPR laws, Need for IPR, IPR as an instrument of
development 05
02 Enforcement of Intellectual Property Rights: Introduction, Magnitude of
problem, Factors that create and sustain counterfeiting/piracy, International
agreements, International organizations (e.g. WIPO, WTO) activein IPR
enforcement
Indian Scenario of IPR: Introduction, History of IPR in India, Overvi ew of IP
laws in India, Indian IPR, Administrative Machinery, Major international treaties
signed by India, Procedure for submitting patent and Enforcement of IPR at
national level etc. 07
03 Emerging Issues in IPR: Challenges for IP in digital economy, e-commerce,
human genome,biodiversity and traditional knowledge etc. 05
04 Basics of Patents: Definition of Patents, Conditions of patentability, Patentable
and non -patentable inventions, Types of patent applications (e.g. Patent of
addition etc), Process Patent and Product Patent, Precautions while patenting,
Patent specification Patent claims, Disclosures and non -disclosures, Patent rights
and infringement, Method of getting a patent 07
05 Patent Rules: Indian patent act, European scenario, US scenario, Australia
scenario, Japan scenario, Chinese scenario, Multilateral treaties where India is a
member (TRIPS agreement, Paris convention etc.) 08
06 Procedure for Filing a Patent (National and International): Legislation and
Salient Features, Patent Search, Drafting and Filing Patent Applications,
Processing of patent, Patent Litigation, Patent Publicationetc, Time frame and
cost, Patent Licensing, Patent Infringement 07
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 285
Patent databases: Important websites, Searching international databases
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Rajkumar S. Adukia, 2007, A Handbook on Laws Relating to Intellectual Property Rights in
India, The Institute of Chartered Accountants of India
2. Keayla B K, Patent system and related issues at a glance, Published by National Working
Group on Patent Laws
3. T Sengupta, 2011, Intellectual Property Law in India, Kluwer Law International
4. Tzen Wong and Graham Dutfield, 2010, Intellectual Property and Human Development:
Current Trends and Future Scenario, Cambridge University Press
5. Cornish, William Rodolph & Llewelyn, David. 2010, Intellectual Property: Patents,
Copyrights, Trade Marks and Allied Right, 7th Edition, Sweet & Maxwell
6. Lous Harns, 2012, The enforcement of Intellactual Property Rights: A Case Book, 3rd Edition,
WIPO
7. Prabhuddha Ganguli, 2012, Intellectual Property Rights, 1st Edition, TMH
8. R Radha Krishnan & S Balasubramanian, 2012, Intellectual Property Rights, 1st Edition, Excel
Books
9. M Ashok Kumar and mohd Iqbal Ali, 2 -11, Intellectual Property Rights, 2nd Edition, Serial
Publications
10. Kompal Bansal and Praishit Bansal, 2012, Fundamentals of IPR for Engineers, 1st Edition, BS
Publications
11. Entrepreneurship Development and IPR Unit, BITS Pilani, 2007, A Manual on Intellectual
Property Rights,
12. Mathew Y Maa, 2009, Fundamentals of Patenting and Li censing for Scientists and Engineers,
World Scientific Publishing Company
13. N S Rathore, S M Mathur, Priti Mathur, Anshul Rathi , IPR: Drafting,Interpretation of Patent
Specifications and Claims , New India Publishing Agency
14. Vivien Irish, 2005, Intellectual Property Rights for Engineers,IET
15. Howard B Rockman, 2004, Intellectual Property Law for Engineers and scientists, Wiley -IEEE
Press
Assessment :
Internal:
Assessment consists of two tests out of which; one should be compulsory class test and the other is
either a class test or at least 6 assignment on complete syllabus or course project.
End Semester Theory Examination:
Some guidelines for setting up the question paper. Minimum 80% syllabus should be covered in
question papers of end semester examinatio n. In question paper weightage of each module will be
proportional to number of respective lecture hours as mention in the syllabus.
1. Question paper will comprise of total six question
2. All question carry equal marks
3. Questions will be mixed in nature (for example supposed Q.2 has part (a) from module 3 then
part (b) will be from any module other than module 3)
4. Only Four question need to be solved.
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 286
Course Code Course Name Credits
ILO8028 Digital Business Management 03
Objectives:
1. To familiarize with digital business concept
2. To acquaint with E -commerce
3. To give insights into E -business and its strategies
Outcomes: The learner will be able to …..
1. Identify drivers of digital business
2. Illustrate various approaches and techniques for E -business and management
3. Prepare E -business plan
Module Detailed content Hours
1 Introduction to Digital Business -
Introduction, Background and current status, E -market places, structures,
mechanisms, economics and impacts
Difference between physical economy and digital economy,
Drivers of digital business - Big Data & Analytics, Mobile, Cloud
Computing, Social media, BYOD, and Internet of Things(digitally
intelligent machines/services)
Opportunities and Challenges in Digita l Business, 09
2 Overview of E -Commerce
E-Commerce - Meaning, Retailing in e -commerce -products and services,
consumer behavior, market research and advertisement
B2B-E-commerce -selling and buying in private e -markets, public B2B
exchanges and support services, e -supply chains, Collaborative Commerce,
Intra business EC and Corporate portals
Other E -C models and applications, innovative EC System -From E -
government and learning to C2C, mobile commerce and pervasive
computing
EC Strategy and Implementation -EC strategy and global EC, Economics
and Justification of EC, Using Affiliate marketing to promote your e -
commerce business, Launching a successful online business and EC
project, Legal, Ethics and Societal impacts of EC 06
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 287
3 Digital Business Support services : ERP as e –business backbone,
knowledge Tope Apps, Information and referral system
Application Development: Building Digital business Applications and
Infrastructure 06
4 Managing E -Business -Managing Knowledge, Management skill s for e -
business, Managing Risks in e –business
Security Threats to e -business -Security Overview, Electronic Commerce
Threats, Encryption, Cryptography, Public Key and Private Key
Cryptography, Digital Signatures, Digital Certificates, Security Protocols
over Public Networks: HTTP, SSL, Firewall as Security Control, Public
Key Infrastructure (PKI) for Security, Prominent Cryptographic
Applications 06
5 E-Business Strategy -E-business Strategic formulation - Analysis of
Company’s Internal and external enviro nment, Selection of strategy,
E-business strategy into Action, challenges and E -Transition
(Process of Digital Transformation) 04
6 Materializing e -business: From Idea to Realization -Business plan
preparation
Case Studies and presentations 08
References:
1. A textbook on E -commerce , Er Arunrajan Mishra, Dr W K Sarwade,Neha Publishers &
Distributors, 2011
2. E-commerce from vision to fulfilment, Elias M. Awad, PHI-Restricted, 2002
3. Digital Business and E -Commerce Management, 6th Ed, Dave Chaffey, Pearson, August 2014
4. Introduction to E -business -Management and Strategy, Colin Combe, ELSVIER, 2006
5. Digital Business Concepts and Strategy, Eloise Coupey, 2nd Edition, Pearson
6. Trend and Challenges in Digital Business Innovation, Vinocenz oMorabito, Springer
7. Digital Business Discourse Erika Darics, April 2015, Palgrave Macmillan
8. E-Governance -Challenges and Opportunities in : Proceedings in 2nd International Conference
theory and practice of Electronic Governance
9. Perspectives the Digital Ent erprise –A framework for Transformation, TCS consulting journal
Vol.5
10. Measuring Digital Economy -A new perspective -DOI: 10.1787/9789264221796 -enOECD
Publishing
Assessment :
Internal:
Assessment consists of two tests out of which; one should be compulsory class test and the other is
either a class test or at least 6 assignment on complete syllabus or course project.
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 288
End Semester Theory Examination:
Some guidelines for setting up the question paper. Minimum 80% syllabus should be covered in
question papers of end semester examination. In question paper weightage of each module will be
proportional to number of respective lecture hours as mention in th e syllabus.
1. Question paper will comprise of total six question
2. All question carry equal marks
3. Questions will be mixed in nature (for example supposed Q.2 has part (a) from module 3 then
part (b) will be from any module other than module 3)
4. Only Four question need to be solved.
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 289
Course Code Course Name Credits
ILO8029 Environmental Management 03
Objectives:
1. Understand and identify environmental issues relevant to India and global concerns
2. Learn concepts of ecology
3. Familiarise environment related legislations
Outcomes: Learner will be able to…
1. Understand the concept of environmental management
2. Understand ecosystem and interdependence, food chain etc.
3. Understand and interpret environment related legislations
Module Detailed Contents Hrs
01 Introduction and Definition of Environment: Significance of Environment
Management for contemporary managers, Career opportunities.
Environmental issues relevant to India, Sustainable Development, The Energy
scenario. 10
02 Global Environmental concerns : Global Warming, Acid Rain, Ozone
Depletion, Hazardous Wastes, Endangered life -species, Loss of Biodiversity,
Industrial/Man -made disasters, Atomic/Biomedical hazards, etc. 06
03 Concepts of Ecology: Ecosystems and interdependence between living
organisms, habitats, limiting factors, carrying capacity, food chain, etc. 05
04 Scope of Environment Management, Role & functions of Government as a
planning and regulating agency.
Environment Quality Management and Corporate Environmental Responsibility 10
05 Total Quality Environmental Management, ISO -14000, EMS certification. 05
06 General overview of major legislations like Environment Protection Act, Air (P
& CP) Act, Water (P & CP) Act, Wildlife Protection Act, Forest Act, Factories
Act, etc. 03
REFERENCES:
1. Environmental Management: Principles and Practice, C J Barrow, Routledge Publishers
London, 1999
2. A Handbook of Environmental Management Edited by Jon C. Lovett and David G. Ockwell,
Edward Elgar Publishing
3. Environmental Management, T V Ramachandra and Vijay Kulkarni, TERI Press
4. Indian Standard Environmental Management Systems — Requirements With Guidance For
Use, Bureau Of Indian Standards, February 2005
5. Environmental Management: An Indian Perspective, S N Chary and Vinod Vyasulu, Maclillan
India, 2000
University of Mumbai, B . E. (Information Technology ), Rev 2016 290
6. Introduction to Environmental Management, Mary K Theodore and Louise Theodore, CRC
Press
7. Environment and Ecology, Majid Hussain, 3rd Ed. Access Publishing.2015
Assessment :
Internal:
Asses sment consists of two tests out of which; one should be compulsory class test and the other is
either a class test or assignment on live problems or course project.
End Semester Theory Examination:
Some guidelines for setting up the question paper. Mini mum 80% syllabus should be covered in
question papers of end semester examination. In question paper weightage of each module will be
proportional to number of respective lecture hours as mention in the syllabus.
1. Question paper will comprise of total six question
2. All question carry equal marks
3. Questions will be mixed in nature (for example supposed Q.2 has part (a) from module 3 then
part (b) will be from any module other than module 3)
4. Only Four question need to be solved.